Copyright: 1995 - Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: 1995 - Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


No related topics were found.


No procedure topics were found.


Introduction to Corel PRESENTS

Welcome to Corel PRESENTS, the newest addition to the CorelDRAW suite of applications. PRESENTS combines ease of use, and flexibility to allow you to efficiently create and show eye-catching presentations.

No matter what your presentation needs: from providing several overheads for a team briefing to creating a sophisticated multimedia presentation, PRESENTS allows you to meet them quickly and easily; Wizards, templates, and background and layout libraries all provide quick ways to create stunning slides. Corel’s powerful drawing tools help you to customize your presentation with stylized text and graphic objects. There’s even a chart function for you to include bar, pie, gantt, and many other custom charts!

A tutorial is provided so that you can follow along either online or in the CorelDRAW book and quickly learn how to create professional-looking presentations.

With PRESENTS you can:

create overhead, paper, 35mm slide, or on-screen presentations

provide speaker notes, outline pages, and audience handouts

create your own animation sequences

incorporate Motion 3D and video clips

incorporate and edit sound files

insert charts, maps, and graphic objects

assign transition effects to bullets, text, objects, and slides

Use your imagination, and PRESENTS does the rest!


The Corel PRESENTS workplace

Documents created in Corel PRESENTS are called presentations. A presentation is a collection of slides, speaker notes, handouts, and an outline saved together in a file.

You can have multiple presentations open and switch between them at any time. You can even copy objects between presentations and look at the same presentation in different views.

As you work, you can resize windows, move them around your presentation, and customize your workspace. When you quit, Corel PRESENTS remembers your settings and uses them the next time you launch the program. If you like, you can use the Customize command on the Tools menu to save different workspace options for the next time you open the program.


Managing files

Corel PRESENTS provides you with the same file creation and management flexibility as other Windows 95 products. You can create, save, save to different locations, open existing, and close files.

When you create a presentation in PRESENTS, all of your slide elements are saved in one file: slides, outline, speaker notes, audience handouts, multimedia clips, and the presentation format.

You can save a Runtime Player version of your presentation so that you can play it on any sufficiently powerful computer; you don’t have to have PRESENTS installed.


Setting up presentation pages

With Corel PRESENTS, you can set the kind of presentation page you want to create. When you start a new PRESENTS file, default settings are applied to the page setup, which you can modify. If you choose to start a file from a template, a page setup that is appropriate for the type of presentation you selected is applied.

You can modify any aspect of the page setup: selecting page options for any slide; overhead transparencies; computer screen or monitor; tabloid, letter or legal pages; or you can customize your own page size.

You can create headers and footers, select between landscape or portrait page orientation, and set page margins.


Adding, delete and arranging slides
Adding, deleting, and arranging slides

The order in which you present slides to your audience is an integral part of your presentation. To help you develop a strong structure that supports the message you’re conveying, PRESENTS makes it easy for you to re-arrange slides within the presentation, to insert new slides anywhere in the presentation file, and to delete slides that you decide are unnecessary.

You can move slides around in the Slide Sorter view, which gives you a thumbnail representation of every slide in your file. With this ‘big picture’ view of the presentation structure, you are able to switch the location of any slide within the presentation. You can also use the Outline view to change the order of slides.

The Insert Slide Wizard guides you through the process of choosing where you want to insert a slide, how many slides to insert, what background you want to apply, and what layout to select.

You can delete slides from any point in the presentation. If, immediately after you’ve deleted the slide, you decide that you want to re-insert it into the presentation, you can use the Undo command.


Importing files

Corel applications support various file formats, but only some of them are native to the application. If you want to read a file that has a non-native format, you must import that file.

The Import command is located in the File menu. When you choose the command, a dialog box appears where you can choose the drive and folder where the file is saved. If you know the format of the file you want, you can choose it from the File As Type list to display only the files with that extension. To choose the file to import, double-click the filename in the display window.


Viewing presentations

Corel PRESENTS offers you eight different views of your presentation as you create it. Each view provides a different perspective of your work in progress and offers different editing capabilities. You can switch between views by choosing from the View menu or clicking the appropriate view button.

You can also preview a slide as it will appear during the presentation by clicking the Preview button.

The views are:

Slide	Includes a slide and any objects used to create the slide contents, such as graphics, text, animations, and sound. From Slide View you use all the other views to help build your presentation.

Slide Sorter	Displays all slides in the presentation as thumbnails. From Slide Sorter view, you can: rearrange the order of slides in the presentation; add or delete slides; apply layouts or backgrounds to groups of slides; assign transition effects; and show or hide the frame or jacket.

Outline	Displays the text of all presentation slides. You can: arrange the text of a slide in hierarchical order; rearrange the order of slides or bullets; choose the type of text, font or style; select basic effects such as bold, italic and underline; and display text in draft or preview mode.

Handout	Allows you to create handouts of the presentation for the audience. It provides you with a thumbnail of each slide to which you can add accompanying text.

Background	Displays the background elements common to all slides with the same background number in the current document, omitting all other objects. Use this command when you want to make changes to the background.

Master Layout	Allows you to view the master layout; change text attributes; change bullet styles; and move or size the frames.

Speaker Note	Provides a thumbnail representation of the current slide. The extra space on the page is for writing speaker notes. The page selection tabs located at the bottom of the presentation window can be used to navigate among your speaker notes.

Animation	Allows you to animate objects by defining a path along which objects can travel. Animation view includes VCR buttons that allow you to set and manage the display of animated objects and control the play and playback of animations when editing them.


Creating backgrounds

Presentation backgrounds are graphics applied to the underlying layer of a slide. Think of them as the canvas of the slides; on the canvas, you add and organize the information you want to present. You can have a blank background, leaving the canvas white. You can create more elaborate backgrounds by applying fills and including objects such as shapes, clipart, bitmaps created in other applications, and text. For example, a background could include your organization’s logo.

In most presentations, one background is selected and is applied to all slides. This gives a consistent look to the presentation. However, Corel PRESENTS gives you the added flexibility to choose different backgrounds for slides. There are many sample backgrounds in the background libraries. You can also design and save groups of backgrounds to create your own libraries.


Working with layouts

Layouts are one of the key elements to building your presentation. Master layouts are predefined frames that provide consistent styles for all slides that follow the master. The master also dictates the sizing and positioning of objects such as title, body text, and charts. For example, if you move the body in the ‘Slide master’, the bodies of all slides following the master will move whether it be a text, map, OLE object, or chart body.

As you create a presentation, you may want to change the look of a master layout. You don't lose any text or graphics when a slide adopts a modified master layout and the changes that you make apply to all slides with the same master.

You can select different layouts for slides, speaker notes, and audience handouts from the layout library.


Adding objects

Corel PRESENTS presentations are created by adding objects to slides. The objects can be text, shapes, curves, charts and chart annotations, bitmap images, animation sequences, and even sound or video files. You can create them directly in PRESENTS using various drawing tools. You can also use other applications to create objects and bring them into your presentation using the Import command, the Paste command, or Object Linking and Embedding (OLE).

PRESENTS is an OLE client,  which means that it can receive objects created in any OLE serverapplication.  Many Windows-based software packages are OLE servers, including CorelDRAW and Corel PHOTO-PAINT.

Objects can be embedded or linked in a Corel PRESENTS presentation.

Text can be dragged from your favorite word processor and dropped directly in PRESENTS’ Outline view.

When working in background view, any text or  object added to a slide becomes part of the background.

 Related Topics


Creating basic objects

Corel PRESENTS provides a variety of tools that you can use to create shapes. The Freehand and Bezier tools allow you to create shapes line by line, or curve by curve. For example, you can draw irregular shapes or sign your name with these tools. The Rectangle, Ellipse, and Star tools allow you to create shapes by clicking and dragging. For example, you can create a circle with the Ellipse tool or a ten-sided star with the Star tool.

 Related Topics


Linking and embedding objects

Windows' Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) offers two ways to connect files from separate programs: linking and embedding. As the name implies, linked objects are data, text, or graphic objects created in one application (the server), which remains linked to a file created in another application (the client). When you update the original linked file, it can be updated in both client and server applications. Double-clicking a linked or embedded object switches you back to the original file in a special session of the server application where you can make your changes. Your computer must have enough Random Access Memory and system resources to run PRESENTS and the other applications you are using at the same time.

Embedded Objects

Embedded objects are placed, or embedded, in the presentation file you're working on. Double-click the embedded object to edit it; this activates the server program from within your file. The difference between embedded and linked objects is that for embedded objects, OLE makes a copy of the original file. No link is maintained between an embedded object and the original file; the original file does not update when you edit the embedded object, nor does the embedded object change if the original file is changed.

Embedded objects are more portable than linked objects. If you are moving files between systems, the only requirement is that the new system have both the server and client programs.

Linked Objects

Linked object files can be updated when the original file changes in the server application. Linked objects are not as portable as embedded objects. If you are moving files between computer systems, to preserve the link you must copy both source and destination files to the new system, which must have both server and client programs installed.

Drag and Drop

Drag and Drop is a popular feature of OLE. Drag and Drop allows you to select and drag information from one application and drop it into another. When used from an OLE server to an OLE client application, Drag and Drop creates embedded objects. If the application you are dragging from is not a server, Drag and Drop acts like cut and paste, moving the selected data from place to place.

Linking and embedding procedures vary somewhat between applications. Check the server application's documentation for additional information.

 Related Topics


Shaping objects

Objects are constructed from basic elements called paths. A line, for example, is a path drawn between a start point and an end point. Each point is called a node. A line is an open path that cannot be filled. A closed path (e.g., a circle) can be filled. A path must have at least two nodes, and can have a virtually unlimited number of nodes. An object can consist of several separate paths, called subpaths (e.g., a donut created from a circle within a circle).

The Shape tool and Node Edit Roll-Up allow you to change the characteristics of a path and its nodes. Doing this allows you to reshape an object. To edit the paths and nodes of an object, convert the object to curves using the Convert to Curves command in the Arrange menu. This step isn't necessary for objects drawn with the Pencil tool or Bezier tool because they are already curve objects.

Three special types of shaping don't require converting the object to curves:

rounding the corners of rectangles and squares

creating arcs and pie wedges from ellipses and circles

Note

You cannot edit text after you convert it to curves.

You cannot convert groups of objects to curves.


Arranging objects

To change the stacking order of objects in a layer, use the commands in the Arrange menu (To Front, To Back, Forward One, and Back One).

 Related Topics


Creating charts

The chart-building feature of Corel PRESENTS contains two principal tools to help you create impressive charts and spreadsheets: the chart-building screen, called Chart View, and an underlying spreadsheet program called the Datasheet.

The chart feature allows you to simply and quickly produce complex and colorful charts and datasheets, add sizzle to your presentations, and compute a multitude of mathematical formulas. Available chart types include line, bar, area and pie charts, histograms, scatter and 3D charts, bubble charts, Gantt charts, Polar charts, and Radar charts.

The Datasheet is the powerful spreadsheet program underlying your charts. Whether you're building a new chart or changing an existing one, the Datasheet is a valuable data analysis tool. You are able to create and analyze your own data or bring in chart data using OLE 2.0.


Assigning transitions

Transitions add a dynamic sense of movement to your presentation; you can assign transitions to bullets, text, objects, and slides.

From the Transitions command, you can select the style of movement, direction, and duration and number of steps for the text, object, or slide that you choose.

From the Path command, you can also set a path that the transition will follow.

Tip

You can set the transitions for all the slides at once by selecting all the slides in Slide Sorter view, then choosing a transition. The transition is applied to all the slides in your presentation.


Adding sound, video and animation
Adding sound, video, and animation

Adding multimedia effects such as sound, video, and animation add variety to your presentation and enhance its message. Corel PRESENTS offers many features to incorporate multimedia effects into your presentation:

Sound	You can insert sound clips into your presentation, edit the sounds (called waveforms), sequence cels, select mono or stereo output, and create special sound effects.

Animation	Using the Animation menu, you can animate objects that you create in PRESENTS. You can create a multiple cel actor, sequence cels, set a path, and play the animation with VCR tools. You can also create animated objects that change size as they move along the animation path.

Video	You can insert, move, resize, and delete video clips (.AVI) within your file. You cannot edit video.


Multiple-cel actors overview

The actor's cycle speed depends on the number of cels and the actor's size in each cel. The cycle speed is the flow or smoothness of movement and the speed at which the actor moves through the entire number of cels. A high number of cels causes the actor's speed to decrease, because the actor's position changes little in each cel and it takes longer to cycle through all of the cels. If you want to make an actor move more rapidly and more abruptly, lower the number of cels.


Wave Editor overview

Sounds are displayed as waveforms in the Wave Editor. A waveform is a graphic representation of a sound. Time is displayed along the horizontal axis, and volume along the vertical axis. The Wave Editor lets you edit sounds you have created or imported using the menus at the top of the window. You can cut, copy, paste, and delete portions of the sound, as well as apply various sound processing effects.

If you have selected stereo sound in the Output Devices dialog box, the sound is played through two channels: left and right. The sound that goes through each of the channels is usually different (unless the sound was recorded as mono), therefore, the left and right waveforms are visually different. You can edit either channel. PRESENTS offers many controls to customize and add effects to your sound files:

Output Devices dialog box	changes the Channels (mono or stereo), the Sample Size (8 Bits or 16 Bits), and the Sample Rate (44.1 kHz, 22.05 kHz, or 11.025 kHz). Channel controls whether the sound is played in stereo or mono. The Sample Size of a recording controls the dynamic range of sounds recorded, and therefore has an impact on the file size. For example, the 16-Bit option records a greater dynamic sound range, and as a result the quality of the recording is higher. However, the file size is much larger because of the number of bits used. Sample Rate controls the number of times per second that the recorder takes a sample of the sound when it is being recorded. The final quality of the recorded sound also depends on this Sampling Rate, where: 44.1 kHz is CD quality, 22.05 kHz is close to FM radio or analog tape quality, and 11.025 is AM radio quality.

Change Characteristics command

Silence	visually “flattens” the selected portion of sound wave and therefore effectively silences the sound.

Fade Up	opens the Fade In Wave dialog box. Enter a percentage in the Fade In to % field. Fade In makes the current selection (or entire sound) start at a percentage of the original level and increase 100%.

Fade Out	opens the Fade Out Wave dialog box. Enter a percentage in the Fade Out field. Fade Out makes the current selection (or entire sound) start at its current volume level and decrease to a percentage of the level at the end of the selected portion before the command was applied.

Amplify	enters a percentage in the Amplitude % field. The percentage entered in this field either decreases the sound's volume (for values from 1% to 99%), making the sound quieter when it is played back, or increases it, (for values from 101% to 9999%), making the sound louder. A value of 100% has no effect on the volume. Setting this value to 0% silences the selected portion of the sound.

Reverse	reverses the entire waveform or the selected portion of it. When played back, the sound plays in reverse.

Echo	echoes or repeats the entire waveform or the selected portion, but with a decrease in volume. The repeated sound is also shifted forward in time. The overall result is that, as in real life, you hear the original sound first, then following a short delay, you here the echo at a diminished volume. Select Echo a number of times to increase the echo effect.


Creating speaker notes and audience handouts

When you create a presentation in PRESENTS, speaker notes and audience handouts are saved in the same file as your slide presentation.

Speaker notes are an effective presentation aid for the person speaking to the audience. Each slide is represented in thumbnail form on a notes page, along with room for you to type key notes that you want to remember.

You can also print handout pages for your audience, so they can follow along as you make your presentation. Handouts make it easy for the audience to make notes during your presentation, and to remember points later; they have thumbnail representations of two slides per page, with room for you to add relevant text.

You can change the layout of the speaker notes or handouts to suit your needs, by selecting a new master layout or modifying the existing layout.


Creating the screen show

Putting the finishing touches on your presentation has never been easier. PRESENTS provides you with an Options command from which you can set the controls for your screen show features. You can choose to automatically advance slides, run the show continuously, and display the mouse pointer on-screen during the screen show.

You can set timelines that determine the time on screen for slides, transitions, animations, text, and objects. You can use timelines to add movement to your presentation.

You can also create a portable screen show. This allows you to take your presentation on the road and play it on computers that do not have Corel PRESENTS installed, using the Corel Runtime Player.

Tip

Don’t forget to practice your presentation several times before you give it to an audience. Timing is critical!


Transitions command (Animation menu)

Opens the Transitions tab in the Properties dialog box, which allows you to choose opening and closing transitions for the selected item, including the transition type, direction, duration and number of steps to use for the transition.

 Related Topics


Path command (Animation menu)

Opens the Path tab in the Properties dialog box, which allows you to choose a preset path for the object to travel.

 Related Topics


Create Actor command (Animation menu)
Create/Edit Actor command (Animation menu)

Opens the Create/Edit Actor dialog box, from which you can choose the objects on the slide that you want to use as cels in the actor you create.

 Related Topics


Create Actor Group dialog box
Create/Edit Actor dialog box

Allows you to create actors from any number of objects on a slide and then name the actor. The objects you add to the actor each inhabit a cel of the actor. When the animation runs, each cel in the actor displays according to the order you give them using the Cel Sequence command.


Lists the graphic and text objects in the slide. You can use these objects to build actors.


Click to move selected objects from the Objects in slide list box and add them to the cels in actor list box to create an actor. Objects display in the order listed. You can drag the objects to reorder them in the list.


Allows you to modify the actor by removing objects from it. Click to remove selected objects from the Cels in actor list box to the Objects in slide list box.


Lists the objects you identify as cels to be used in the actor. You can drag objects to reorder their place in the list.


Type the name you want to give the actor. You can use any alphanumeric character the keyboard can type.


Cel Sequence command (Animation menu)

Opens the Cel Sequence dialog box, which allows you to create the effects and set the speed for the play of an actors cels.

 Related Topics


Cel Sequence dialog box

Creates the effects, speed and cel number for the multicel actor.


Select the effect to apply to the actor, from the list box.


Enable the appropriate button to select how fast the actor moves.


Type which cel number the displayed object will be assigned in the sequence.


Custom Path command (Animation menu)

Turns the mouse pointer into a pencil, allowing you to draw a freehand path along which the selected items move.

 Related Topics


First Frame command (Animation menu)

Returns to the first frame of the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Previous Frame command (Animation menu)

Backs up one frame from the current point in the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Play Reverse command (Animation menu)

Plays the animation backward, from the current point in the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Stop command (Animation menu)

Stops playing the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Play command (Animation menu)

Plays the animation from the current point in the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Next Frame command (Animation menu)

Moves forward one frame from the current point in the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Last Frame command (Animation menu)

Moves forward to the last frame of the animation file.

The command is also available on the VCR toolbar, located at the bottom of the presentation page.

 Related Topics


Advance to Next Key Frame command (Animation menu)

Snaps the object to the next key frame of the animation path.

 Related Topics


Advance to Previous Key Frame command (Animation menu)

Snaps the object to the previous key frame of the animation path.

 Related Topics


Advance Time command (Animation menu)

Advances the time based on the time set in the Tools, Options, Animation option. You can use the Advance Time command as a quick way of creating a uniform time flow along a path, instead of using the Animation Trackbar.

 Related Topics


To Front command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object in front of all others on the page.

 Related Topics


To Back command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object behind all others on the page but still in front of the slide’s background.

 Related Topics


Forward One command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object on top of the object that's in front of it.

 Related Topics


Backward One command (Arrange menu)

Moves the selected object in back of the object that's behind it.

 Related Topics


Group command (Arrange menu)

Groups all selected objects together so that they can be selected and manipulated as a single object.

When an object in a group is selected, a single highlighting box appears around the entire group. Any command or operation applied to the group affects all objects in the group except for those listed below:

Combine (Arrange menu)

Break Apart (Arrange menu)

Fit Text to Path (Format menu)

Any operations using the Shape Tool

You can also collect groups into larger groups with other objects and/or groups. A single group can have as many as 10 sub-levels of grouping.

To break a group apart, use the Ungroup command.

 Related Topics


Ungroup command (Arrange menu)

Breaks up the selected group into its individual objects. If you have groups of objects grouped together, Ungroup breaks up one level of grouping at a time.

 Related Topics


Combine command (Arrange menu)

Combines the selected curve/line segments into a single curve object. If you use Combine on rectangles, ellipses or text objects, Corel PRESENTS converts them to curves before converting them into a single curve object.

Use Combine when you want to:

save time when editing many nodes or curve/line segments in different curve objects

join nodes on two different curve objects

create clipping holes or masks

conserve memory when working with slides which contain many lines and curves that share the same outline attributes

 Related Topics


Break Apart command (Arrange menu)

Converts an object made up of multiple subpaths into individual curve objects. Use Break Apart when you want to:

change an object that you previously combined with others using the Combine command in the Arrange menu

assign different fill or outline attributes to individual characters in a text object previously converted to curves

fill transparent regions that occur when you combine overlapping objects

 Related Topics


Convert to Curve command (Arrange menu)

Converts the selected rectangle, ellipse or text object to a series of curves and/or lines that you can shape with the Shape tool. Objects converted to curves are called curve objects.

Note

Once an object is converted to curves, it is not possible to return it to its original object type, except with the Undo command in the Edit menu.

Text converted to curves cannot be edited using the Text tool or any of the text editing commands.

If you convert text with overlapping characters to curves, the overlapping areas will be transparent.

If you applied different outlines and/or fills to individual characters in a string of Artistic text, converting the string to curves creates a group of objects (one object for each different fill/outline combination).

 Related Topics


Fit Object To Slide command (Arrange menu)

Scales the selected object to fit the dimensions of the slide. Applying this command to the background object in your presentation prevents white gaps from showing around the edges of your slides.

The Fit Object To Slide command changes the aspect ratio of the selected object, if necessary, to fit it to the slide.

Note

Corel PRESENTS animation files cannot be fitted to the slide. Other animation file formats may be fitted to the slide.

 Related Topics


Clear Transformations (Arrange menu)

Reverses the following transformations and effects, allowing you to restore an object to its original size and orientation:

resets all rotation and skew transformations to zero

returns the center of rotation to the object's center

resets to 100% any scaling or stretching

When applied to a group of objects, only transformations made to the group are cleared. Those made to objects before they were grouped are not cleared.

Note

The Clear Transformations command does not clear Move, Size or Scale operations.

 Related Topics


Undo command (Edit menu)

Reverses actions performed during the current session. Use Undo after making a change that you do not want to implement. Immediately after choosing Undo, the Redo command becomes available, allowing you to restore what you just undid. The command name changes to Can't Undo when the last action taken cannot be undone.

You cannot Undo the following actions:

Any change of view (Zoom-in, Zoom-out, etc.)

Any file operations (Open, Save, Import, etc.)

 	Any selection operations (Marquee select, node select, etc.)

The name of the Undo command changes depending on the last action; for example, Undo Fill or Undo Rotate.

 Related Topics


Redo command (Edit menu)

Restores the action just undone. The Redo command only becomes available immediately after you have used the Undo command. The name of the Redo command changes depending on the last action {emdash} for example, Redo Fill or Redo Rotate.

 Related Topics


Repeat command (Edit menu)

Applies, when possible, the most recent command or action to the currently selected object. Useful when performing actions such as rotating objects to the same angle.

 Related Topics


Cut command/button

Removes an object from the current slide and places it on the Clipboard. Once on the Clipboard, you can paste the object onto another slide or another Windows application.

Notes

In Slide Sorter view, the Cut command can be used to cut entire slides.

Objects cut from other programs and pasted into Corel PRESENTS usually appear in the center of the slide.

To permanently remove the selected object, use the Delete command in the Edit menu.

 Related Topics


Edit, Copy
Copy command/button

Places a copy of an object onto the Clipboard. Once it is on the Clipboard, you can paste the object into another Windows application or Corel PRESENTS presentation.

Notes

In Slide Sorter view, the Copy command can be used to copy entire slides.

Objects copied between PRESENTS slides are pasted onto the current slide at the same size and location as the original.

Objects copied from other programs are usually pasted onto the center of the slide.

 Related Topics


Paste command/button

Places a copy of the object currently on the Clipboard onto the active slide. The object remains on the Clipboard until you copy or cut another object or end the current Windows session.

Notes

When objects that are cut or copied from another Corel PRESENTS slide are pasted onto the current slide, they are the same size and occupy the same coordinate position as the original.

When objects that are cut or copied from other programs are pasted into the active slide they are placed in the center of the slide.

Pasting slides that are cut or copied in Slide Sorter view automatically places them after the selected slide.

 Related Topics


Paste Special command (Edit menu)

Inserts information from the Clipboard into your drawing. You can specify the format the information will be in and, optionally, create a link to the source file.

 Related Topics


Delete command (Edit menu)

Deletes the selected object. If no subsequent action has been performed, you can restore a deleted object by choosing the Undo command.

 Related Topics


Duplicate command (Edit menu)

Adds a copy of the selected object to current slide. By default, the copy is placed on top of the original and offset down and to the right. It is also selected automatically.

 Related Topics


Select All command (Edit menu)

Selects all objects on the slide in Slide view or all slides in the presentation in Slide sorter view. When all objects or slides are selected, you can apply an action universally.

For example, you can use the Background command from the Edit menu and omit the background for all pages in the current presentation.

 Related Topics


 Edit Background command (Edit menu)

Opens a flyout menu, which allows you to choose an existing background to edit. You can choose from the Blank, Uniform Fill, Outline Fill, Image, Texture fill or From Library commands.

 Related Topics


Background, Blank command (Edit menu)

Choose the command to not apply any background to the selected slides.

 Related Topics


Background, Uniform Fill command (Edit menu)

Opens the Uniform Fill dialog box, which allows you to select Color modes, palettes, or mixers to use; modify color and palette options; or create a custom palette. Uniform fills are solid colors; the fill is applied to the entire slide, as a background layer.

You do not have to already have a uniform fill background applied to the slide to use this command.

 Related Topics


Background, Fountain Fill command (Edit menu)

Opens the Fountain fill dialog box, which allows you to choose the fountain type, angle. steps and color blend or to apply to the background. A Fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path. You can have a direct blend from one color to another, or a cascade of different colors. The fill is applied to the entire slide, as a background layer.

You do not have to already have a Fountain fill background applied to the slide to use this command.

 Related Topics


Background, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern command (Edit menu)

Opens the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box, which allows you to choose two-color pattern fills, select the colors, change the pattern size and tile the pattern. The fill is applied to the entire slide, as a background layer.

You do not have to already have a background pattern applied to the slide to use this command.

 Related Topics


Background, Full Color Bitmap Pattern command (Edit menu)

Opens the Full Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box, which allows you to import bitmap images to use as fills. You can choose the pattern size, and tile the pattern. The fill is applied to the entire slide, as a background layer.

You do not have to already have a background pattern applied to the slide to use this command.

 Related Topics


Background, Texture Fill command (Edit menu)

Opens the Texture fill dialog box, which allows you to choose a texture from the library, and modify it to apply as a background. A Texture fill is a factually-generated picture that you can use to give your object the appearance of natural materials. You can choose from a series of pre-generated textures, or randomly generate variations.

You do not have to already have a Texture fill background applied to the slide to use this command.

 Related Topics


Background, Full Color Bitmap Pattern command (Edit menu)
Background, Vector Pattern command (Edit menu)

Opens the Vector Pattern dialog box, which allows you to import vector images to use as fills. You can choose the pattern size, and tile the pattern. The fill is applied to the entire slide, as a background layer.

You do not have to already have a background pattern applied to the slide to use this command.

 Related Topics


# IDH_Format_BKGND_fromlib$ Background, From Library command (Edit menu)> proc4


Find command (Edit menu)

Searches for specified text in the current slide, speaker note or handout.

 Related Topics


Replace command (Edit menu)

Searches for and replaces specified text in the current slide, speaker note or handout.

 Related Topics


Go To command (Edit menu)

Opens a flyout menu from which you can choose either Slide, Handout or Speaker Note. The Go To dialog box shows the current page number.


Go To Slide command (Edit menu)

Opens the Go To Slide dialog box, which allows you to choose a slide to move to directly. You can also click on the tab scrolling buttons, located at the bottom left of PRESENTS.


Go To Handout command (Edit menu)

Opens the Go To Handout dialog box, which allows you to choose a handout page to go to directly.


Go To Speaker Note command (Edit menu)

Opens the Go To Speaker Note dialog box, which allows you to choose a speaker note page to go to directly.


Go To Slide dialog box
Go To Slide, Handout or Speaker Note dialog box

Moves directly to the slide, handout or speaker note you choose.


Choose a slide, handout or speaker note to move to.


Links command (Edit menu)

Lists all the links in the current file. This list includes internal links to other Corel PRESENTS files and external links to other Windows applications.


Object, Open command (Edit menu)

Opens the objectwithin its server application.


Object, Convert command (Edit menu)

Converts the selected object to a different object type.


Object, Edit command (Edit menu)

Allows you to edit the information stored in the server application, while remaining within the PRESENTS window. You can also double-click inside the object to open the server.


Properties command (Edit menu)

Opens the Properties dialog box for the chosen item (slide, object, text).


Slide Properties dialog box

Opens the Transitions, Slide, and Header/Footer tabs, from which you can set the slide opening and closing transitions, create headers and footers, type a slide name, and choose show/hide options for the slide.

 Related Topics


 Transitions page

Sets the opening and closing transitions for the selected item, including the transition type, direction, duration and steps.


Choose the route the opening transition follows.


Choose the direction in which the opening transition moves.


Choose how long (in seconds) it takes for the opening transition to follow the route.


Choose the number of movements (in seconds/frame) the opening transition makes, based on the duration.


Choose the route the closing transition follows.


Choose the direction in which the closing transition moves.


Choose how long (in seconds) it takes for the closing transition to follow the route.


Choose the number of movements (in seconds/frame) the closing transition makes, based on the duration.


 Slide page

Sets the slide properties, including naming the slide, hiding the slide, setting the slide duration, displaying the header, footer and margins. The name of the slide appears on its tab at the bottom on the presentation window and in the Object Manager.


Type the name you want to give to the slide.


Enable the check box to hide the slide.


Type the number of seconds which you want the slide to appear on-screen.


Enable the check box to display the margins set in the Page Setup dialog box.


Enable the check box to display the header created in the Page Setup dialog box, if applicable.


Enable the check box to display the footer created in the Page Setup dialog box, if applicable.


 Header/Footer page

Creates headers and footers in the presentation slides, handouts and speaker notes.


Object Properties dialog box

Opens the Transitions, Path, and Attributes tabs, from which you can set the object opening and closing transitions, set a transition path, and create links to the master layout for the selected object.

If you selected a text object, the Text Effects tab is also displayed.


 Transitions page

Sets the opening and closing transitions for the selected object, including the transition type, direction, duration and steps.


 Path page

Sets the path along which the selected item’s transition moves.


Choose the path along which the transition moves.


 Attributes page

Links the fill, outline, position, size, font style, font size, and deletion attributes from the layout and text frames to the master layout.


Enable the check box to link the object’s fill with the master layout frame.


Enable the check box to link the object’s outline with the master layout frame.


Enable the check box to link the object’s position with the master layout frame.


Enable the check box to link the object’s size with the master layout frame.


Enable the check box to link the object’s font style and size with the master layout frame, if applicable.


Enable the check box to delete links between the object and the master layout frame.


Text Effects page

Sets the effects for the selected Paragraph text grouping, including the transition type, direction, duration and steps that the text will enter and exit the screen. Also enables the option to separate bullets from text.


Choose either Paragraph or line as the text to which the transition is applied.


Enable the check box to separate the text transition from bullet transitions. You can then click the Options button, and set a transition for the bullet.


 Enable the check box to pause each paragraph, or the lines within a paragraph (depending on your selection in the Grouping box) as the text appears on the screen. You manually advance each paragraph/line. When you want the text removed from the slide, you click the manual advance once, and the text flies off the screen without pauses.


Click the button to open the Bullet Settings dialog box, which allows you to separate the text transition from bullet transitions.


Click an arrow to set the direction of the transition.


Bullet Settings dialog box
!ALink(transitions_proc;;;;;;;;,0,"default_procedure",)Bullet Settings dialog box

Sets the timing, entry and exit directions for the selected bullet.


Choose either Before, After or Same to choose when the bullet appears, in relation to the related text.


Choose the direction from which the bullet appears on the screen.


Choose the direction from which the bullet leaves the screen.


Handouts pge
Handouts Page

Sets the handouts properties, including naming the handout, hiding or showing the header, footer and margins. The name of the handout appears on its tab at the bottom on the presentation window and in the Object Manager.


Type the name you want to give to the handout. The name of the handout appears on its tab at the bottom on the presentation window and in the Object Manager.


Speaker Notes Page

Sets the speaker notes properties, including naming the speaker slide, hiding the slide for a set duration, displaying the header, footer and margins. The name of the speaker note appears on its tab at the bottom on the presentation window and in the Object Manager.


Type the name you want to give to the speaker note. The name of the speaker note appears on its tab at the bottom on the presentation window and in the Object Manager.


Video Page

Shows the drive, directory and file name of the video file. You can also choose to display the video in the  full screen.


Enable the check box to show the video at the full screen size. If you leave the check box disabled, the video plays at the same size as the video frame on the slide.


  Background page

Provides information on the current background fill, other slides in the presentation using the background, and other information on presentation backgrounds.


New command (File menu)
_New command [File menu]

Provides access to the Document, From Template and From Wizard commands, which you can use to start a new presentation.

New presentations use the same ruler and guideline settings plus the Presentation Options in effect for the current session. Use the Preferences command in the Tools menu to change presentation options.

 Related Topics


Document command (File,New)

Starts a new, blank presentation. The new presentation uses the default page, ruler, and guideline settings. Click File, Page Setup to change the page settings.

 Related Topics


From Template command (File,New)

Opens the Templates dialog box, which allows you to start a new presentation from a template of your choice. The template provides one slide, with a preset background and layout. You can add slides to the presentation, following the template style, by clicking Insert, Slide.

 Related Topics


Templates dialog box

Allows you to start a new presentation from a template of your choice. The template provides one slide, with a preset background and layout. You can add slides to the presentation, following the template style, by clicking Insert, Slide.


Double-click the thumbnail that you want to use as the template for your presentation.  type of presentation you want to create. The template provides one slide, with a preset background and layout. You can add slides to the presentation, following the template style, by clicking Insert, Slide.


From Wizard command [File menu]

Opens the Corel PRESENTS Presentation Wizard dialog box, which guides you through the creation of a new presentation that is customized to your requirements. You respond to a series of simple questions, and the Wizard reflects the formatting you choose.

 Related Topics


Corel PRESENTS Presentation Wizard dialog box (Page 1)
Corel PRESENTS Presentation Wizard dialog box

Respond to the questions in each dialog box; the Wizard creates a new presentation that is customized to your requirements. Click Next to continue.

Note

The presentation is based on the default presentation template, but the formatting reflects your choices when responding to the Wizard.


Corel PRESENTS Presentation Wizard dialog box (Page 2)
Corel PRESENTS Presentation Wizard dialog box

Choose the type of presentation you want to create. Based on the topic you select, a presentation is created with backgrounds, layouts, sample titles and body text cues. You can modify the presentation to suit you requirements.


Choose the type of presentation you want to create. A presentation is created with backgrounds, layouts, sample titles and body text cues. You can modify the presentation to suit your requirements.


Open command/button

Opens the Open dialog box, which lets you choose an existing presentation, background or screen show. If you already have a presentation open, PRESENTS opens the presentation over the original. Use Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically to display a number of presentations simultaneously.

 Related Topics


Open dialog box

Opens an existing presentation in a new window. If you already have a presentation open, PRESENTS opens the presentation over the original. Use Tile Horizontally or Tile Vertically to display a number of presentations simultaneously.


Choose the directory from which you want to open the presentation file. Click the down arrow to see how the current folder fits into the hierarchy on your computer. Double-click a file to open it.


Shows the folders or files stored in the directory you specified in the Look in box.

Click the filename in the display window. The name is inserted in the File Name box. Double-click on the filename in the display window to open the presentation file.


Type the name of the file you want to open.

Click the filename in the display window. The name is inserted in the File Name box. Double-click the filename in the display window to open the presentation file.


Click the type of file you want to open.

Presentations have the .CPR extension. Background libraries have the .CPB extension, and portable screen show files have the .CRP extension.


Click to view a higher level of folders.


Click to create a sub-folder under the level listed in the Look in box.

To delete a sub-folder you create, choose the folder and press delete.


Click to list the folders or files stored in the directory in the Look in box.


Click to view details on the name, size, type, and modification date of the folders or files listed in the display window.


Click to open the file you identified in the File Name box. You can also double-click the filename in the display window to open the file.


Save command/button

Saves the current presentation under the name displayed in the title bar. If you have not saved the presentation yet, the Save As dialog box appears, prompting you to enter a name. If you are altering an existing presentation, but want to keep the original version, use the Save As command.

Note

When saving a presentation, the following settings are saved with the file:

page size and orientation

ruler units and origins

snap to guidelines status

presentation options

 Related Topics


Save As command (File menu)

Opens the Save As dialog box, which allows you to save:

a new presentation

a new version of an existing presentation

an existing presentation with a new name or in a different location

 Related Topics


Save As dialog box

Saves a new presentation, a new version of an existing presentation, or an existing presentation with a new name or in a different location.


Choose the directory in which you want to save the presentation file. Click the down arrow to see how the current folder fits into the hierarchy on your computer.


Shows the folders or files stored in the directory you specified in the Save in box.


Type the name of the file you want to save. You can also type the full path of the file. For example, you can type c:\myfiles\show.cpr to save the show.cpr file to the myfiles directory on the c: drive.


Choose .CPR as the type of file to be saved for a presentation.

To save a background, choose .CPB as the file type.

To save a portable screen show, choose .CRP as the file type.


Click to view a higher level of folders.


Click to create a sub-folder under the level listed in the Save in box.

To delete a sub-folder you create, choose the folder and press delete.


Click to list the folders or files stored in the directory in the Save in box.


Click to view details about the name, size, type, and modification date of the folders or files listed in the display window.


Click to save the file you identified in the File Name box.


Runtime File Options dialog box

Allows you to embed fonts and copy animation files to the same directory as you are saving the Runtime Player (.CRP) file.


Enable the check box when you are creating a Runtime file for your presentation. This option ensures that even if the fonts you used in your presentation are not installed on the machine that you’re running the Runtime file, you won’t lose your font styles.


Enable the check box to copy animation files that you inserted into the presentation to the same directory as you are saving the Runtime Player file.


Save All command (File menu)

Saves all open presentations. If you have not saved a presentation yet, the Save As dialog box appears, prompting you to enter a name. If you are altering an existing presentation, but want to keep the original version, use the Save As command.

Note

When saving a presentation, the following settings are saved with the file:

page size and orientation

ruler units and origins

snap to guidelines status

presentation options

 Related Topics


Close command (File menu)

Closes the active presentation window. If you made changes since you last saved the presentation, a message appears asking if you want to save them.

If you choose Yes and the presentation is unnamed, the Save As dialog box appears so that you can name and save the file.

Tip

You can also close a presentation by choosing Close from the presentation window's Control menu.


Import command (File menu)

Brings files into Corel PRESENTS from other programs. You can also use this command to merge other PRESENTS files with the current presentation. You can have PRESENTS choose the import filter type for you by choosing All Files in the List Files of Type box.


Send command (File menu)

Opens Microsoft Exchange, which allows you to send and receive electronic mail or fax messages. You send messages from and store all messages in Microsoft Exchange. You must have the necessary hardware, and belong to the Exchange.


Print command (File menu)

Opens the Print dialog box. This dialog box allows you to print your work, change the print options, and change the printer and printer properties.


Allows you to print slides, handouts, speaker notes, or the presentation outline.


Print Setup command (File menu)

Opens the Print Setup dialog box. This dialog box allows you to change the printer and printer properties.


Page Setup command (File menu)

Opens the Page Setup dialog box, which allows you to set the page size, orientation, margins, headers and footers for all slides in the current presentation. The Page Setup dialog box has two sections: Size/Margin and Header/Footer.

When you save a presentation, the Page Setup settings are also saved.

The page orientation you choose here should match the orientation specified with the File, Print Setup command.

 Related Topics


Page Setup dialog box

Opens the Size/Margin and Header/Footer tabs, from which you can set the page size, orientation, margins, headers, and footers for all slides in the current presentation. When you save a presentation, the Page Setup settings are also saved.

The page orientation you choose here should match the orientation specified with the File,Print Setup command.


Size/Margin page

Sets options for the current view, page size, and margin width of the presentation page. If you change the page size, you can set object scaling options to ensure that objects maintain their aspect ratios. The page orientation you choose here should match the orientation specified with the File, Print Setup command.


Enable the button to set the default view for all slides in the current presentation to Slide View, with background displayed. You must have created or chosen a background from the library for a background to be displayed. Otherwise, the background will display as a white page.


Enable the radio button to set the default view for all slides in the current presentation to Speaker Notes view. Speaker Notes display a thumbnail of the slide, with a body text section for you to add notes.


Enable the radio button to set the default view for all slides in the current presentation to Handout view. Handouts display thumbnails of several slides per page, with body text sections for you to add notes for the audience.


Enable the radio button to set the page to be longer vertically than horizontally. The page is oriented so that it prints from left to right across its shortest dimension.


Enable the radio button to set the page to be longer horizontally than vertically. The page is oriented so that it prints from left to right across its longest dimension.


Choose one of the standard paper sizes or choose Custom.

The following options set page sizes for producing slides, overheads and screen shows.

Slide	chooses a page dimension with the same aspect ratio as a 35mm slide.

Screen	chooses a page dimension with same aspect ratio as your computer screen.

Overhead	adds margins that are required when mounting overheads in frames.


If you chose a custom paper size, set the horizontal dimensions that you require. You can specify a custom page size up to 17x17 inches.


If you chose a custom paper size, set the vertical dimensions that you require. You can specify a custom page size up to 17x17 inches.


Set the distance from the top of the page that you want the top margin to appear. The margin cannot be less than the margin set for your printer.


Set the distance from the bottom of the page that you want the bottom margin to appear. The margin cannot be less than the margin set for your printer.


Set the distance from the left side of the page that you want the left margin to appear. The margin cannot be less than the margin set for your printer.


Set the distance from the right side of the page that you want the right margin to appear. The margin cannot be less than the margin set for your printer.


If you changed the paper size, enable the radio button to modify the aspect ratio of all objects to best fit the page.


If you changed the paper size, enable the radio button to change the aspect ratio of all objects to fit to the page size.


If you changed the paper size, enable the radio button to leave the aspect ratio of all objects as is.


Header/Footer page

Creates headers and footers in the presentation slides, handouts and speaker notes. The header repeats at the top of every page or slide; the footer at the bottom.


Enable the radio button to create a header and footer for your presentation slides. The header and footer are diplayed on every slide in the presentation.


Enable the radio button to create a header and footer for your presentation handouts. The header and footer are diplayed on every handout page.


Enable the radio button to create a header and footer for your presentation speaker notes. The header and footer are diplayed on every speaker notes page.


Choose the information to insert into the header from the list box. You can click the Custom Header button to type your own information to display in the header.


Click to create a customized header. You can change the font type, size and characteristics (bold, italics and underlining); choose macros to insert information; or type your own text in the Left, Center, and Right display windows.


Displays the information that you chose or created. You can type your own text in the Left, Center, and Right display windows.


Click to create a customized footer. You can change the font type, size and characteristics (bold, italics and underlining); choose macros to insert information; or type your own text in the Left, Center, and Right display windows.


Customize Header/Footer dialog box

Creates customized headers and footers in the presentation slides, handouts and speaker notes. The header repeats at the top of every page or slide; the footer at the bottom.


Type text you want to appear on the left side of the header or footer. You can choose the font type, size and characteristics (bold, italics, and underlining) from the Attributes section. You can also choose a macro to insert into the display window, from the Macros section.


Type text you want to appear in the center of the header or footer. You can choose the font type, size and characteristics (bold, italics, and underlining) from the Attributes section. You can also choose a macro to insert into the display window, from the Macros section.


Type text you want to appear on the right side of the header or footer. You can choose the font type, size and characteristics (bold, italics, and underlining) from the Attributes section. You can also choose a macro to insert into the display window, from the Macros section.


Changes the font style for the selected text or the default font. Scoll down the list to view all fonts installed on your computer.


Changes a point size for the selected text or for the default font. The arrow located on the right of the Point size box is used to see the list of point sizes and make a selection. You can type the point size directly.


Applies or removes bolding, italics and underlining to the selected text or the default font.


Inserts the number of the slide in the header or footer.


Inserts the total number of slides in the presentation, e.g.. Slide 1 of 10.


Inserts the date and time, which is automatically updated every time you open the presentation file. Choose the date and time format from the dialog box that appears when you click the Date and Time button.


Inserts the user name that is specified in the Tools, Options menu. A name must be entered in the User Info dialog box for the information to appear in the header.

To change the user name, click on the User Info tab in the Options menu and change the name in the User Name box.


Inserts the user organization that is specified in the Tools, Options menu. A name must be entered in the User Info dialog box for the information to appear in the header.

To change the user organization, click on the User Info tab in the Options menu and change the name in the User Organization box.


Date and Time dialog box

Provides date and time formats you can insert into the headers and footers of your slides, handouts and speakers notes. If none of the built-in formats suits your needs, you can create your own custom formats.


Lists the preset date and time formats. Click on the format to select it.


Click the language you want the date and time to display in.


Enable this option to have Corel PRESENTS update the date and time each time you open the presentation.


Click to create your own time and date formats.


Click to add the custom format currently displayed in the Format String box to the Available Formats list.


Click to delete a custom format selected in the Available Formats list box. The built-in formats cannot be deleted.


Run Presentation command/button

Runs the current presentation including transition effects, time on screen, and sound and animation files.  The show runs according to the presentation options chose in the Tools, Options command. You can click the ESC key to exit the running presentation and return to the PRESENTS window.

 Related Topics


Exit command (File menu)

Ends the current Corel PRESENTS session. If you have any open presentations with unsaved changes, PRESENTS prompts you to save those presentations before closing.

The next time you run PRESENTS, the program will use the same settings in effect during the last session. These settings are as follows:

default template

Page Setup settings

Grid Frequency and Origin settings

Guidelines and Grid Snap To settings

all settings in the View menu

all settings in the Options dialog box

disk drive and directory for Open, Save, Export, Import, and Print to File dialog boxes


Recent File command (File menu)

Lists the last four presentation files you closed. Type the number next to a file, or click the filename to open that presentation.


New Presentation dialog box

Starts a new presentation from the Wizard, template, or a blank presentation. You can also open an existing presentation, or the last presentation you opened. You can disable the dialog box from appearing from the General tab of the Tools, Options command.


Opens the Corel PRESENTS Presentation Wizard dialog box, which guides you through the creation of a new presentation that is customized to your requirements.  You respond to a series of simple questions, and the Wizard reflects the formatting you choose.


Opens the Template dialog box, which allows you to start a new presentation from a template of your choice. The template provides one slide, with a preset background and layout. You can add slides to the presentation, following the template style, by clicking Insert, Slide.


Starts a new, blank presentation. The new presentation uses the default page, ruler, and guideline settings. Click File, Page Setup to change the page settings.


Opens an existing presentation in a new window.


Opens the last presentation that you saved. The presentation filename is listed beside the Open button.


Enable the check box to disable the New Presentation dialog box from appearing when you start PRESENTS.


New Presentation dialog box (small)
New Presentation dialog box

Opens a presentation from the Wizard, a template, or a blank presentation.

New presentations use the same ruler and guideline settings plus the Presentation Options in effect for the current session. Use the Options command in the Tools menu to change presentation options.


Help Topics command (Help menu)

Opens the Help Contents, which lists available Help topics. If you are viewing a Help topic and you want to return to Help Contents, click the Contents button.

Double-click on a book to view a list of associated topics.

Double-click on a topic to open the relevant information.


 Tutorial command (Help menu)

Opens the PRESENTS online tutorial, which includes a series of lessons for you to follow and become familiar with the PRESENTS application.


What's This command/button

Changes the mouse pointer into a question mark. You can click on any command or area in the screen to receive help on the relevant topic. You can also access help on commands by highlighting a command and pressing F1.


Technical Support command (Help menu)

Opens the Technical Support help file, which provides details on product support for Corel applications; including available support services, Import and Export filters information, error messages, and troubleshooting tips.


About Corel PRESENTS command (Help menu)

Opens the About Corel Presents dialog box, which displays the version, copyright, and license information for Corel PRESENTS.


About Corel PRESENTS dialog box

Displays the version, copyright, and license information for Corel PRESENTS.


Click to escape from the dialog box and return to the presentation.


Click to open the System Info dialog box, which provides you with information about your operating system, display, network, printers, Corel executable files, and . DLL files.


 System Info dialog box

Displays information about your operating system, display, network, printers, Corel executable files. and DLL files.


Choose a category from the drop-down list box. The categories are: System, Display, Network, Printing, Corel EXEs and DLL and System DLLs.


Displays the system information for the chosen category.

System: information about your computer. For example, Windows version, DOS version, processor, etc.

Display: information about your monitor. For example, driver, driver version, etc.

Network: information about the network. For example, drivers, whether a network is installed, etc.

Printing: information about installed printers.

Corel EXEs and DLLs: lists all of the Corel EXEs and DLL.

System DLLs: lists all of the system DLLs.


Click to save all of the chosen category's details to a predefined file.


Proofreading command
Proofreading commands

Displays a flyout from which you can choose the Spelling, Quick Proofreading, Full Proofreading, and Advanced Options commands.

The International Proofreader's three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading and Full Proofreading [image] serve users with varying needs. For example, an office worker who considers speed paramount might want to check only for spelling and mechanical errors. Meanwhile, a journalist writing an article for publication might want to check for stylistic problems. The same journalist, however, having carefully polished and checked the article's style, might want to check the spelling quickly once again before submitting the article. Lastly, an academic or another journalist might be so confident as to consider it unnecessary to check for items such as confused words, clichés, or wordy expressions.

The International Proofreader's functionality is as uniform as linguistically possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by widely accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

The checking and correction functionality of the Proofreader is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proof mode

Full Proof mode

 Related Topics


Thesaurus command (Tools menu)

Suggests synonyms for words in your document. Use one of the text tools to highlight the word you want a synonym for, and then choose the Thesaurus command.

Tip

You can use the Thesaurus to look up any word, not just the current selection or document.

 Related Topics


Type Assist command (Tools menu)

Opens the Type Assist dialog box, which has automatic controls for text capitalization [image] the first letter of sentences, two initial consecutive capitals and names of days [image] and changing straight quotes to typographic quotes.

Type Assist also enables you to replace text strings automatically if you want to, replacing "teh" with "the" for example, and includes a number of presets.

If you enable the Replace Text While Typing option, correction takes place after you finish typing the word, either by entering a punctuation mark or a space.

 Related Topics


slideSlide Sorter


Multimedia Manager (Tools menu)

Opens the Corel MULTIMEDIA MANAGER, which allows you to organize, manage and manipulate your multimedia files. You can create albums and sub-albums to group your files any way you want. Graphics files are displayed as thumbnail images, so that you can easily identify the contents. You can assign keywords to individual items and to whole albums to help you search for a particular file in your collection.


Customize command (Tools menu)

Opens the Customize dialog box, which allows you to rearrange toolbar icons; add, rearrange, and rename menus; and create, reassign, load, reset, and save keyboard shortcuts.


Options command (Tools menu)

Opens the Options dialog box, which allows you to set the display options for the Corel PRESENTS user interface and to set general presentation options to control the behavior of a screen show.

The Options dialog box is divided into six sections: General, Presentation, Graphics, Text, Animation, and User Information. You can access a section by clicking the appropriate tab.


Options dialog box

Opens the General, Presentation, Graphics, Text, and User info tabs, which allow you to set options to undo, set default units, show startup dialog, display large thumbnails, set screen show options, determine number of default  pixels when drawing, set tab and bullet spacing, and enter user information.


General page

Sets the controls to show the startup dialog when starting PRESENTS, choose the number of levels that can be undone using the Edit, Undo command, identify the standard units of measurement, and choose large thumbnails.


Type the number of default undo levels that can be used from the Edit, Undo command. More memory is required the greater the number of undo levels.


Choose the default units of measurement that you will use in your presentation.  You can choose inches, millimeters, pica , points, centimeters, pixels, cicero, or didots as the default measurement.


Enable the check box to have the Start up screen options dialog box open each time you start Corel PRESENTS. From the dialog box, you can choose to start the Presentation Wizard, a template, a blank presentation, open an existing file, or open the last presentation used.


Enable the check box to display large thumbnail images in Slide Sorter view. If you have a large presentation, this can slow down the refresh speed.


Enable the check box to define that OLE objects that you insert into the presentation maintain their aspect ratio, while fitting into the marquee frame you draw. For example, if you draw a marquee frame that is wider than it is long, and your object is longer than it is wide, the object will fit the vertical dimensions of the marquee frame, in order to maintain its aspect ratio.

If you disable the check box, the object will fit to the marquee frame you draw.


Presentation page

Sets the controls for Corel PRESENTS screen show features. You can choose to automatically advance slides, run the show continuously, or display a pointer on-screen during the screen show.


Enable the button to automatically advance from one slide to the next during the screen show.


Enable the check box to continually repeat the screen show until you press the ESC key.


Enable the check box to display the mouse pointer on-screen.


# idh_optionsdb_pres_Generatepresentation


# idh_optionsdb_pres_videopalette


Click to choose the line thickness you want for the pen.


Click to change the pen color. You can choose between sixteen different colors.


Graphics page

Sets the default number of pixels for Freehand drawing mode tracking, corner threshold, straight line threshold, and auto join.


Type the number of pixels to control how closely Corel PRESENTS tracks the motion of the mouse when drawing in Freehand drawing mode. The lower the number, the rougher the curves tend to appear.


Type the number of pixels to control a smooth corner or a cusp when drawing in Freehand drawing mode. The lower the number, the greater the tendency toward cusps.


Type the number of pixels to control a straight or curve segment when drawing in Freehand drawing mode. The lower the number, the greater the tendency toward drawing curves.


Type the number of pixels to control the auto join radius when drawing in Freehand drawing mode or Bezier drawing mode. The lower the number, the closer the cursor must be to the end nodes of an existing segment in order for the next segment to automatically join with it.


# idh_optionsdb_grph_treatobj


Text page

Sets the default tab width and inter bullet spacing options.


Choose the unit of measurement and type the width to set the default tab stops.


Choose the unit of measurement and type the amount of space to leave before and after the bullet. Also known as paragraph spacing.


User Info page

Records your name, title, and organization which you can then add to your presentation as part of the header and footer. After entering the User Information, use the File, Page Setup command to add the information to the slides, handouts and speaker notes .


Type your name.


Type your position title.


Type the name of the company for which you work.


Records your name, title, and organization which you can then add to your presentation as part of the header and footer. After entering the User Information, use the File , Page Setup command to add the information to the slides, handouts and speaker notes.


Animation page

Use this page to set time properties for animation, transitions and Snap to times, as well as define paths which display position and size or position only.


Type the amount of frames per second you want the animation to use. More frames per second result in smoother animation.


Type the amount of time you want the transition to last.


Type the amount of time you want the animation to advance when you click the Advance Time command in the Animation menu.


Click to create an animation path where you have direct control over changes in an objects size as it travels between two non-adjacent nodes. This option is more manual than using the Position only option. For example, if you want an object to change gradually in size between two non-adjacent nodes, you must change the objects size yourself at each node. With this option, each node displays as a two-color rectangle to indicate that both position and size are automatically registered.


Click this option to create an animation path where Presents automatically calculates the amount that an object changes size as it travels between two non-adjacent nodes. This is a more automatic procedure than using the Position /size option. If you want an object to change gradually in size between two non-adjacent nodes, you only have to decide which nodes are to be the beginning and end nodes, then, change the objects size as required. Presents will calculate a smooth, gradual transition in size between the two nodes. With this option, only the nods where you change the size of the object display as two color rectangles.


Toolbars page

Allows you complete control over the commands on your toolbars, with the exception of the toolbox and its flyouts. With simple mouse actions, you can dock, undock, re-size, and move your toolbars anywhere on the screen.

You can also add and remove buttons to the built-in toolbars, or create your own toolbars containing only the commands you use most often.


Menu page
Menus page

Allows you to add commands to existing menus, or add new menus to the menu bar. You can change the order of the menus and their commands to give you quick, easy access to the functions you use most.


Keyboard
Keyboard page

Allows you to change built-in keyboard assignments, or assign an accelerator key combination to any command. You can create several sets of keyboard assignments to use for different types of operations, saving and loading sets as they are needed.


Color Palette page
bmr ht_00.bmp}Color palette page

Allows you to change colors in your objects. You can move the palette anywhere on the screen and edit the color order to make it easy to find your favorite colors.


Slide command/button

Displays Slide View, which includes a slide and any objects used to create the slide contents such as graphics, text, animation and sound. From Slide view you use all the other views to help build your presentation.

 Related Topics


Slide Sorter command/button

Switches to Slide sorter view, which displays all slides in the presentation as thumbnails. From Slide Sorter view, you can:

rearrange the order of slides in the presentation

add or delete slides

apply layouts or backgrounds to groups of slides

assign transition effects

show or hide the slide or jacket

 Related Topics


Outline command/button

Switches to Outline view, which displays the text typed in the placeholders of all presentation slides. You can:

arrange the text of a slide in hierarchical order

rearrange the order of slides or bullets

choose the type of text, font, style, or layout

select basic effects such as bold, italic and underline

display text in draft or preview mode

 Related Topics


Master Layout command/button

Opens a flyout menu, which allows you to choose the type of master layout to view: title slide master, slide master, speaker notes, or handout. You can view the master layout you selected; change the font style, color and size; change the bullet style and color; and position and size the frames.

 Related Topics


Title Slide Master command (View menu)

Chooses the Title Slide master layout to view. You can view the master layout you selected; change the font style, color and size; and position and size the frames.

 Related Topics


Slide Master command (View menu)

Chooses the Slide master layout to view. You can view the master layout you selected; change the font style, color and size; change the bullet style and color; and position and size the frames.

 Related Topics


Handout Master command (View menu)

Chooses the Handout master layout to view. You can view the handout layout, and modify the layout style.

 Related Topics


Speaker Note Master command (View menu)

Chooses the Speaker Note master layout to view. You can view the speaker notes layout, and modify the layout style.

 Related Topics


Background command/button

Switches to Background view, which displays the background elements common to all slides with the same background number in the current document, omitting all other objects. Use this command when you want to create a new background or make changes to an existing background.

 Related Topics


Speaker Notes command (View menu)

Switches to Speaker Notes view, which provides a thumbnail representation of the current slide. The extra space on the page is for writing speaker notes. The page selection tabs located at the bottom of the presentation window can be used to navigate through your speaker notes.

Note

The speaker notes pages are saved with the presentation file and can be printed for use as an aid for the speaker.

The speaker notes layout can be changed from the Layout Library.

 Related Topics


Handout command (View menu)

Switches to Handout view, which allows you to create handouts of the presentation for the audience. It provides you with a thumbnail of each slide to which you can add accompanying text.

Note

The handout pages are saved with the presentation file.

The handout layout can be changed from the Layout Library.

 Related Topics


Animation command (View menu)

Switches to Animation view, which allows you to animate objects by defining a path along which objects can travel. Animation view includes VCR buttons that allow you to set and manage the display of animated objects and control the play and playback of animations when editing them.

 Related Topics


Object Manager command (View menu)

Opens the Object Manager dialog box, which displays a tree structure of presentation slides and objects; each slide or object has a corresponding check box which allows you to show or hide the image in the presentation. The information displayed in the Object Manager changes depending on the current view. For example, in Slide view, all the objects in the current slide are displayed; in Slide sorter view, all the slides in the presentation are displayed, with an option to view the objects on the slide; in Background view, all objects on the background are displayed.

 Related Topics


Object Manager dialog box

Displays a tree structure of presentation slides and objects; each slide or object has a corresponding check box which allows you to show or hide the image in the presentation. The information displayed in the Object Manager changes depending on the current view. For example, in Slide view, all the objects in the current slide are displayed; in Slide sorter view, all the slides in the presentation are displayed, with an option to view the objects on the slide; in Background view, all objects on the background are displayed.


Enable the check box beside the slide or object to show the in the presentation; disabling the checkbox hides the slide or object from view. The information displayed in the Object Manager changes depending on the current view. The dialog box remains on screen until you close it.


Timelines
Timelines (View menu)

Opens the Timelines dialog box, which provides a graphical view of display and transition times for slides and objects in your presentation. Controls allow you to modify these times interactively.

 Related Topics


Timeline dialog box
!ALink(timeline_proc;;;;;;;;,0,"default_procedure",)Timeline dialog box

Provides a graphical view of display times for the slides and objects in your presentation.  You can modify timelines for objects and slides.


About the Timelines dialog box

Click on the Timelines graphic to access Help on a particular area.


The slide button indicates that you are at the highest (slide) level of view. When the button turns into a folder, you can click the button to change the view to the slide level, hiding all objects.


Click to increase the time measurement units on the Time Scale button.


Click to decrease the time measurement units on the Time Scale button.


Displays the current time that you determine by dragging the time handle.


Displays the current units of time. Select different units of time measurement from the list box.


Disable the check box to hide the slide or object from the current presentation. Effective when you require multiple versions of a presentation.


Lists the slides and frames. (Frames appear when you click the icon to the left of the slide). The icon next to the frame indicates what type of object it is. For example:

	animation sequence		Paragraph Text
	CorelDRAW graphic		chart object
	Corel PHOTO-PAINT image		map
	sound		Motion 3D object
	graphic object		video clip
	Artistic Text


Displays the name of the slide or object and the time currently allocated to it.


Drag the vertical line at the end of the timeline to adjust the slide or object’s duration. A red block at the beginning of the timeline identifies an opening transition,; green at the end of the timeline identifies a closing transition.


Provides a visual reference for judging the duration of slides and frames. For exact times check the Information bar at the bottom of the Timelines window; it tells you precisely when and how long a selected slide or object appears.


Click on the Horizontal Scroll Bar to scroll right to see more of the Timelines that are covered by the right edge of the window.

If there are too many object entries in the Timelines window than can be displayed, you can click on the Vertical Scroll Bar to travel further up or down the list to see more entries.


Shows the current slide, the start time, and the end time for the selected slide or object.


Background Library command (View menu)

Opens the Libraries dialog box, which allows you to choose a background from a preset background collection or from other presentations.

The Libraries dialog box is divided into two sections: Backgrounds and Layouts. You can access either section by clicking the appropriate tab.

 Related Topics


Layout Library command (View menu)

Opens the Libraries dialog box, which allows you to choose an existing layout from a preset layout collection.

The Libraries dialog box is divided into two sections: Backgrounds and Layouts. You can access either section by clicking the appropriate tab.

 Related Topics


Libraries dialog box

Opens libraries of backgrounds and layouts that can be applied to the active slide, selected slides or to your entire presentation.


Background page

Displays various backgrounds available from the libraries or current document. Backgrounds can contain text, graphic objects, linked and embedded objects and multimedia elements.


Displays presentation backgrounds available from the library or current document. Each one is represented by a thumbnail, which you can double-click to select.


Displays the Open dialog box, which allows you to choose a background from a presentation library.


Select a background to view from either the current document or one of the Background libraries.


Layout page
{ [image] Layout page

Displays various layouts available from the preset library or current document. Layouts set the location and formatting options for frames on slides.  The frames can contain text, graphic objects, animations, or linked and embedded objects.


Enable either the current document or present library radio button to select from where you’ll access the required layout.


Displays presentation layouts available from the library or current document. Each one is represented by a thumbnail, which you can double-click to select.


Select a layout to view from either the current document or one of the layout libraries.


CorelMEMO command (View menu)

Opens a flyout menu, from which you can choose to display or hide the memo pages; change the memo pages to pictures or icons; and show or hide the pages when printing.

 Related Topics


Display contents of all command (View, CorelMEMO menu)

Shows the information contained in all CorelMEMO pages in the presentation. You must flip to each slide that contains a memo to view its contents.

 Related Topics


Display as pictures command (View, CorelMEMO menu)

Replaces the CorelMEMO pages with a [image] icon. This reduces the amount of space the memo takes on your slide.

 Related Topics


Display as icons command (View, CorelMEMO menu)

Replaces the CorelMEMO pages with the CorelMEMO application icon. This reduces the amount of space the memo takes on your slide.

 Related Topics


Hide all CorelMEMOs command (View, CorelMEMO menu)

Removes the CorelMEMO pages from view. If you do not hide the memo pages before your presentation, the pages appear on the slide. You can choose Show all CorelMEMOs command to display the memo pages.

 Related Topics


Show all CorelMEMOs command (View, CorelMEMO menu)

Displays the CorelMEMO pages. If you do not hide the memo pages before your presentation, the pages appear on the slides. You can choose Hide all CorelMEMOs command to remove the memo pages from view.

 Related Topics


Make all printable command (View,CorelMEMO menu)

Displays the CorelMEMO pages when you print your slides, handouts, or speaker notes. If you do not hide the memo pages before you print, the memos appear on the printouts. You can choose the Make All Unprintable command to remove the memo pages from view.

 Related Topics


Make all unprintable command (View, CorelMEMO menu)

Hides the CorelMEMO pages when you print your slides, handouts, or speaker notes. If you do not hide the memo pages before you print, the memos appear on the printouts. You can choose the Make All Printable command to display the pages when printing.

 Related Topics


Toolbars command (View menu)

Opens the Toolbars dialog box, which allows you to select the toolbars to display in the PRESENTS application, select the tool icon display size, customize existing toolbars, and create your own toolbars.


Toolbars dialog box

Allows you to select the toolbars to display in the PRESENTS application, select the tool icon display size, customize existing toolbars, and create your own toolbars.


Displays the available toolbars. Enable the checkbox next to a toolbar to activate it. Click the toolbar’s name tag to rename it.


Creates a new toolbar. Click Customize to add buttons to the new toolbar.


Resets a built-in toolbar.


Opens the Customize dialog box, where you can change the configuration of your toolbar buttons.


Displays large-sized toolbar buttons.


Displays medium-sized toolbar buttons.


Displays small-sized toolbar buttons.


Status Bar command (View menu)

Toggles the status bar between visible and hidden. Right-click on the status bar to choose the information you want to appear on the status bar, and the display settings you prefer.


Rulers command (View menu)

Toggles the rulers bar between visible and hidden.

 Related Topics


Color Palette command (View menu)

Toggles the Color Palette between visible and hidden.


Cascade command (Window menu)

Arranges open presentation windows so that they overlap. Each window's title bar remains displayed allowing you to select any one you want.


Tile Horizontally command (Window menu)

Sets up two or more open presentation windows in equally-sized frames arranged horizontally.


Tile Vertically command (Window menu)

Sets up two or more open presentation windows in equally-sized frames arranged vertically.


Arrange Icons command (Window menu)

Lines up the icons of minimized presentation windows along the bottom of the Corel PRESENTS screen.


Refresh Window command (Window menu)

Redraws objects on the screen, clearing the screen of "dirt" left over from earlier manipulations.


Window 1, 2, 3... command (Window menu)

Opens and activates a presentation window. The windows are listed in the order in which they were opened.


To embed an object

1.	Click Insert, New Object.

2.	Choose the type of object to insert from the Object Type list box.

The list includes items from applications on your system that support object linking and embedding. You need to install these applications using their Setup programs in order for them to appear on the list.

3.	Click OK. The chosen application opens within the PRESENTS presentation window.

4.	Create or select the object you want to embed in your presentation.

5.	From the source application's File menu, choose Update, Exit, or Exit and Return.

6.	In some applications, a dialog box appears prompting you to update. Choose Yes or OK.

Note

You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking the object in PRESENTS. This launches the server application and allows you to edit the information. When you exit and return to PRESENTS, the changes will be reflected in your presentation.

 Related Topics


To embed an existing file

1.	Click Insert, New Object.

2.	Enable the Create from File button.

3.	Type the path and filename of the file you want to embed. If you don't know the filename or location, click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To embed an object starting from another application

1.	Open the server application.

2.	Cut or copy the object to the Clipboard.

3.	Open the Corel PRESENTS file where you want the object pasted.

4.	Click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	From the As box, choose the type of information you want to add to your presentation.

6.	Click OK.

Note

You can edit an embedded object by double-clicking the object in Corel PRESENTS. This launches the server application and allows you to edit the information. When you exit and return to PRESENTS, the changes are reflected in your presentation.

Object Linking is another way of including objects and files from other applications. With linking, you can share the same information with other files.

 Related Topics


To edit an embedded object

1.	Double-click on the object you want to edit.

2.	Make the changes you want.

3.	From the source application's File menu, choose Update, Exit, or Exit and Return.

4.	In some applications, a dialog box appears prompting you to update. Choose Yes or OK.

 Related Topics


To add a linked object

1.	Click Insert, New Object.

2.	Click Create from File.

3.	Enable the Link check box.

4.	Type the path, extension, and filename of the file to link. If you don't know the filename or location, click the Browse button to display the Browse dialog box.

5.	Click OK.

Note

Any changes you make to the information in the source file are reflected in your presentation.

 Related Topics


To link an object from another application

1.	Open the server application.

2.	Cut or copy the object to the Clipboard.

3.	Open the Corel PRESENTS file where you want the object pasted.

4.	Click Edit, Paste Special.

5.	From the As box, choose the type of information you want to add to your presentation.

6.	Click the Paste Link button.

7.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To edit linked information in the source file

1.	Open the source file.

2.	Make the changes you want to the linked information.

3.	Choose Save from the File menu.

Note

Any changes you make to the information in the source file are reflected in your presentation, according to the update option you chose.

 Related Topics


To change a link

1.	Choose the linked information in your file.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Change Link.

4.	Type a new name for the source file in the Source box.

 Related Topics


To specify automatic or manual link updating

1.	Choose the linked information in the destination file you want to update.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Choose manual or automatic.

 Related Topics


To break a link

1.	Choose the linked information.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Break Link.

 Related Topics


To manually update a link

1.	Choose the linked information in the destination file you want to update.

If you have more than one link in the file that you want to update, hold down the SHIFT key as you choose the linked information.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

Choose any other links in the Links box you want to update.

3.	Click Update Now.

Note

Corel PRESENTS reflects any changes made in the source file, since the last update, in the destination file for each, chosen link.

 Related Topics


To update all links

1.	Choose the entire Corel PRESENTS destination file by choosing Select All from the Edit menu.

2.	Click Edit, Links.

3.	Click Update Now.

 Related Topics


To display/hide the grid

1.	Click Format, Grid Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Enable the Show Grid check box.

If you disable the Show Grid check box, the grid is hidden from view.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set the Grid parameters

1.	Click Format, Grid Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	In the Horizontal and Vertical Frequency boxes, specify the number of grid lines you want per unit of measure.

4.	Click the Show Grid check box to display the grid in the drawing window. Click the Snap to Grid check box to have objects snap to the grid.

5.	Click OK.

Note

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit apart, enter a fractional value. Entering 0.5, for example, spaces them two inches apart if the unit of measure is set to inches. (The Horizontal and Vertical field units are accurate up to 2 decimal places.)

If the Drawing Scale is set to 1:1 inches, you can choose another unit of measurement from the Units box. When you change units, you must specify the Grid Frequency to use with that unit. Changing the Grid Frequency unit also changes the corresponding ruler unit. If the Drawing Scale is set to something other than 1:1 inches, the Grid Frequency units are grayed out and set to the units that the Drawing Scale is using.

 Related Topics


To visually align objects to the grid

Select the object and drag it to line up with the desired grid point.

 Related Topics


To snap objects to the grid

1.	Click Format, Snap to Grid.

The grid must be visible for objects to snap to the grid.

Snap to Grid is enabled when a checkmark appears beside the command.

2.	Select the object and drag it to line up with the desired grid point.

As you move, the mouse pointer is forced to stay on the grid.

Note

You can adjust the spacing between the grid points using the Grid Setup dialog box.

 Related Topics


To set ruler parameters

1.	Click Format, Grid Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	In the Horizontal and Vertical Unit boxes, specify the unit of measurement you want displayed on the ruler.

4.	Set the 0,0 point in the Horizontal and Vertical Original number boxes.

The 0,0 points determine the cursor and object position information you see in the Status Line. The coordinate values you specify in some dialog boxes are also based on the position of the 0,0 points.

5.	Click OK.

Tip

You can drag the cross hairs [image] onto the drawing window to set the Horizontal and Vertical origins.

 Related Topics


To change the units of measurement on the rulers

1.	Click Format, Grid Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	In the Horizontal Units box, choose the unit of measurement you want the horizontal ruler to use.

4.	In the Vertical Units box, choose the unit of measurement you want the vertical ruler to use.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set up guidelines

1.	Click Format, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Choose either Horizontal or Vertical guidelines in the View section.

3.	Specify where you want the guideline placed relative to the 0,0 points on the rulers.

4.	Enable the Show Guidelines check box.

5.	Click Add.

6.	Click OK.

Note

You can use the Undo/Redo commands in the Edit menu for guideline movements and setups.

 Related Topics


To move guidelines

Click and drag the guideline to the required location.

Note

To remove a guideline, you can drag it off the window.

 Related Topics


To drag guidelines from the rulers

1.	Move the pointer over the top ruler for a horizontal guideline, or the side ruler for a vertical guideline.

2.	Click and drag the guideline into the presentation window.

3.	Drop the guideline where you want it.

 Related Topics


To reposition a guideline

Click the guideline and drag it to its new position.

 Related Topics


To position guidelines with numeric precision

1.	Click Format, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Choose either horizontal or vertical guidelines.

3.	Specify the location of the guideline relative to the 0,0 points on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To measure and check alignment

1.	Click View, Rulers to display the rulers.

Rulers are enabled when a checkmark appears beside the command.

2.	Move the pointer to the area where the rulers meet.

3.	Click and drag the [image] crosshairs onto the presentation window.

 Related Topics


To snap objects to a guideline
To snap objects to guidelines

1.	Click Format, Snap to Guidelines.

Snap to Guidelines is enabled when a checkmark appears beside the command.

Guidelines must be visible on the screen for Snap to Guidelines to function.

2.	Select the object.

3.	Drag the object until one of the sides of its highlighting box aligns with the guideline.

When one of the sides of the object’s highlighting box approaches the guideline, the object snaps to it.

4.	Drop the object.

 Related Topics


To visually align objects to a guideline
To visually align objects to guidelines

Select the object and drag it to line up with the guideline.

 Related Topics


To remove a guideline

Click the guideline and drag it off the presentation window.

 Related Topics


To delete guidelines

1.	Click the guideline, to delete only one guideline.

2.	Click Format, Guideline Setup.

3.	Click Delete to remove the selected guideline.

4.	Click Clear to remove all guidelines.

5.	Click OK.

Note

To remove a guideline, you can also drag it outside of the presentation window.

You can use the Undo/Redo commands in the Edit menu for guideline movements and setups.

 Related Topics


To move an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Drag the object to the location you want.

As you drag, the object is replaced by a dotted rectangle.

3.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To scale an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the corner handles until it becomes a cross.

3.	Drag the handle until the object is scaled to the size you want.

4.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To stretch an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the middle handles until it becomes a cross.

3.	Drag the handle until the object is stretched to the size you want.

4.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To scale/stretch an object in multiple directions

1.	Select the object.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles until it becomes a cross.

3.	Hold down the SHIFT key.

4.	Drag the handle until the object is stretched or scaled to the size you want.

5.	Release the mouse button.

Tip

Release the mouse button before you release the SHIFT key.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale in 100%-increments

1.	Select the object.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles until it becomes a cross.

3.	Hold down the CTRL key.

4.	Drag the handle until the object is stretched or scaled to the size you want.

5.	Release the mouse button.

Tip

Release the mouse button before you release the CTRL key.

 Related Topics


To stretch/scale in 100%-increments from the object's center

1.	Select the object.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the handles until it becomes a cross.

3.	Hold down the CTRL and SHIFT keys.

4.	Drag the handle until the object is stretched or scaled to the size you want.

5.	Release the mouse button.

Tip

Release the mouse button before you release the CTRL and SHIFT keys.

 Related Topics


To leave a copy of the object behind

1.	Select the object.

2.	Hold down the CTRL key.

3.	Drag the object to the location where you want to place the copy.

4.	Release the mouse button and the CTRL key.

 Related Topics


To fit an object to the slide

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Fit Object To Slide.

Note

This procedure matches the object's aspect ratio to that of the slide.

 Related Topics


To rotate an object

1.	Double-click the object. The object's handles change to double-headed arrows.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the corner arrows until it becomes a cross.

3.	Drag in a circular motion around the object.

4.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To constrain an object's angle of rotation
To constrain an object’s angle of rotation

1.	Double-click the object. The object's handles change to double-headed arrows.

2.	Move the mouse pointer over one of the corner arrows until it becomes a cross.

3.	Hold down the CTRL key.

4.	Drag in a circular motion around the object.

5.	Release the mouse button.

Tip

Release the mouse button before you release the CTRL key.

 Related Topics


To move an object's center of rotation

1.	Double-click the object. The object's handles change to double-headed arrows.

2.	Drag the center of rotation to the desired spot.

3.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To slant an object

1.	Double-click the object. The object's handles change to double-headed arrows.

2.	Drag the handles in the direction you want to slant:

Drag handles on vertical sides in a vertical direction.

Drag handles on horizontal sides in a horizontal direction.

3.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To constrain the object's movement when slanting

1.	Double-click the object. The object's handles change to double-headed arrows.

2.	Hold down the CTRL key.

3.	Drag the handles in the direction you want to slant:

Drag handles on vertical sides in a vertical direction.

Drag handles on horizontal sides in a horizontal direction.

4.	Release the mouse button.

Tip

Release the mouse button before you release the CTRL key.

 Related Topics


To move an object in front of all others

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, To Front.

 Related Topics


To move an object behind all others

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, To Back.

 Related Topics


To move an object forward one

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Forward One.

 Related Topics


To move an object backward one

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Backward One.

 Related Topics


To copy an object to the Clipboard

1.	Select an object.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

 Related Topics


To cut an object to the Clipboard

1.	Select an object.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

 Related Topics


To paste an object from the Clipboard

1.	Select a slide.

2.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To duplicate an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Edit, Duplicate.

Note

The copied object is offset slightly from the original. The default amount is 0.10 inches.

 Related Topics


To group objects

1.	Select one of the objects you want to group.

2.	Hold down the SHIFT key and select each of the other objects you want to group.

3.	Click Arrange, Group.

The objects are now a group. Selecting any object in the group results in the selection of all other objects in the group.

Tip

You can edit individual objects in a group by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the object.

 Related Topics


To ungroup objects

1.	Select any object in the group.

2.	Click Arrange, Ungroup.

The objects can now be selected individually.

Tip

If you have grouped two or more groups together, click Arrange, Ungroup to ungroup each level at time.

 Related Topics


To select objects from a group
To select an object in a group

Hold down the CTRL key and click on the object.

If you have nested groups (groups within groups), continue clicking until the object you want is selected.

 Related Topics


To create a nested group

1.	Select one of the groups that you want to nest.

2.	Hold down the SHIFT key and select all other groups you want to include in the nest.

3.	Click Arrange, Group.

The objects are now in a nested group. Selecting any object in the nest results in the selection of all other objects in the nest.

 Related Topics


To select an object in a nested group

Hold down CTRL and click on an object in the group you want to select.

 Related Topics


To combine objects

1.	Select the objects that you want to combine.

If you select rectangles, ellipses, or text objects, Corel PRESENTS automatically converts them to curve objects before combining.

2.	Click Arrange, Combine.

The objects are now one, single curve object.

 Related Topics


To separate combined objects

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Break Apart.

 Related Topics


To assign transition effects to an object

1.	Select the object to which you want to apply a transition effect.

2.	Right mouse-click the Transitions command.

3.	Choose the transition, direction, and duration options from the Opening Transition section, to set how the transition will enter onto the screen.

4.	Choose the transition, direction, and duration options from the Closing Transition section, to set how the transition will leave the screen.

5.	Click OK.

Note

To apply transition effects to multiple objects, click Apply Now. The dialog box remains on screen.

To preview a transition, enable the Preview check box.

 Related topics


To assign transition effects to Paragraph text

1.	Select the text to which you want to apply a transition effect.

2.	Right mouse-click on the text and choose the Text Effects command.

3.	Choose to apply the transition to either Line or Paragraph, from the Grouping list box.

4.	Choose the transition, direction, and duration options from the Opening Transition section, to set how the transition will enter onto the screen.

5.	Choose the transition, direction, and duration options from the Closing Transition section, to set how the transition will leave the screen.

6.	Click OK.

Note

To apply transition effects to multiple text frames, click Apply Now. The dialog box remains on screen.

To preview a transition, enable the Preview check box.

To separate the text transitions from a bullet, enable the Separate from Bullet check box, and click the Options button to open the Bullet Settings dialog box.

 Related topics


To assign transition effects to Artistic text

1.	Select the text to which you want to apply a transition effect.

2.	Right mouse-click on the text and choose the Transitions command.

3.	Click the Transitions tab.

4.	Choose the transition, direction, duration, and steps options from the Opening Transition section, to set how the transition will enter onto the screen.

5.	Choose the transition, direction, duration, and steps options from the Closing Transition section, to set how the transition will leave the screen.

6.	Click OK.

Note

To apply transition effects to multiple text frames, click Apply Now. The dialog box remains on screen.

To preview a transition, enable the Preview check box.

 Related topics


To assign transition effects to a bullet

1.	Select the bullet to which you want to apply a transition effect.

2.	Right mouse-click and choose Text Effects.

3.	Enable the Separate Bullet From Text check box.

4.	Click the Options button.

5.	Choose when the bullet will appear, in relation to the text, from the Timing section.

6.	Choose the bullet’s point of entry and exit from the Direction section.

7.	Click OK.

 Related topics


To assign transition effects to a slide

1.	Click on any blank area on the slide.

2.	Right mouse-click and choose the Transitions command.

3.	Click the Transitions tab.

4.	Choose the transition, direction, duration, and steps options from the Opening Transition section, to set how the transition will enter onto the screen.

5.	Choose the transition, direction, duration, and steps options from the Closing Transition section, to set how the transition will leave the screen.

6.	Click OK.

Note

To preview a transition, click the Preview button.

 Related topics


To set a path for a transition

1.	Select the text or object to which you want to apply the transition effect.

2.	Right mouse-click and choose the Path command.

3.	Click the Path Tab.

4.	Choose the path that the transition will follow from the list box.

5.	Click OK.

Note

To apply paths to multiple objects, click Apply Now. The dialog box remains on screen.

To preview a transition, click the Preview button.

 Related topics


To set the timelines for a slide

1.	Click View, Timelines.

2.	Move the pointer over the right boundary of the slide’s timeline. (The timeline is represented by a  white rectangle.) The pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

3.	Drag the boundary to the right to increase its time on screen, or left to decrease it. The time on screen, in seconds, appears between the slide number and its timeline.

4.	Release the mouse button when the End time that you want to set is displayed.

 Related Topics


To adjust the start and end times of an object

1.	Click View, Timelines.

2.	Double-click the slide number that includes the object. All objects on the slide are listed in the Timelines dialog box.

3.	Move the pointer over one of the object’s timeline boundaries. (The timeline is represented by a  white rectangle.) The pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

4.	Drag the boundary in either direction to increase or decrease its time on screen as represented by the white rectangle.

Each objects time on screen, in seconds, appears between the slide number and its timeline.

Note

Object start and finish times must not exceed slide start and finish times.

 Related Topics


To move an object's whole timeline

1.	Click View, Timelines.

2.	Double-click the slide number that includes the object. All objects on the slide are listed in the timelines dialog box.

3.	Move the cursor near the middle of the timeline. (The timeline is represented by a white rectangle.) The pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.

4.	Click and drag the timeline to a new position.

The total time on screen is unchanged.

5.	Release the mouse when you are satisfied with its new position.

 Related Topics


To change a transition's timeline

1.	Click View, Timelines.

2.	Double-click the slide number that includes the object.

The transitions for objects and text are identified by shaded areas on the object’s timeline.

3.	Click on the transition handle beside the shaded area and drag the transition to the required position on the timeline.

Note

The total time of the opening and closing transitions cannot be longer than the life of the object.

 Related Topics


To change the time measurement in timelines

1.	Click View, Timelines.

2.	Choose the required units of time from the Time Units list box.

Standard time units include minutes:seconds, seconds:frames, seconds:hundreths of seconds, and frames.

 Related Topics


To hide a slide or object in the screen show

Disable the Toggle Slide/Frame check box beside the slide or object that you want to hide.

 Related Topics


To display a hidden a slide or object in the screen show
To display a hidden slide or object in the screen show

Enable the Toggle Slide/Frame check box beside the hidden slide or object that you want to display.

 Related Topics


To delete an object from the Timelines window

1.	Click on the object's icon or name.

2.	Press Delete.

 Related Topics


To choose presentation options

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Presentation tab.

3.	Enable the Automatic advance check box to run the presentation automatically.

Disabling the button allows you to manually control slide advancement.

4.	Enable the Run continuously check box to play the presentation in a continuous loop.

Disabling the button plays the show once until the end.

5.	Enable the Display pointer on screen check box to display the mouse pointer on the screen during the presentation.

 Related Topics


To automatically advance slides during a presentation
To automatically advance slides

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Presentation tab.

3.	Enable the Automatic advance check box.

Note

Disabling the button allows you to manually control slide advancement.

 Related Topics


To run a presentation continuouly
To run a presentation continuously

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Presentation tab.

3.	Enable the Run continuously check box.

Note

Disabling the button plays the show once until the end.

 Related Topics


To display the mouse pointer during a presentation

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Presentation tab.

3.	Enable the Display pointer on screen check box.

 Related Topics


# how_generate_show$ To generate a presentation in advanceK generating presentation in advance;presentation, generating in advance;screen show, generating in advanceA how_generate_show;make_show_proc> proc4


To play a presentation

1.	Open the presentation.

2.	Click File, Run Presentation.

 Related Topics


To stop a presentation in progress

Press the ESC key.

 Related Topics


To create a portable presentation

1.	Finalize the presentation.

2.	Click File, Save As.

3.	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file in the Save in box.

4.	Type a filename in the File Name list box.

5.	Choose the Corel Runtime Player file type (.CRP) from the Files of type list box.

6.	Click Save.

Note

A portable screen show can be played but not edited. Make sure that you save the presentation as a .CPR presentation file, as well as the .CRP Runtime Player file, if you want to edit it in future.

Use the Runtime Player to play the portable presentation.

 Related Topics


To play a portable presentation

1.	Save the file as a .CRP file type in PRESENTS.

2.	Install the Runtime Player on the machine that you want to play the presentation on.

3.	Play the presentation on the Runtime Player.

Refer to the Runtime Player’s online help for instructions.

 Related Topics


To set the on screen annotation pen

1.	Click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Presentation tab.

3.	Choose the line thickness you want for the pen.

4.	Click the Color button to choose a pen color.

 Related Topics


To use the on screen annotation pen

1.	Click File, Run Presentation to begin the screen show, or start the screen show from the Runtime player.

2.	When you reach a point in the presentation that you want to emphasize, hold down the left mouse button and highlight the important points on screen.

3.	Click the right mouse button, hit the right arrow key, or press F2 to continue the presentation.

Tip

You can clear the annotations from your slide by pressing the DELETE key. This refreshes the screen, while leaving it in Annotation mode.

 Related Topics


To select an object

1.	Click [image].

2.	Click anywhere on the object you want to select.

 Related Topics


To marquee select objects

1.	Click [image].

2.	Hold down the mouse button and drag the marquee box until it completely encloses the objects.

3.	Release the mouse button.

Note

Selecting more than one object lets you apply the same commands, transformations, or attributes to them. When you select multiple objects, a single highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

When you hold down ALT while you drag, any object that intersects with the marquee box is selected. If you do not release the mouse button before releasing ALT, only those objects enclosed by the marquee box will be selected.

 Related Topics


To select the next object

1.	Click [image].

2.	Press the TAB key to select the next object.

 Related Topics


To select multiple objects

1.	Click [image].

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click on the objects.

Note

Selecting more than one object lets you apply the same commands, transformations, or attributes to them. When you select multiple objects, a single highlighting box enclosing them all appears.

 Related Topics


To select all objects

Click Edit, Select All.

Tip

You can also double-click on Pick tool to select all objects.

 Related Topics


To select multiple groups

Hold down SHIFT and click an object in each group.

Note

You can also drag a marquee box around all objects in the groups to select. When you select a group, a highlighting box enclosing all of the objects in the group appears.

 Related Topics


To deselect all objects

Click any open space on the slide or press ESC.

 Related Topics


To deselect only one of several objects selected

Hold down the SHIFT key and click anywhere on the object.

 Related Topics


To select the previous object

1.	Click [image].

2.	Press the SHIFT and TAB keys to select the previous object.

 Related Topics


To delete an object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


To set the page orientation

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Size/Margin tab.

3.	Enable the radio button in the Current View section, for the page type to which you want the settings applied.

4.	Enable either the Portrait or Landscape radio button in the Page Size section.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set page margins

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Size/Margin tab.

3.	Enable the radio button in the Current View section, for the page type to which you want the settings applied.

4.	Set the margins for Top, Bottom, Left, and Right in the Page Margins section.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set the page size

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Size/Margin tab.

3.	Enable the radio button in the Current View section, for the page type to which you want the settings applied.

4.	Choose a paper type from the Paper Type list box in the Paper Size section.

5.	If you choose a custom paper type, set the Horizontal and Vertical dimensions.

6.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set a custom page size

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Size/Margin tab.

3.	Enable the radio button in the Current View section, for the page type to which you want the settings applied.

4.	Choose Custom from the Paper Type list box in the Paper Size section.

5.	Set the Horizontal dimensions.

6.	Set the Vertical dimensions.

7.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To create a header or footer for slides

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Header/Footer tab.

3.	Enable the Slides button in the View section.

4.	Choose a header from the list box in the Header section.

5.	Choose a footer from the list box in the Footer section.

6.	Click OK.

Note

The header and footer appear on all slides.

You can customize the header and footer by clicking on the Custom Header or Custom Footer button.

 Related Topics


To create a header or footer for Speaker Notes

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Header/Footer tab.

3.	Enable the Speaker Note radio button in the View section.

4.	Choose a header from the list box in the Header section.

A preview of the header appears in the display window.

5.	Choose a footer from the list box in the Footer section.

A preview of the footer appears in the display window.

6.	Click OK.

Note

The header and footer appear on all Speaker Note pages.

You can customize the header and footer by clicking on the Custom Header or Custom Footer button.

 Related Topics


To create a header or footer for Handouts

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Header/Footer tab.

3.	Enable the Handout radio button in the View section.

4.	Choose a header from the list box in the Header section.

A preview of the header appears in the display window.

5.	Choose a footer from the list box in the Footer section.

A preview of the footer appears in the display window.

6.	Click OK.

Note

The header and footer appear on all Handout pages.

You can customize the header and footer by clicking on the Custom Header or Custom Footer button.

 Related Topics


To create a custom header or footer

1.	Click File, Page Setup.

2.	Click the Header/Footer tab.

3.	Enable either the Slide, Handouts, or Speaker Note button in the View section.

4.	Click the Custom Header button in the Header section.

5.	Make any of the following changes:

Click in the Left, Center, or Right box to choose the justification.

Choose the font type from the list box in the Attributes section.

Choose the font size from the number box in the Attributes section.

Enable the bold, italic, or underline buttons in the Attributes section.

Click the Slides button in the Macros section to enter the slideglos_slide@glossary.hlp name. You must have named the slide for this option to function.

Click the SlideNum button in the Macros section to enter the slide number.

Click the Date and Time button in the Macros section to open the Date and Time dialog box. From the dialog box, you can choose the format and language in which you want the date and time to appear.

6.	Click the Custom Footer button in the Footer section Make any changes listed in step 5 to the footer.

7.	Click OK.

Note

The header and footer appear on all slides/Speaker Note/Handout pages.

Previews of the header and footer appear in the display windows.

 Related Topics


To enter user information

1.	Click Tools, Options, User Info.

2.	Type your name in the Name box.

3.	Type your position title in the Title box.

4.	Type the name of your organization in the Organization box.

5.	Click OK.

Tip

You can choose to have this information appear in the header or footer of your presentation, by using the macro buttons in the File, Page Setup, Header/Footer, Custom dialog box.

 Related Topics


To choose custom workplace options

1.	Click Tools, Options, General.

2.	Type the number of undo levels to allow in the Edit, Undo command, in the Undo Levels number box.

3.	Disable the Show Startup Dialog check box to remove the New Presentation dialog box from appearing each time that you open PRESENTS.

4.	Enable the Show Margins check box to suppress the display of slide margins.

5.	Enable the Large Thumbnails check box to display large size slide thumbnails in the Slide Sorter.

6.	Enable the Insert OLE Objects Using Best Fit check box to define that OLE objects that you insert into the presentation maintain their aspect ratio , while fitting into the marquee frame you draw.

If you disable the check box, the object will fit to the marquee frame you draw.

7.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To add a slide

1.	Click Insert, Slide.

2.	Type the number of slides you want to add in the Number of Slides box.

3.	Click either the Before Current or After Current radio button and click Next.

4.	Select the layout you want to apply to the slide and click Next.

5.	Select the background you want to apply to the slide and click Next.

6.	Click Finish.

Note

After Current is the default setting.

 Related Topics


To delete a slide

1.	Select the desired slide to delete.

2.	Click Insert, Delete Slide.

 Related Topics


To rearrange the order of slides

1.	Click View, Slide Sorter.

2.	Drag and drop the slide to its new position.

Note

A vertical line displays when you drag a slide. If you drag a slide to the left, the vertical line displays on the left of the slide that will be displaced when you release the mouse button. If you drag a slide to the right, the vertical line displays on the right of the slide that will be displaced when you release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To create Speaker Notes

1.	Click View, Speaker Notes.

2.	Double-click on the text frame.

3.	Type text relevant to the current slide, that will act as cue information for the presenter.

 Related Topics


# how_enter_quickspeaker$ To type speaker notes using the Quick Speaker Notes dialog boxK speaker notes, creating;creating, speaker notes;notes, creating speaker notes;presentation aids, speaker notes;quick speaker notes, ;A how_enter_quickspeaker;creat_notes_proc> proc4


To customize the Speaker Notes layout

1.	Click View, Master Layout, Speaker Notes, to modify the text frame, or move the slide thumbnails.

2.	Make any required layout changes, including:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the frames

insert a text box

Note

The layout changes are reflected when you switch to Speaker Notes view.

 Related Topics


To print Speaker Notes

1.	Click View, Speaker Notes.

2.	Click File, Print.

3.	Click Notes in the Print list box.

4.	Select the print range and number of copies to print.

5.	Click OK.

Note

The page orientation automatically changes to portrait to accommodate the slide and notes.

 Related Topics


To create Handouts

1.	Click View, Handout.

The page appears with slide thumbnails.

2.	Double-click on the text section beside the first slide.

3.	Type text relevant to the slide.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each thumbnail on the page.

 Related Topics


To print Handouts

1.	Click View, Handout.

2.	Click File, Print.

3.	Click Handouts in the Print list box.

4.	Select the print range and number of copies to print.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To customize the Handouts layout

1.	Click View, Master Layout, Handout, to modify the text frame, or move the slide thumbnails.

2.	Make any required layout changes, including:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the frames

Note

The layout changes are reflected when you switch to Handout view.

 Related Topics


To change to Slide view

Click View, Slide.

 Related Topics


To change to Slide Sorter view

Click View, Slide Sorter.

 Related Topics


To change to Outline view

Click View, Outline.

 Related Topics


To change to Speaker Notes view

Click View, Speaker Notes.

 Related Topics


To change to Handout view

Click View, Handout.

 Related Topics


To change to Animation view

Click View, Animation.

 Related Topics


To change to Background view

Click View, Background.

 Related Topics


To change to Master Layout view

Click View, Master Layout.

 Related Topics


To view the Layout Library

1.	Click View, Layout Library.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Preset Library radio button.

4.	View the layout thumbnails shown in the display window.

Note

You can also choose a thumbnail from the library to apply as your layout.

 Related Topics


To view the Background Library

1.	Click View, Background Library.

2.	Click the Background tab.

3.	Choose a background library from the list box.

4.	View the background thumbnails shown in the display window.

Note

You can also choose a thumbnail from the library to apply as your background.

 Related Topics


To work with the Object Manager

1.	Click View, Object Manager.

The information displayed in the Object Manager changes depending on the current view. For example, in Slide view, all the objects in the current slide are displayed; in Slide Sorter view, all the slides in the presentation are displayed, with an option to view the objects on the slide; in Background view, all objects on the background are displayed.

2.	Enable the checkbox beside the slide or object, if you want to display it in the presentation.

Disable the checkbox beside the slide or object, if you want to hide it from the presentation.

Note

If you delete frames in the Master Layout view, you can retrieve them in the Object Manager.

 Related Topics


To view a CorelMEMO

Click View, CorelMEMO.

 Related Topics


To select a slide in Slide view

At the bottom of the presentation window, click the numbered tab that corresponds to the slide you want to choose.

 Related Topics


To select a slide in Slide Sorter view

Click the slide in the presentation window.

Tip

Double-click the slide to change to Slide View.

 Related Topics


To select a slide in Outline view

Double-click the [image] icon next to the desired slide number.

 Related Topics


To select a slide in Speaker Notes view

At the bottom of the presentation window, click the numbered tab that corresponds to the slide you want to choose.

 Related Topics


To select a slide in Animation view

At the bottom of the presentation window, click the numbered tab that corresponds to the slide you want to choose.

 Related Topics


To view multiple slides

Click View, Slide Sorter.

 Related Topics


To return to a single slide view

Click View, Slide.

 Related Topics


To view a slide at the size it will print

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To zoom in on a slide

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

3.	Repeat steps 1 and 2 to zoom in further.

Tip

Each time you click the mouse the slide view magnifies by a factor of two.

 Related Topics


To zoom in on a specific area

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

3.	Position the cursor at the top left corner of the area you want to zoom.

4.	Drag down and to the right until the desired area is enclosed in the marquee box.

5.	Release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


To zoom out

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

Tip

Each time you click the mouse the slide view zooms out by a factor of two.

 Related Topics


To zoom to all objects on a slide

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

Note

Objects outside of the slide border are also displayed.

 Related Topics


To zoom the entire slide

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To zoom to a selected object

1.	Click the Zoom tool.

2.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To play an animation from its start point

1.	Select the slide with the animation you want to play from its start point.

2.	In Animation view, click Animation, First Frame.

3.	Click Animation, Play.

 Related Topics


To modify the time of an animation with numeric precision

1.	In Animation view, select the slide you want to modify.

2.	Click the up and down arrow buttons in the Time text box to modify the current time of the slide.

 Related Topics


To turn sound on or off

1.	In Animation view, click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	Check Sound to allow sound, uncheck to suppress sound.

 Related Topics


To play an animation in reverse

1.	In animation view, select the animated slide you want to play in reverse.

2.	Move the Animation trackbar until the object is at the point in its path where you want to start playing it backwards.

3.	Click Animation, Play Reverse.

 Related Topics


To stop an animation

Click Animation, Stop.

 Related Topics


To move an animation one frame back

1.	In animation view, select the animated slide you want to move.

2.	Verify that the animated slide is not at the first frame.

3.	Click Animation, Previous Frame.

 Related Topics


To move an animation one frame forward

1.	 Verify that the animated slide is not at the last frame.

2.	In animation view, select the animated slide you want to move.

3.	Click Animation, Next Frame.

 Related Topics


To move an animation to the last frame

1.	In Animation view, select the animated slide you want to move.

2.	Click Animation, Last Frame.

 Related Topics


To fast forward an animation using the Animation Trackbar

1.	Select the slide you want to fast forward.

2.	Move the handle in the Animation Trackbar until the animation is advanced to where you want it.

 Related Topics


To animate an actor by applying a path to an object

1.	In animation view, select the object you want to use as an actor.

2.	Move the Animation trackbar until the Time is where you want it.

3.	Move the object to the next location on screen where you want it to display.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 above until the path is complete.

Note

Each actor should have an individual name to identify it. This is because as you create or import actors into your animation, they are added to the list of objects in the animation. This list is found in the Timelines dialog box.

 Related Topics


To animate an actor by adding cels to it

1.	Select the slide where you want to create the actor.

2.	Click Animation, Create/Edit Actors.

3.	Click the object you want to add to the actor.

4.	Click the Add button.

Note

The objects you add to an actor all display at the size of the largest object added. See Related topics for creating cels used in animating an actor’s change in size.

 Related Topics


To create cels for animating an actors change in size

1.	Draw a rectangle large enough to accommodate the largest object you want to use as a cell of the actor.

2.	Remove the fill form the rectangle.

3.	Grab one of the objects you want to use as an actor cel and drag it to the center of the rectangle.

4.	Remove the outline form the rectangle.

5.	Select both the object and the rectangle.

6.	Click Arrange, Group.

7.	Repeat these procedures for each of the objects you want to use as a cel in the actor.

 Related Topics


To insert cels in an actor

1.	Select the actor you want to edit.

2.	Click Animation Create/Edit Actors.

3.	Drag Objects from the Objects in Slide list to the Cels in Actor list.

 Related Topics


To reorder the cels in an actor

1.	In animation view, select the actor you want to modify.

2.	Click Animation, Create/Edit Actors.

3.	In the Cels in actor dialog box, drag and drop objects to their new place in the list.

 Related Topics


To select items in the Create/Edit Actors dialog box

Do any of the following in either the Objects in slide or Cels in actor list boxes:

To select a single item, click the item.

To select all items between a first and last one, click the first item, then Shift click the last item.

To select a group of items in different parts of the list, press Ctrl and click each of the items you want to include in the selection.

 Related Topics


To remove cels from an actor

1.	Select the actor you want to modify.

2.	Click Animation, Create/Edit Actors.

3.	Select the cel you want to remove form the actor.

4.	Click the Remove button.

 Related Topics


To create a custom path

1.	In Animation view, click the object you want to move through a custom path.

2.	Click Animation, Custom Path.

3.	When the cursor displays as a pencil, move it to the start point of the path you want to create.

4.	Drag the pointer along the path you want use.

 Related Topics


To edit path nodes

1.	In Animation view, select the object that has the path you want to modify.

2.	Click the node editing tool on the toolbox.

3.	Click a node and drag until the node is modified as required.

 Related Topics


To repeat the same cel of an actor

1.	In Animation view, click the actor you want to modify.

2.	Click Animation, Cel Sequence.

3.	Click Constant in the Effects list box.

4.	In the Cel # text box, type the cel number you want to use.

 Related Topics


To modify the cel sequence of an actor

1.	In Animation view, click the actor you want to modify.

2.	Click Animation, Cel Sequence

3.	In the Effects list box, click the effect you want to use.

4.	In the Speed group of options, click the speed you want to use.

 Related Topics


To add, modify or delete a transition effect of an object

1.	Click the object you want to use.

2.	Click Animation, Transitions.

3.	In the Opening Transition area, click the opening transition in the Transition list box you want to use.

4.	Click the direction button to define the direction you want the opening transition to follow.

5.	In the Duration text box, type the time you want to use for the Opening transition.

6.	In the Steps text box type the number of steps you want to use for the Opening transition.

7.	In the Closing transition area, click the closing transition in the Transition list box you want to use.

8.	Repeat steps 5, 6, 7 for the Closing transition.

9.	Check Preview screen when you want to see a preview of the transition you defined..

Note

You can also access the transitions options by clicking the selected object with the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To add, modify or delete preset paths of objects

1.	Click the object you want to modify.

2.	Click Animation, Path.

3.	Check Preview to see an example of the options you want to use.

4.	In the Path list box, click the preset path you want to use.

 Related Topics


To add, modify or delete paths of objects

1.	In Animation view, click the object you want to modify.

2.	Click the node edit tool in the Toolbox.

3.	Drag nodes as required.

 Related Topics


To modify physical attributes of frames
To modify physical attributes of objects

1.	Click the object you want to modify.

2.	Click the object with the right mouse button.

3.	Click Object Attributes.

4.	Check the options you want to use.

 Related Topics


To modify animation speed

1.	In Animation view, click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	In the Animation speed text box, type the frames per second you want to use.

Note

Frames per second refers to the number of times a slide is displayed every second. A higher number produces a smoother animation.

 Related Topics


To modify the time that a transition will last for new slide objects
To modify the default time that a transition will last for new slide objects

1.	In Animation view, click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	In the Transition duration text box, type the default time you want to apply to transitions in new slides.

 Related Topics


To modify the Snap to time increment

1.	In Animation view, click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	In the Snap to time increment text box, type the increment you want to use.

 Related Topics


To show an object gradually changing size through all nodes in an animation
To show an object changing size gradually between two non-adjacent nodes

1.	In Animation view, click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	Click Position.

4.	Create the Path for the object.

5.	Move the object to the node where you want to change its size.

6.	Resize the object as required.

Note

With this option, PRESENTS automatically calculates the amount the object changes size as it travels between the two non-adjacent nodes. This is a more automatic procedure than using the Position /size option. If you want an object to change gradually in size between two non-adjacent nodes, you only have to decide which nodes are to be the beginning and end nodes, then, change the objects size as required. PRESENTS will calculate a smooth, gradual transition in size between the two nodes. With this option, only the nods where you change the size of the object display as two color rectangles.

The first node in the path is always a beginning node. This is because at this node, the object already has size.

 Related Topics


To show a gradual change in an object's size only between specific nodes in the path
To modify the amount that an object changes between two non-adjacent nodes manually

1.	In Animation view, click Tools, Options.

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	Click Position/size.

4.	Create the path for the object.

5.	Move the object to the node where you want to change its size.

6.	Change the size of the object.

Note

With this option you have direct control over changes in an objects size as it travels between two non-adjacent nodes. This option is more manual than using the Position only option. For example, if you want an object to change gradually in size between two non-adjacent nodes, you must change the objects size yourself at each node. Also, with this option, each node displays as a two-color rectangle to indicate that both position and size are automatically registered.

The first node in the path is always a beginning node. This is because at this node, the object already has size.

 Related Topics


To insert a background from the Library

1.	Click View, Slide.

2.	Click View, Background Library.

3.	Click the Background tab.

4.	Choose a background library from the list box.

5.	Click the background you want from the thumbnails shown in the display window.

6.	Click Apply Now.

7.	Click OK.

Note

Any objects that were placed on the original background are deleted.

The background you create becomes the default background for new slides that you insert.

Tip

When you insert a background, it is placed as a thumbnail in the current document set in the Background Library.

 Related Topics


To edit background fills

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background: Blank, Uniform Fill, Fountain fill, Two-Color Bitmap, Full-Color Bitmap, Texture fill, or Vector Pattern.

3.	Make the required changes.

4.	Click OK.

Note

Editing the fill changes the background on all slides that follow the one that you edit.

 Related Topics


To add objects to the background

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Add the objects or text you want to include in the background.

You can add objects using:

rectangle or geometric shape tools on the toolbar

import, cut or copy and paste from another application

object embedding or linking

Insert, New Object command

Insert, Chart command

Insert, Map command

Insert, Video command

Insert, Sound command

3.	Change the background fill, if required.

Note

To edit the background of a slide without deleting the background objects, switch to slide view and then make the required background changes.

 Related Topics


To insert a uniform fill background

1.	Click View, Slide.

2.	Click Insert, Background, Uniform Fill.

Click Yes in the Edit Background dialog, to add objects to the new background.

3.	Enable the Color Models, Palettes, or Mixers radio button.

If you choose Color Models, choose a type from the Models list box.

4.	Modify the Level, Color Options or Palette Options, if required.

5.	Click OK.

Note

The background you create becomes the default background for new slides that you insert.

 Related Topics


To change a background to uniform fill

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background, Uniform Fill.

3.	Enable either the Color Models, Palettes, or Mixers radio button.

If you choose Color Models, choose a type from the Models list box.

4.	Modify the Level, Color Options or Palette Options, if required.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To insert a fountain fill background

1.	Click Insert, Background, Fountain Fill.

Click Yes in the Edit Background dialog, to add objects to the new background.

2.	Choose the Type, Center offset, Options and Color blends you require.

3.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To change a background to fountain fill

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background, Fountain Fill.

3.	Choose the Type, Center offset, Options and Color blends you require.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To insert a two-color bitmap pattern background

1.	Click Insert, Background, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

Click Yes in the Edit Background dialog, to add objects to the new background.

2.	Click the Create button to design your own pattern.

3.	Click the Preview button to choose a preset pattern.

4.	Click Import to open the Import dialog box, and select a pattern.

5.	Enable the Small, Medium, or Large radio button to choose the size the pattern appears.

6.	Click the Tiling option to set options to tile the pattern across the background.

7.	Click OK.

Note

The image fits to the slide size.

 Related Topics


To change a background to a two-color bitmap pattern

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the Create button to design your own pattern.

4.	Click the Preview button to choose a preset pattern.

5.	Click Import to open the Import dialog box, and select a pattern.

6.	Enable the Small, Medium, or Large radio button to choose the size the pattern appears.

7.	Click the Tiling option to set options to tile the pattern across the background.

8.	Click OK.

Note

The image fits to the slide size.

 Related Topics


To insert a full-color bitmap pattern background

1.	Click Insert, Background, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

Click Yes in the Edit Background dialog, to add objects to the new background.

2.	Click the Preview button to choose a preset pattern.

3.	Click Import to open the Import dialog box, and select a pattern.

4.	Enable the Small, Medium, or Large radio button to choose the size the pattern appears.

5.	Click the Tiling option to set options to tile the pattern across the background.

6.	Click OK.

Note

The image fits to the slide size.

 Related Topics


To change a background to a full-color bitmap pattern

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview button to choose a preset pattern.

4.	Click Import to open the Import dialog box, and select a pattern.

5.	Enable the Small, Medium, or Large radio button to choose the size the pattern appears.

6.	Click the Tiling option to set options to tile the pattern across the background.

7.	Click OK.

Note

The image fits to the slide size.

 Related Topics


To insert a vector pattern background

1.	Click Insert, Background, Vector Pattern.

Click Yes in the Edit Background dialog, to add objects to the new background.

2.	Click Load to bring an existing vector pattern into the slide.

3.	Click the Preview button to choose a preset pattern.

4.	Click Import to open the Import dialog box, and select any graphic to use as a vector pattern.

5.	Enable the Small, Medium, or Large radio button to choose the size the pattern appears.

6.	Click the Tiling option to set options to tile the pattern across the background.

7.	Click OK.

Note

The image fits to the slide size.

 Related Topics


To change a background to a vector pattern

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Load to bring an existing vector pattern into the slide.

4.	Click the Preview button to choose a preset pattern.

5.	Click Import to open the Import dialog box, and select any graphic to use as a vector pattern.

6.	Enable the Small, Medium, or Large radio button to choose the size the pattern appears.

7.	Click the Tiling option to set options to tile the pattern across the background.

8.	Click OK.

Note

The image fits to the slide size.

 Related Topics


To insert a texture fill as a background
To insert a texture fill background

1.	Click Insert, Background, Texture fill.

Click Yes in the Edit Background dialog, to add objects to the new background.

2.	Choose a fill from the Texture Library and Texture List.

3.	Modify the texture, if required.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To change a background to a texture fill

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click Edit, Background, Texture Fill.

3.	Choose a different fill from the Texture Library and Texture List, if required.

4.	Modify the texture, if required.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To add text to an existing background

1.	Click View, Background.

2.	Click the Text flyout icon.

3.	Choose either Paragraph or Artistic Text.

4.	Type the text.

 Related Topics


To save a customized background

1.	Create the background you want to save.

2.	Click File, Save As.

3.	Choose the Corel60/Presents/Backgrounds folder from the Save In list box.

4.	Choose .CPB from the Save As Type box.

5.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

6.	Click Save.

Note

When you save the file to the Backgrounds folder, the filename appears with the list of PRESENTS backgrounds whenever you open the Libraries dialog box.

 Related Topics


To save a customized background Library

1.	Click Insert, Background, or create a new background.

2.	Insert or create one background for each slide, up to the number of backgrounds you want save in the Library.

3.	Click File, Save As.

4.	Choose the Corel60/Presents/Backgrounds folder from the Save In list box.

5.	Choose .CPB from the Save As Type box.

6.	Type a filename in the File Name box.

7.	Click Save.

Note

When you save the file to the Backgrounds folder, the filename appears with the list of PRESENTS backgrounds whenever you open the Libraries dialog box.

 Related Topics


To insert a background from an existing presentation

1.	Click View, Background Library.

2.	Click the Background tab.

3.	Click the Load From button.

4.	Choose the drive, directory, folder and filename of the presentation from which you want to insert the background.

5.	Click OK.

The Import Collection dialog box appears.

6.	Choose the desired background to insert, from the thumbnails displayed.

7.	Click Apply.

Tip

If you saved the background to the Corel60/Presents/Backgrounds library directory, the background is available from the list box.

 Related Topics


To clear the background on a slide

Click Insert, Background, Blank.

 Related Topics


To change the background on a selection of slides

1.	Click View, Slide Sorter.

2.	Choose the slide whose background you want to change.

3.	Click Insert, Background: Blank, Uniform Fill, Fountain Fill, Two Color Bitmap, Full Color Bitmap, Texture Fill, or Vector Pattern.

4.	Choose the options from the dialog box.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To apply a background to all slides

1.	Click View, Slide Sorter.

2.	Click Edit, Select All.

3.	Click Insert, Background: Blank, Uniform Fill, Fountain Fill, Two Color Bitmap, Full Color Bitmap, Texture Fill, or Vector Pattern.

4.	Choose the options from the dialog box.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To insert new slides with a different background

1.	Click Insert, Slide.

2.	Choose the number of slides to insert, choose Before Current or After Current and click Next.

3.	Choose a layout from the layout library and click Next.

4.	Choose a background from the list box or choose Load From to load a library from another presentation.

If the Current Document radio button is enabled, the thumbnails in the display window only show backgrounds used in the current document.

5.	Click Finish.

 Related Topics


To apply a layout from the Library

1.	Click View, Layout Library.

2.	Click the Layout tab.

3.	Enable the Preset radio button.

4.	Click the layout you want from the thumbnails in the display window.

5.	Click Apply Now.

6.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To edit a master layout

1.	Click View, Master Layout, and:

Title Slide Master, to modify the title layout.

Slide Master, to modify the title and body text frames of layouts that have a body and title frame.

Handout, to modify the body text frame in for audience handouts.

Speaker Notes, to modify the body text frame for speaker notes.

2.	Make any required layout changes, including:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the frames

Note

If you delete a frame in the master layout, you can retrieve it by opening the Object Manager in the View menu, and enabling the check box beside the frame.

The layout changes are reflected when you switch to Slide View.

Changing the master layout makes global changes to your layouts; an effective way to ensure consistency within slides.

 Related Topics


To change a slide's layout
To change a slide’s layout

1.	Select the slide you want to change.

2.	Click View, Layout Library.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable the Preset radio button.

5.	Click the layout you want from the thumbnails in the display window.

6.	Click Apply Now.

7.	Click OK.

Note

The body text in the original layout is inserted into the first Body Text frame of the second layout.

 Related Topics


To edit a slide's layout
To edit a slide’s layout

1.	Click View, Slide.

2.	Make any required layout changes, including:

change text attributes.

change bullet styles

move or size the frames

Note

Any change that you make to a layout destroys the link to the master. To make a global change to layouts, make the changes in the appropriate master layout.

If you delete a frame in the master layout, you can retrieve it by opening the Object Manager in the View menu, and enabling the check box beside the frame.

You can relink attributes to the master layout using Edit, Properties, Attributes.

 Related Topics


To view the Title Slide master layout

Click View, Master Layout, Title Slide Master.

 Related Topics


To view the Slide master layout

Click View, Master Layout, Slide Master.

 Related Topics


To view the Handout master layout

Click View, Master Layout, Handout Master.

 Related Topics


To view the Speaker Notes master layout

Click View, Master Layout, Speaker Notes Master.

 Related Topics


To change the layout on a selection of slides

1.	Click View, Slide Sorter.

2.	Choose the slides whose layouts you want to change.

3.	Click View, Layout Library.

4.	Choose the Preset library radio button in the Select a Layout From section.

If the layout you want to apply is already in the current document, select the Current document radio button.

5.	Click Apply Now.

6.	Click OK.

Tip

You can double-click the thumbnail to apply the layout to the slides, instead of clicking Apply Now.

 Related Topics


To apply a layout to all slides

1.	Click View, Slide Sorter.

2.	Click Edit, Select All.

3.	Click View, Layout Library.

4.	Choose the Preset library radio button in the Select a Layout From section.

If the layout you want to apply is already in the current document, select the Current document radio button.

5.	Click Apply Now.

6.	Click OK.

Tip

You can double-click the thumbnail to apply the layout to the slides, instead of clicking Apply Now.

 Related Topics


To link layouts to the master

1.	Select the layout frames on the  slide that you want to link to the master layout.

2.	Click Edit, Properties, Attributes.

3.	Enable the Fill, Outline, Position, Size, or Font, Style & Size check boxes, for the attributes you want to link to the master layout.

4.	Click OK.

Note

Any change that you make to a layout destroys the link to the master. To make a global change to layouts, make the changes in the appropriate master layout.

If you delete a frame in the master layout, you can retrieve it by opening the Object Manager in the View menu, and enabling the check box beside the frame.

 Related Topics


To start a new blank presentation

Click File, New, Document.

 Related Topics


To start a new presentation from a template

1.	Click File, New, From Template.

2.	Click on a tab that represents the type of template you want to use, e.g., the Funky tab includes fun, colorful backgrounds, with corresponding layout formats.

3.	Click the thumbnail of the template that you want to use for your presentation.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To start a new presentation from the Wizard

1.	Click File, New, From Wizard.

2.	Follow the instructions on the page.

3.	Click Next to move to the next page of the Wizard.

4.	Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the end of the Wizard, or click Finish to skip the remaining pages .

Note

Default settings are applied to all skipped pages.

 Related Topics


To open a presentation

1.	Click File, Open.

2.	Choose the drive and folder in the Look in list box.

3.	Choose the Corel PRESENTS file type (.CPR) from the Files of type list box.

4.	Type the name of an existing file in the File Name box.

5.	Click Open.

 Related Topics


To open a recently closed presentation

1.	Click File.

2.	At the bottom of the File menu, click the filename.

 Related Topics


To save a presentation for the first time

1	Click File, Save.

2.	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file in the Save in box.

3.	Type a filename in the File Name list box.

4.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To save changes to an existing presentation

Click File, Save.

 Related Topics


To save an existing file with a new name
To save an existing file with a new name or different location

1.	Click File, Save As.

2.	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file in the Save in box.

3.	Type a filename in the File Name list box.

4.	Click Save.

 Related Topics


To close a presentation

1.	Click File, Close.

If you have not saved your changes, a dialog appears asking if you want to save changes to the presentation.

2.	Click Yes to save your changes.

If it is a new presentation, the Save As dialog appears, for you to choose a path and name to save the file to.

 Related Topics


To add a new sound

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	In the Files of type list box click Windows Waveform (WAV).

3.	In the Look in list box, click the folder you want to use.

4.	In the files list box, click the file you want to use.

5.	Click Import.

 Related Topics


To edit a sound wave

1.	In Animation view, click View, Timelines .

2.	From the list double click the slide containing the sound.

3.	With the right mouse button, click the sound you want to edit.

4	Click Properties.

5.	Use the scroll bars and the Play, Pause, Stop, and Record commands in the File menu.

 Related Topics


To select an entire waveform

Do one of the following:

Drag the mouse from the start of the waveform to the end.

 	Click Edit, Select All.

 	Double-click anywhere on the waveform.

 Related Topics


To cut a section of a sound wave to the Clipboard

1.	Drag the cursor to select the area of the waveform you want to cut.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

Note

The remaining portion of the wave that follows the cut section is then moved backward in time to where the cut began. In this way, no holes are left from cutting a portion of a wave.

 Related Topics


To copy a section of a sound wave to the Clipboard

1.	Drag the cursor to select the area of the waveform you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy

 Related Topics


To paste a section of a sound wave from the Clipboard

1.	Click the waveform where you want to paste the sound wave from the clipboard .

2.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

The portion of the sound wave that was to the right of the insertion line is pushed ahead in time. It now begins after the section you've just Pasted.

 Related Topics


To remove a section of a sound wave

1.	Drag the cursor to select the area of the waveform you want to remove.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

Note

This command works exactly as the Cut command, except that the deleted section is not placed on the clipboard.

 Related Topics


To play a sound in the Wave editor

Click File, Play.

 Related Topics


To pause a sound

Click File, Pause.

 Related Topics


To play part of a sound wave

1.	Drag the cursor to select the part of the waveform you want to play.

2.	Click File, Play.

 Related Topics


To stop playing a sound in the Wave Editor

Click File, Stop.

 Related Topics


To save an edited sound wave

1.	Click File, Exit.

2.	Click Save, in the Save Wave dialog box.

 Related Topics


To exit without saving changes to the sound wave

1.	Click File, Exit.

2.	Click Cancel.

 Related Topics


To reverse the effects of the last command

Click Edit, Undo.

 Related Topics


To zoom in or out of a waveform

Click View, Zoom in, or Zoom out.

 Related Topics


To use mono or stereo sound

1.	Click Effects, Change Characteristics

2.	Click Mono or Stereo as required.

 Related Topics


To get a better quality sound

1.	Select the area of the sound you want to modify.

2.	Click Effects, Amplify.

3.	Type the percentage you want to use.

 Related Topics


To make a part of a sound silent

1.	Drag the cursor to select the part of the waveform you want to make silent.

2.	Click Effects, Silent.

 Related Topics


To fade a sound from soft to loud

1.	Select the part of the waveform you want to fade in from soft to loud.

2.	Click Effects, Fade In.

3.	Type the percentage you want to use.

 Related Topics


To fade a sound out from loud to soft

1.	Select the part of the waveform you want to fade out.

2.	Click Effects, Fade out.

3.	Type the percentage of fade out you want to use.

 Related Topics


To reverse a sound

1.	Select the part of the waveform you want to reverse.

2.	Click Change Characteristics, Reverse.

 Related Topics


To record a new sound

1.	Connect the input device as described by the vendor of the device.

2.	In Animation view, click Insert, Sound.

3.	In the Wave Editor, click File, Record.

 Related Topics


To turn sound on and off

1.	Click Tools, Options

2.	Click the Animation tab.

3.	Check Sound to turn it on, uncheck to turn it off.

 Related Topics


To import a sound for your presentation background
To import a background sound for your presentation background

1.	Select the file you want to import.

2.	In the Import on area click Background.

 Related Topics


To add an echo effect to a sound wave

1.	Select all or part of the waveform.

2.	Click Effects, Echo.

3.	Type the amount of delay you want to use.

Note

The value you type in Delay of, is the amount of time in milliseconds that the selected waveform is delayed before it plays. On the waveform, this is the distance that the selection is moved to the right on the waveform.

 Related Topics


To modify the volume of a wave in the Wave Editor

Drag the handle of the Volume control to the right to increase volume; drag to the left to decrease volume.

Note

The Volume control modifies volume only for current playback. The modifications you make with the Volume control cannot be saved with he sound. Use Amplify if you want to modify the file.

 Related Topics


Function keys

Press	To

F1	Get help on the currently selected command or open dialog box

SHIFT+F1	Get help on screen item or active command

F2	Select the Zoom In option from the Zoom tool menu

SHIFT+F2	Zoom in on selected object(s)

F3	Select the Zoom Out option from the Zoom tool menu

F4	Change the current view to fit all objects in the drawing window

F5	Run presentation

F6	Select the Rectangle Tool

F7	Select the Ellipse Tool

F8	Select the Artistic Text Tool

SHIFT+F8	Select the Paragraph text tool

F9	Select the Star tool

F11	Open the Fountain Fill dialog box

SHIFT+F11	Open Uniform Fill dialog box

F12	Open Outline Pen dialog box

SHIFT+F12	Open Outline Color dialog box

 Related Topics


Menu keys

File menu

Edit menu

Insert menu

Format menu

Arrange menu

Tools menu

Help menu

 Related Topics


File menu

Press	To

CTRL+N	Create a new document

CTRL+O	Open a file

CTRL+S	Save a file

CTRL+P	Print


Edit menu

Press	To

CTRL+Z	Undo the last action(s)

ATL+INSERT	Redo

CTRL+X	Cut

CTRL+C	Copy

CTRL+V	Paste


Insert menu

Press	To

CTRL+G	Insert slides


Format menu

Press	To

CTRL+T	Change text character attributes

CTRL+Y	Snap to Grid


Arrange menu

Press	To

SHIFT+PGUP	Move object to front

SHIFT+PGDN	Move object to back

CTRL+PGUP	Move object forward one

CTRL+PGDN	Move object backward one

F4	Fit object to slide


Tools menu

Press	To

CTRL+J	Open the Options dialog box


Help menu

Press	To

SHIFT+F1	Access What’s This help


Toolbox keys

Pick Tool

Shape Tool

Zoom Tool

Pencil Tool

Rectangle Tool

Ellipse Tool

Text Tool

Outline Tool

Fill Tool

 Related Topics


Pick Tool

Press	To

CTRL+Spacebar	Select the Pick tool

original object

Hold down	To

CTRL	Constrain move vertically or horizontally

CTRL+SHIFT	Stretch in 100% increments in two directions

Scale in 100% increments in four directions


Shape Tool

Press	To

CTRL+F10	Open the Node Edit dialog box

HOME	Select the start node of a curve

SHIFT+HOME	Toggle selection of start node on and off

CTRL+HOME	Select the first subpath in the selected curve

SHIFT+CTRL+HOME	Toggle selection of first subpath on and off

END	Select the end node of a curve

SHIFT+END	Toggle selection of end node on and off

CTRL+END	Select the last subpath in the selected curve

SHIFT+CTRL+END	Toggle selection of last subpath on and off

DELETE	Delete the selected node

+ (plus key)	Add a node to the selected point on the path

- (minus key)	Delete selected nodes

TAB	Shift current node selections forward along the curve

SHIFT+TAB	Shift current node selections backward along the curve

Hold down	To

SHIFT	Select multiple nodes

Change complement of nodes selected when you marquee select nodes

CTRL	Constrain the movement of a node or control point to multiples of 90 degrees

Constrain the movement of characters to nearest baseline

SHIFT+CTRL	Select all nodes on the path or subpath


Zoom Tool

Press	To

F2	Zoom in

F3	Zoom out

SHIFT+F2	Zoom to all objects

CTRL+F3	Zoom to page


Pencil Tool

Press	To

ALT+F5	Select the Freehand tool

Hold down	To

SHIFT	Erase as you backtrack over a path being drawn

CTRL	Constrain the movement of control points to increments of user-specified degrees when drawing in Bezier mode

Constrain Freehand, Bezier and Angular dimension lines to horizontal, vertical or a user-specified angle


Rectangle Tool

Press	To

F6	Select the Rectangle tool

Hold down	To

CTRL	Draw squares

CTRL+SHIFT	Draw squares from the center out

SHIFT	Draw rectangles from the center out


Ellipse Tool

Press	To

F7	Select the Ellipse tool

Hold down	To

CTRL	Draw circles

CTRL+SHIFT	Draw circles from the center out

SHIFT	Draw ellipses from the center out


Text Tool

Press	To

F8	Select the Artistic Text tool

SHIFT+F8	Select the Paragraph Text tool

Arrow keys	Move insertion point in direction of arrow

HOME	Move insertion point to start of current line

CTRL+HOME	Move insertion point to start of text

END	Move insertion point to end of current line

CTRL+END	Move insertion point to end of text

SHIFT+HOME	Select all text left of insertion point to the start of the line

SHIFT+END	Select all text right of insertion point to the end of the line

Backspace	Delete selected text or individual characters before the insertion point

DELETE	Delete selected text or individual characters after the insertion point

ENTER	Begin a new line

CTRL+X	Cut selected text to the Clipboard

CTRL+C	Copy selected text to the Clipboard

CTRL+V	Paste text from the Clipboard

CTRL+Left arrow	Move insertion point to beginning of word to the left of insertion point

CTRL+Right arrow	Move insertion point to beginning of word to the right of insertion point

CTRL+Up arrow	Move insertion point to previous paragraph

CTRL+Down arrow	Move insertion point to next paragraph

CTRL+HOME	Move insertion point to start of text frame

CTRL+END	Move insertion point to end of text frame

SHIFT+ Left arrow	Select character to the left of insertion point

SHIFT+ Right arrow	Select character to the right of insertion point

CTRL+SHIFT+Left arrow	Select the word to the left of insertion point

CTRL+SHIFT+Right arrow	Select the word to the right of insertion point

SHIFT+Up arrow	Select one line up from insertion point

SHIFT+Down arrow	Select one line down from insertion point

CTRL+SHIFT+Up arrow	Select text left of the insertion point to previous paragraph

CTRL+SHIFT+Down arrow	Select text right of the insertion point to the end of frame

CTRL+SHIFT+HOME	Select text left of insertion point to the start of frame

CTRL+SHIFT+END	Select text to the right of insertion point to the end of frame

CTRL+SHIFT+PGUP	Select text left of the insertion point to the start of the text block

CTRL+SHIFT+PGDOWN	Select text right of the insertion point to the end of the text block

CTRL+Backspace	Delete the word left of the insertion point

CTRL+DELETE	Delete the word right of the insertion point


Outline Tool

Press	To

F12	Select the Outline dialog box

SHIFT+F12	Select the Outline Color dialog box


Fill Tool

Press	To

SHIFT+F11	Select the Fill Color dialog box

F11	Select the Fountain Fill dialog box


Dialog box keys

Press	To

TAB	Move to next control

SHIFT+TAB	Move to control

Arrow Keys	Move and selects within active group of option buttons

Spacebar	Turn on or off active check box or chooses active command button

Letter Keys	Move to next item beginning with that letter in an active list box

ALT+Underlined letter	Select item with that underlined letter

ENTER	Choose active command button

ESC	Cancel command and close dialog box

 Related Topics


Views keys

Outliner view

Press	To

TAB	Demote text

SHIFT+TAB	Promote text

CTRL+ENTER on slide title	Create bullet on slide

CTRL+ENTER on bullet	Create a new slide

Double-click on slide	Change to Slide view

Slide Sorter view

Press	To

Double-click on slide	Change to Slide view

 Related Topics


Right mouse button

You can right mouse click on the following items to access a flyout menu with commands that relate specifically to that item:

All views

Collection library

Color palette

Corel PRESENTS title bar

Import dialog

Object

Open dialog

Rulers

Save As dialog

Scroll bars

Slide

Slide tab

Status line

Text

Toolbars

Tip

If you are not using a mouse, press SHIFT+F10 on the keyboard to access the flyout commands. If you are using a Microsoft keyboard, you can also press the Menus key.


Commands

You can access any menu command in PRESENTS by pressing ALT+the underlined letter in the menu+the underlined letter of the command.

Examples

ALT+F+I opens the Import dialog box from the File menu.

ALT+O+B opens the Select Bullet dialog box from the Format menu.


Custom shortcuts

You can create you own shortcuts or change PRESENTS defined shortcuts in the Tools, Customize, Keyboard option. If the shortcut results listed in this section of the help file do not match the shortcut actions you are performing, check the Keyboard option to ensure that another shortcut has not been assigned to the particular action.


When rearranging slides

If you are rearranging slides in Slide Sorter view, you must select the slide you want to move and drag it between two other slides; a vertical line appears when you drag the slide. If you drag the slide to the left, the vertical line displays on the left of the slide that will be displaced when you release the mouse button. If you drag a slide to the right, the vertical line displays on the right of the slide that will be displaced when you release the mouse button.

 Related Topics


When importing text from Word to PRESENTS Outline

Tabs are used in PRESENTS as the distinguishing markers between slides, bullets, and bullet levels. If you create the text for your presentation outline in Microsoft Word and import it into PRESENTS, do not format the text in Word. Perform all the required formatting of levels in the PRESENTS Outline, using the Promote and Demote buttons.

 Related Topics


When working with master layouts

If you make any change to a layout, it disables its links to the master layout. Any changes you make to the master layout will not be applied to the unlinked attributes with the changed layout.

To restore the link to the master layout, switch to Master Layout view. Right mouse click and choose the Frame Attributes command. Enable any of the check boxes that you want to link the option to the master layout.

 Related Topics


When the Layout icon is unavailable

The Layout icon on the standard toolbar is not active until you apply a layout to your slide.


When the Insert Background commands are unavailable

If you are in Background view and choose the Insert Background command, only the From Library option is available. Switch to Slide view to access the other Insert Background options.


When cancelling from the Map Wizard
When canceling from the Map Wizard

If you choose to insert a map from PRESENTS, and then cancel while in the Map Wizard, a map is still inserted onto the slide. To remove the map, click on any blank area of the slide, then select the map and press the DELETE key.


When exiting from the Map server

If you click Exit, while in the Map server, PRESENTS will close down. Make sure that you save your changes, then reopen the PRESENTS application.

 Related Topics


When video and sound are out of synch

If your video image and the associated soundtrack aren’t matching within a video file, try using the Insert, Video command to incorporate the video file, as opposed to the File, Import command.

 Related Topics


When editing time slows down

If you include many OLE objects such as bitmaps or video files, you may find that it takes longer to do basic tasks in your presentation. To speed up the editing time while working on your presentation, click View, Timelines. Disable the check box beside all OLE objects in the presentation; this hides the objects. Don’t forget to enable the check boxes before you run your presentation!

You can also wait until you’ve finished all other aspects of creating your presentation before inserting large OLE objects.

 Related Topics


When transitions lag in preview mode

When previewing closing transitions in the Object Properties dialog box, there is a time delay that is equal to the time you’ve set your transition to run. For example, if you have set your timing so that there are five seconds of slide time before the closing transition appears, you have to wait five seconds for the closing transition to appear in the preview box.

 Related Topics


Restore command (Control menu)

Returns the active window to the size and location it had before you chose the Minimize or Maximize command from the Control menu.

You can also restore a window by clicking its Restore button, [image].


Move (Control menu)
Move command (Control menu)

Allows you to move the active window with the arrow keys.

This command is unavailable if the window is maximized.

You can also use this command to move buttons of minimized presentation windows and dialog boxes that have a Control menu.


Size (Control menu)
Size command (Control menu)

Allows you to resize the active window with the arrow keys.

This command is unavailable if the window is maximized.


Minimize (Control menu)
Minimize command (Control menu)

Shrinks the active window to a button.  If the minimized window is an application, the button is located in the Windows task bar. If you are minimizing a presentation window, its associated button appears at the bottom of the Corel PRESENTS screen, just above the status line.

Using the Minimize command in the Control menu is equivalent to clicking the Minimize button with the mouse.


Maximize (Control menu)
Maximize command (Control menu)

Expands the active window to fill the entire screen.

Using the Maximize command in the Control menu is equivalent to clicking on the Maximize button with the mouse.


Close (Control menu)
Close command (Control menu)

Closes the active window or dialog box. If you have made changes to the current file, a dialog box appears asking you whether you want to save the file.


Next (Control menu)
Next command (Control menu)

Switches between open presentation windows.


Used to access the menus and their respective commands. The menu bar include Minimize, Restore, and Close buttons when you have a maximized presentation window.


The slide area is the rectangle with drop shadow located in the presentation window. You can place objects beyond the borders of the slide area, but only objects on the slide will print or display in a screen show.

Choose File, Page Setup to set the dimensions and orientation of the Slide area.


The area in which presentations are created. Each presentation that you open appears in a separate window. Each window has its own Control menu with commands for moving, sizing, closing, and minimizing windows. Closing or minimizing windows you are not currently working on keeps your screen from becoming too cluttered.

You can open more than one presentation at a time, and move or copy entire slides or selected objects from one presentation to another.


Displays measurements of the presentation windows, which is helpful for sizing and positioning objects in your slide s. Choosing Rulers from the View menu turns the display of the rulers on and off.

Clicking a ruler and dragging brings a guideline onto the screen.

Holding the mouse button down on [image] and dragging toward the center of the screen brings out a set of crosshairs.


Expands the window to fill the entire screen. After you expand a window, the button changes to the Restore button [image]. Use this button to return the window to its former size.


Shrinks the application window to a rectangular button in the Windows task bar or, in the case of a presentation windows, to a button at the bottom of the PRESENTS screen, immediately above the status line.

As a button, the application or presentation stays in memory, but its window does not take up space on your screen.


Returns the active window to the size and location it had before you chose the Minimize or Maximize command from the Control menu.


Closes the active window or dialog box. If you have made changes to the current file, a dialog box appears asking you whether you want to save the file.

Closing Corel PRESENTS is the same as choosing Exit from the File menu.


Displays portions of a drawing outside the current viewing area of the .

Click	to

An arrow	move the current view 10% in selected direction

An elevator	move the view by one full window

A  thumb and drag	move the view an arbitrary amount in any direction


Includes drop-down lists and buttons for editing text objects in your presentation file. It includes buttons and lists for font selection, text styles, alignment, bullets, spell checker, and color. The Text Ribbon Bar works only on text created in Corel PRESENTS using the Text tool as opposed to text brought in from other applications through OLE.


Includes buttons that provide quick access to menu commands such as:

new, open, save, and print

cut, copy, paste, and import

display views and libraries

insert map, chart, or Motion 3D

access online help


Includes tools allowing you to draw, select, stretch, and scale objects, add text, and apply attributes to the objects.


Provides information about a the current tool or command, the current view, time and date.


Shows the name of the program plus the name and location of files in fully-expanded presentation windows. In presentation windows less the full size, the title bar shows the file's name and location or the word "Presentation1", "Presentation2", etc., for new presentations you have not yet saved.

The Title Bar may also contain the Close, Restore, Maximize, Minimize, and Control menu buttons for controlling the window.


Opens commands that allow you to move, resize, minimize, maximize, and close applications.


Appears around windows that are less than full size. Dragging the border lets you customize the size of  the window border.

Drag the top, bottom, or side border to size the window in one direction only.

Drag the corner of the border to size the window vertically and horizontally.


Only objects within this rectangular area will print. You can adjust the size of the printable page in the Page Setup dialog box, opened by choosing File, Page Setup; the printable page corresponds to the paper size you've specified in the Page Setup dialog box, not the printer's "image area," which includes margins that are determined by your printer.


Displays a Color Palette along the bottom of the Corel PRESENTS window for choosing outline and fill colors.

To select a fill color, click it with the left mouse button.

To select an outline color, click it with the right mouse button.

Clicking on the arrows at the ends of the palette with the left mouse button scrolls the colors one at a time.

Clicking the [image] arrow with the left mouse button enlarges the Color Palette.

Clicking the [image] button at the left end of the palette removes the object's fill if you click with the left mouse button, or outline if you click with the right mouse button.


Displays the last four colors selected. Click the arrow key to view all colors; you can choose fill colors to apply.

To select a fill, click on the color with the left mouse button.


Displays which slide you are working on. Click on a tab to switch to that slide in the presentation.


Starts a new presentation, giving you the choice of using a Wizard, applying a template, or using a blank page.

The new presentation uses the same page, ruler and guideline settings plus the Presentation Options in effect for the current session. Use the Page Setup command in the File menu to change the page settings. To change the Presentation Options use the Preferences command in the File menu.


Opens an existing presentation file in a new window. The .CPR file extension is automatically assigned to your PRESENTS files.


Saves the current presentation under the name displayed in the title bar. If the presentation is new and has not been saved, the Save As dialog box opens so that you may give it a name. If you are altering an existing presentation, but want to keep the original version, use the Save As command in the File menu.

When you save a presentation, the following settings are saved with the file: page size and orientation, ruler units and origins, snap to guidelines, and grid status and presentation options


Prints the presentation according to the options you select in the Print dialog box. You select the printer to be used, the range of pages, and the number of copies to print.


Removes the selected object from the current slide and places it on the Clipboard. In Slide sorter view, it is used to cut an entire slide . Once on the Clipboard, you can paste the object onto another slide, another PRESENTS file, or into another Windows application.

To permanently remove the selected object, use the Delete command in the Edit menu.


Places a copy of the selected object(s) onto the Clipboard. In slide sorter view, it is used to copy entire slides. Once on the Clipboard, you can paste the object to another slide, another PRESENTS file, or into another Windows application.


Places a copy of the object stored on the Clipboard onto the current slide. The object(s) remains on the Clipboard until you copy or cut another object or end the current Windows session.


Imports graphics created in other applications and saved using various file extensions, allowing you to use clipart images, text, and graphics created in other software applications.


Runs the presentation in the active window as a screen show. Once it has started, all PRESENTS’ tools, ribbon bars, menus, and other interface items are hidden from view, and the entire screen is used for the screen show. You can stop a screen show by pressing the ESC key.  The behavior of the screen show depends on the presentation options set using the Preferences command in the File menu.


Shows the active slide in full screen preview hiding all Corel PRESENTS interface items temporarily. If the slide includes an animation sequence, the movement is shown in this preview.  Transition effects applied to the slide or objects on the slide are also displayed.


Displays a single slide in the presentation so that you can add new or edit existing foreground elements. You can tell from the Slide Selection tabs at the bottom of the screen which slide you are working on, and the number of slides in the presentation.


Displays all slides in the presentation as thumbnails. Select this view to arrange the order of slides in a presentation or to verify its overall effect and contents before printing it.


Displays outline view in which you can type the text for your presentation ideas and format them. Comprises a page with a left margin. Each slide is identified in the left margin by a number and a slide icon. The outline view includes a special toolbar for change the heading level of text strings on slides and for switching from draft to preview outline mode. Draft shows text without any formatting, whereas preview displays the font, bold, italic, and underline attributes.

Various indentation levels indicate the relative position of text on a slide. The slide title appears first and is not indented. When you press ENTER at he end of a line of text Presents automatically creates a new line at the same heading level and advances the cursor to it. Use the toolbar arrows to indent text to the next higher or lower heading level. If you type text at the first level and press ENTER, you create a new slide title, as well as new slide in the Presentation.

This view allows you to add the text to your presentation very quickly because there are no graphic objects to redraw every time you make a change.


 Displays the selected master layout. When working in this view, any changes to the layout frames are applied to all slides that share the same layout.


Displays only the background objects present on the current slide. Select this view when you want to make changes to the background. When working in this view, any object you add becomes part of the background and will be present in all slides that share the same background.


Opens the Libraries dialog, from which you select ready-made backgrounds or layouts to apply to the current slide or to the entire presentation.


Opens the Insert Slide Wizard, which allows you to define the number of slide you want to add, specify whether you want them added before or after the current slide, and choose a background and layout.


Opens the Insert Map dialog, which allows you to select a map to insert into the slide. You can edit the map and legend to customize it for your requirements.


Opens the Insert Chart dialog box, where you can choose from the available chart types and open the charting module where you can create and edit your charts.


Opens the Insert Motion 3D dialog, which allows you to select a three dimensional, moving image to insert into the slide. You must have the Motion 3D application installed on your system for this option to work.


 Opens the Spell Checker dialog box, which allows you to check the spelling of text on the current slide.


Opens a flyout menu listing Corel applications installed on your system; you can open an application by choosing the appropriate command. To add other programs to the Application Launcher list, add the program name and path to the Applications section of the CORELAPP.INI file.


Changes the pointer to a question mark [image], which you can place anywhere on the screen to view relevant information.


Changes the font for the selected text or the default font.


Changes a point size for the selected text or for the default font. The arrow located on the right of the Point size box is used to see the list of point sizes and make a selection. You can  type the point size directly.


Applies or removes bolding for selected text or the default font.


Applies or removes italics for selected text or the default font.


Applies or removes underlining for selected text or the default font.


Aligns Paragraph and Artistic text to the left side of the Bounding box.


Centers Paragraph and Artistic text in the Bounding box.


Aligns Paragraph and Artistic text to the right side of the Bounding box.


Increases spacing between characters to align Paragraph and Artistic text to the left and right sides of the Bounding box.


Inserts a bullet in front of the selected text and applies the current bullet style to it.  The Bullet Style command in the Format menu is used to set the bullet style.


Checks the spelling of words in the selected text string or paragraph.

You can limit spell checking to portions of text by selecting the word(s) with the Text tool before performing the spell check.

The CD-ROM version of PRESENTS provides different dictionaries, allowing you to check the spelling of words in other languages. You specify which dictionary to use by editing your CORELAPP.INI file.


Used exclusively to set the color of text and objects created using PRESENTS’ drawing and text tools. The More button that appears at the bottom of the palette gives access to the Select Color dialog for choosing a Color mode, editing an existing color, and even creating your own Color Palette.


Plays the animation from the current point in the animation file.


Plays the animation backward, from the current point in the animation file.


Stops playing the animation file.


Moves forward one frame from the current point in the animation file.


Backs up one frame from the current point in the animation file.


Returns to the first frame of the animation file.


Moves forward to the last frame of the animation file.


Displays the time that has played in the animation file.


Graphically displays the time that has played in the animation file. You can drag the track bar back and forth to move frames around in the animation file.


Selects objects or groups of objects. After you select an object, you can use commands in the menus or the toolbox to change the object’s appearance.

You can also use the Pick Tool to interactively move, stretch, scale, rotate, and skew objects.


Shapes lines/curves, text, bitmaps, rectangles/squares, ellipses/circles. The function of the Shape Tool varies depending on the type of object selected.

Object Type	Function

Line/Curve	Changing the shape by moving nodes and control points and using the Node Edit Roll-Up

Text	Editing character attributes and interactive kerning

Rectangle/Square	Rounding corners

Ellipse/Circle	Creating arcs and pie wedges

Animation Path	Customizing the animation path at the node level


Node Edit dialog box
Node Edit roll-up

The Node Edit roll-up is available when editing a curve object with the Shape tool. Draw a curve object with the Freehand or Bezier tool, select the Shape tool, and double-click on a node to open the roll-up.

Click a button on the graphic below to learn more about the node edit functions.


Click to change the roll-up to modal. When you click outside the roll-up after making a selection the roll-up disappears.


Click to make the roll-up appear rolled up on the screen. Click [image] to make the roll-up appear full-size on the screen.


Closes the roll-up.


Adds a node. Click on the spot where you want to add a node, and click the Add button. You can marquee select multiple nodes to insert a node between each of them.


Deletes the selected node(s). Click on the node that you want to delete, and click the Delete button.


Connects end nodes on segments that are part of the same path. Use to close an open path or make two different paths into a single continuous curve. Use the Combine command to make separate curves into one path.


Splits the curve into two or more subpaths at the selected node.


Eliminates extraneous nodes without significantly altering the shape of the curve.


Converts a curve segment to a line segment.


Converts a line segment to a curve segment.


Changes the selected node into a cusp node Use when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


Changes the selected node into a symmetrical node Use when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.


Changes the selected node into a smooth node. Use when you want a different curvature on each side of the node.


Changes the way the selected nodes move when dragged with the mouse. If the check box is disabled, all nodes move by the same amount. When checked, nodes move in proportion to their distance from the base node, i.e., the node you are dragging. The result is that the curve appears to behave like an elastic expanding and contracting in response to the movement of the mouse.


Opens the Zoom flyout toolbar, which includes buttons to zoom in, out, to actual size, selected object, all objects, and to full page.


Magnifies a portion of the screen.


Zooms out by a factor of two each time you click, or returns to the view you were at before the last zoom-in.


Displays the Slide at the size at which it will print.


Zooms in on all selected objects.


Brings all objects on the screen into view.


Shows the entire page.


Draws lines and curves. Holding the mouse button down on the Pencil tool opens a menu that lets you choose the drawing mode [image] Freehand or Bezier [image] you want to use to draw.


Selects the Freehand drawing tool, which is a click and drag style of drawing similar to moving a pencil on paper. Draws lines, curves, and dimension lines. You can also use the Pencil tool to trace bitmaps. Holding the mouse button down on the Pencil tool opens a menu that lets you choose the drawing mode and the type of dimension line you want to draw.


Selects the Bezier drawing tool, which is a connect-the-dots style of drawing where you specify the start and end points of the line/curve you want to draw and how CorelDRAW connects them. Draws lines, curves and dimension lines. You can also use the Pencil tool to trace bitmaps. Holding the mouse button down on the Pencil tool opens a menu that lets you choose the drawing mode and the type of dimension line you want to draw.


Draws rectangles, ellipses and stars. Holding down the mouse button on the Shapes tool opens a menu that lets you choose the the type of shape you want to draw.


Draws rectangles and squares. Objects drawn with the Rectangle tool are assigned the current default Fill, Outline Pen, and Outline Color attributes.


Draws ellipses and circles. Objects drawn with the Ellipse tool are assigned the current default Fill, Outline Pen, and Outline Color attributes.


Draws polygons. Objects drawn with the Polygon tool are assigned the current default Fill, Outline Pen, and Outline Color attributes.

To create a pointed star, click on the Shape tool after drawing the polygon, then drag any of its points.


Enables you to add text directly on the screen as strings of Artistic Text.or blocks fo Paragraph text.


Enables you to add text directly on the screen as strings of Artistic Text.


Enables you to enter text directly on the screen as blocks of Paragraph Text.


Opens the Outline Pen flyout menu, from which you can specify preset or custom attributes including outline thickness, line pattern, and calligraphic pen effects. Choose an icon from the flyout with no object selected to change the default outline pen attributes for new objects you create.


Opens the Outline Color dialog box. Click it with no object selected to change the default outline color for new objects you create.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box, from which you can choose color, width, corners, line caps, arrows and calligraphic options. Click it with no object selected to to change the default pen attributes for new objects you create.


Applies a white outline to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make white the default outline color for new objects you create.


Applies a black outline to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make black the default outline color for new objects you create.


Removes outlines from the selected graphic object(s). Click it with no object selected to have new objects you create drawn without an outline.

You can also remove outlines by right-clicking the [image] at the left end of the Color Palette.


Applies a 0.2 point line width to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make this the default outline width for new objects you create.


Applies a 2 point line width to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make this the default outline width for new objects you create.


Applies an 8 point line width to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make this the default outline width for new objects you create.


Applies a 15 point line width to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make this the default outline width for new objects you create.


Applies a 24 point line width to the selected graphic object. Click it with no object selected to to make this the default outline width for new objects you create.


Opens the Fill flyout menu, from which you can choose preset fills or set custom attributes including solid color, bitmaps, textures, and patterns. Click an icon in the flyout with no object selected to change the default fill attributes for new objects you create.


Opens the Uniform Fill dialog box for specifying uniform fills. Click it with no object selected to make the uniform color the default fill for new objects you create.


Opens the Fountain Fill dialog box, from which you can create linear, radial, conical, or square fountain fills. Click the Fountain Fill icon with no object selected to to make the the fountain fill the default outline width for new objects you create.


Selects white for the fill color. Click it with no object selected to to make white the default fill for new objects you create.


Selects black for the fill color. Click it with no object selected to to make black the default fill for new objects you create.


Selects 50% black for the fill color. Click it with no object selected to to make 50% black the default fill for new objects you create.


Removes the fill from the object, allowing objects behind it to show through. Click it with no object selected to have new objects you create drawn without a fill.

You can also remove fills by clicking with the left mouse button on the [image] button at the left end of the Color Palette.


Opens the Two-Color Pattern dialog box, from which you choose two-color pattern fills. Click the icon with no object selected to make the pattern the new default fill for new objects you create.


Opens the Vector Pattern dialog box, from which you import vector images. Click the icon with no object selected to make the pattern the new default fill for new objects you create.


Opens the Texture fills dialog box, from which you choose Texture Fills. Click the icon with no object selected to make the texture the new default fill for new objects you create.


Opens the Full Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box, from which you import bitmap images to use as fills. Click the icon with no object selected to make the pattern the new default fill for new objects you create.


Draws the chosen geometric shape on screen. Objects drawn with the Geometric Shapes tool are assigned the current default Fill, Outline Pen, and Outline Color attributes.


Moves the text up one level in the hierarchy.


Moves the text down one level in the hierarchy.


Moves the slide or bullet down one level in the hierarchy from its current position.


Moves the bullet up one level in the hierarchy from its current position.


Shows the text format as it appears on the slide in draft mode.


Displays thumbnails representing the transitions appearing on a slide.


Hides the slide from the current presentation. Effective when you require multiple versions of a presentation, or to remove information for certain audiences.


Enables and disables the jacket that appears around each slide in Slide sorter view.


Color Preferences dialog box

Appears when you try to open any of the outline or fill options, without first selecting an object. The Color Preferences dialog allows you to choose either graphic objects, Artistic text or Paragraph text to apply the colors. Once you select the object to apply the preferences to, the outline or fill option that you clicked opens.


Enable the button to select graphic objects that you draw with the toolbox option to apply the default color preferences.


Enable the button to select Artistic text to apply the default color preferences.


Enable the button to select Paragraph text to apply the default color preferences.


Insert Slide command/button

Opens the Insert Slides Wizard, which allows you to define the number of slides you want to add and if you want them added before or after the current slide.

 Related Topics


Insert Slides (Page 1) dialog box
Insert Slides dialog box

Allows you to define the number of slides you want to add and if you want them added before or after the current slide.


Type the number of slides you want to add to the presentation.


Enable the button to add slides before the current slide.


Enable the button to add slides after the current slide.


Insert Slides - Select a Layout dialog box

Allows you to choose a layout from the current document or a preset library.


Enable either the current document or preset library radio button to select from where you’ll access the required layout.


Displays presentation layouts available from the library or current document. Each one is represented by a thumbnail, which you can double-click to select.


Insert Slides - Select a Background dialog box

Allows you to choose a background from the current document or a preset library.


Displays presentation backgrounds available from the library or current document. Each one is represented by a thumbnail, which you can double-click to select.


Displays the Open dialog box, which allows you to choose a background from a presentation library.


Select a background to view from either the current document or one of the Background libraries.


Delete Slide command (Insert menu)

Removes the currently displayed or selected slide from the presentation. If you change your mind after deleting the slide, click Edit, Undo.

 Related Topics


 Insert Background command (Insert menu)

Opens a flyout menu, which allows you to choose a background from the None, Uniform Fill, Fountain fill, Image, Texture fill, or From Library commands.

 Related Topics


Background, Blank command (Insert menu)

Choose the command to apply a blank, white background to the selected slides.

 Related Topics


Background, Uniform Fill command (Insert menu)

Opens the Uniform Fill dialog box, which allows you to select color models, palettes or mixers, modify color and palette options, or create a custom palette.

 Related Topics


Background, Fountain Fill command (Insert menu)

Opens the Fountain Fill dialog box, which allows you to select the fountain type, angle. steps and color blend or to apply a preset fill.

 Related Topics


Background, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern command (Insert menu)

Opens the Import dialog box, which allows you to select a two-color bitmap pattern to import as a background.

 Related Topics


Background, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern command (Insert menu)

Opens the Import dialog box, which allows you to select a full-color bitmap pattern to import as a background.

 Related Topics


Background, Vector Pattern command (Insert menu)

Opens the Import dialog box, which allows you to select a full-color bitmap pattern to import as a background.

 Related Topics


Background, Texture Fill command (Insert menu)

Opens the Texture fill dialog box, which allows you to select a texture from the library, and modify it to apply as a background.

 Related Topics


# IDH_INSERT_LIBRARY$ Background, From Library command (Insert menu)> proc4


Insert CorelMEMOs command (Insert menu)

Opens the CorelMEMO dialog box, which allows you to insert notes and bitmapped images into any program that supports Object Linking and Embedding (OLE). Use a CorelMEMO when you want to leave yourself a reminder, note a change in a document, or place a comment into a program. Add one of the bitmapped images provided with CorelMEMO, or include your own bitmapped image to customize your CorelMEMO.


Insert Sound command (Insert menu)

Opens the Import dialog box, which allows you to record a sound file and place it on the slide. If you want to insert an existing sound, use the File, Import command to place the sound file in the presentation. You can then invoke the Wave Editor to make edits.

 Related Topics


Insert Video command (Insert menu)

Opens the Open dialog box, which allows you to choose an .AVI video file to insert onto the slide.

 Related Topics


New Object command (Insert menu)

Inserts a linked or embedded object, such as a chart, graphic, or spreadsheet data created in another application. Also lets you insert the contents of another file as an embedded or linked object.

 Related Topics


Insert chart command/button

Opens the Chart Type dialog box, which allows you to select the type of chart to create.

 Related Topics


 Chart Type dialog box

Displays a list of the chart types and a visual representation of the variations available for each type.


Select the chart type you want to use. Scroll the list if you want to see more chart types.


 Double click the chart type you want to use. The display changes with the chart type selected in the list box at left.


Lists the chart type and subtype selected.


Insert Map command/button

Opens the Map Wizard, allowing you to create a map.


Character command (Format menu)

Opens the Character Attributes dialog box, which you can use to edit font and alignment.

The Character Attributes, Font dialog box controls your font or typeface, placement (e.g., Normal, Superscript), effect (e.g., small caps), size, text style, underline, and range kerning.

The Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box controls text character, word, and line spacing, and alignment or justification. To change the attributes of individual characters, drag across them with either text tool or select character nodes with the Shape tool. Selecting characters individually enables you to rotate and shift them horizontally and vertically. You can also use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to rotate selected characters or shift the characters horizontally and vertically.

Choosing the Character Attributes command with no text objects selected enables you to change the default Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text attributes.

Note

Spacing changes apply to all text in the current string or paragraph, not just selected text.

 Related Topics


Change Case command (Format menu)

Opens the Change Case dialog box, which provides the following options for changing the case of selected text:

Sentence case (capitalizes the first word of the selection)

lowercase (makes all letters lower case)

UPPERCASE (converts all letters to upper case)

Title Case (capitalizes each word)

tOGGLE cASE (changes the case of all selected letters)

 Related Topics


Bullet Style command (Format menu)

Opens the Bullet Style dialog box, which allows you to select a font grouping of bullets, size and to enable the bullet.

 Related Topics


Select Bullet dialog box

Sets the type, style and size for the bullets in your presentation.


Select a font style from the list of available symbol fonts.


Type the point size you want the bullet to appear.


Displays available bullet shapes in the current font. Click on the bullet shape that you want to select.


Disable the check box to remove the bullet you selected.


Fit Text to Path command (Format menu)

Opens Fit Text to Path, which enables you to shape a selected Artistic Text object to the outline of a selected non-text object. The text and path become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the path and automatically refit the text.

If you want to fit the text to a character, convert the character to a curve object using the Arrange menu's Convert to Curves command.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it then press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Separate Text from Path command (Format menu)

Detaches text fit to a path using the Fit Text to Path command.

 Related Topics


Straighten Text command (Format menu)

Returns selected text to the baseline and resets Vertical and Horizontal Shift and Angle to zero.

Straighten Text does not affect text spacing options (Inter-character Spacing, Inter-Word Spacing, and Inter-Line Spacing) specified with the Edit Text or Paragraph commands.

Note

Straighten Text is used for removing Horizontal Shift, Vertical Shift, and Angle. If you want to return a text object rotated with the rotation handles to the baseline, click Arrange, Clear Transformations.

 Related Topics


Grid Setup command (Format menu)

Opens the Ruler and Grid tabs, which allow you to set the ruler measurements and grid parameters.

 Related Topics


Ruler page

Sets the horizontal and vertical units of measurement, the horizontal origin and the vertical origin.


Select the units of measurement from the list box; the measurement is displayed on the horizontal ruler.


Select the units of measurement from the list box; the measurement is displayed on the vertical ruler.


Type the number, in inches, that you want the 0,0 points set on the horizontal ruler.


Type the number, in inches, that you want the 0,0 points set on the vertical ruler.


Grid page

Controls the location of the grid zero point, the spacing of the grid lines, the grid display, and the drawing scale.

When you save your drawing, the Grid settings are saved with it.

If you change the grid spacing, objects in your drawing retain their position even if they do not line up with the new grid line positions.

When you change Grid Frequency units, the values in the dialog box are not converted. Each time you change units, you must specify the frequency you want to use with that unit.


Type the number for the amount of space per unit that is left between grid points going horizontally.


Type the number for the amount of space per unit that is left between grid points going vertically.


Enable the check box to display the grid in the presentation window.


Enable the check box to force objects into alignment with a grid point when the object is drawn or moved close to it.


Guidelines Setup command (Page menu)
Guidelines Setup command (Format menu)

Opens the Horizontal and Vertical tabs, which allow you to add Guidelines at specific locations in the drawing window. Also lets you move and delete existing guidelines.

You can add, move and delete guidelines by dragging them with the mouse.

With Snap To Guidelines enabled, an object drawn or moved near a guideline snaps to it.

You can add as many guidelines as you need.

 Related Topics


Horizontal page

Add horizontal guidelines at specific locations in the drawing window. Also lets you move and delete existing ones.


Enable the button to specify that  horizontal guidelines  are to be added, moved or deleted.


Specifies the location of the guidelines relative to the zero points on the rulers.


Click to add a guidelines at the position specified in the Guideline position field list box.


Click to move the guidelines to the new location specified in the Guideline position field. If you have added more than one guideline, click the one you want to move in the position field. Enter the new location, then choose the Move button.


Click to remove the guidelines at the location displayed in the Guideline position field. Delete selected guidelines by continuing to press Delete. If the guidelines to be deleted are not sequential, click the specific guideline position and then click delete.


Click to remove all the guidelines displayed in the Guideline position field.


Enable the check box to display guidelines in the presentation window.


Enable the check box to force objects into alignment with a guidelines when the object is drawn or moved close to it.


Vertical page

Add vertical guidelines at specific locations in the drawing window. Also lets you move and delete existing ones.


Enable the button to specify that  vertical guidelines are to be added, moved or deleted.


Specifies the location of the guidelines relative to the zero points on the rulers.


Click to add a guidelines at the position specified in the Guideline position field list box.


Click to move the guidelines to the new location specified in the Guideline position field. If you have added more than one guideline, click the one you want to move in the position field. Enter the new location, then choose the Move button.


Click to remove the guidelines at the location displayed in the Guideline position field. Delete selected guidelines by continuing to press Delete. If the guidelines to be deleted are not sequential, click the specific guideline position and then click delete.


Click to remove all the guidelines displayed in the Guideline position field.


Enable the check box to display guidelines in the presentation window.


Enable the check box to force objects into alignment with a guidelines when the object is drawn or moved close to it.


Snap to Grid command (Format menu)

Toggles Snap To Grid on and off. Working with the grid on makes it easy to accurately align and position objects. It also allows you to draw precisely-sized objects. The grid is non-printing.

When Snap To Grid is on, the cursor is forced to stay on the grid  points, except when you are:

Selecting an object with the Pick or Shape Tools

Drawing in Freehand or Bezier mode

Rotating/skewing an object with the Pick Tool

Modifying ellipses with the Shape Tool

Zooming in with the Zoom Tool

Notes

When moving objects with Snap To Grid on, the handles on the object's highlighting box are forced to the  grid  points.

Text snaps to the grid along its baseline when moved vertically. When moved horizontally, the text snaps according to the Justification option assigned with the Character command. For example, with Right Justification selected, text snaps to the grid along the right edge of its highlighting box.

When moving rotated text, the handles on its highlighting box snap to the grid.

The Constrain feature always overrides the grid.

The Grid Setup command allows you to display the grid and to set the spacing of the grid points.

Snap To Guidelines has priority over Snap To Grid.

Turning Snap To Grid on will not affect the position of objects already on the screen.

 Related Topics


Snap to Guidelines command (Format menu)

Toggles Snap To Guidelines on and off. Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the drawing window. With Snap To Guidelines on, an object drawn or moved near a guideline snaps to it, which is useful for aligning objects with precision.

Note

The position of objects already on the screen does not change when you turn Snap To Guidelines on.

You can position guidelines by dragging them from the rulers, or by using the Guidelines Setup command.

 Related Topics


To insert a video file

1.	Click Insert, Video.

2.	Select the drive and folder in the Look in list box.

3.	Select the video file extension from the Files of type list box.

4.	Type the name of an existing file in the File name box, or click on the file name in the display window.

5.	Click Open.

A frame labeled AVI appears on the slide. To view the video clip, click the Run button.

Note

You can only insert .AVI files. To incorporate other video file formats into your presentation, use the File, Import command.

 Related Topics


To import a video file

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Select the drive and folder in the Look in list box.

3.	Select the video file extension from the Files of type list box.

You can import . AVI, .MPEG, .MOV, .FLI, and .FLC video files.

4.	Type the name of an existing file in the File name box, or click on the file name in the display window.

5.	Click Import.

Tip

Importing the video file treats the video as a multicel actor. You can work with the video frames in the same ways as you would work with an animation actor.

If you are including an ..AVI file in your presentation, you can also use the Insert, Video command.

 Related Topics


To delete a video file

1.	Select the video frame on the slide.

2.	Click Edit, Delete.

 Related Topics


To move a video clip

1.	Select the video frame on the slide.

2.	Drag and drop the frame to the new location on the slide.

Note

You cannot resize video clips in PRESENTS.

 Related Topics


3.	Click Insert, Motion 3D, in PRESENTS.


Following has been changed Aug. 8, 1995 for use as what's this help. The dialog does not have a help button. --Gordon x1126


When checked, enables you to change the default Artistic Text.


When checked, enables you to change the default Paragraph Text.


 Character command

Opens the Character Attributes dialog box, which you can use to edit font and alignment.

The Character Attributes, Font dialog box controls your font or typeface, placement (e.g., Normal, Superscript), effect (e.g., small caps), size, text style, underline, and range kerning.

The Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box controls text character, word, and line spacing, and alignment or justification. To change the attributes of individual characters, drag across them with either text tool or select character nodes with the Shape tool. Selecting characters individually enables you to rotate and shift them horizontally and vertically. You can also use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to rotate selected characters or shift the characters horizontally and vertically.

Choosing the Character Attributes command with no text objects selected enables you to change the default Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text attributes.

Notes

Spacing changes apply to all text in the current string or paragraph, not just selected text.

Bar code fonts installed with CorelDRAW's Bar Code Wizard do not display in the Character dialog box because they are special fonts used for bar code generation only. Fonts in imported bar codes do not display in the document window and Character dialog box.

 Related Topics


Character Attributes, Font options

Use the Character Attributes, Font dialog box to control your font or typeface, placement (e.g., Normal, Superscript), effect (e.g., small caps), size, text style, underline, and range kerning.

To change the attributes of individual characters, drag across them with either text tool or select character nodes with the Shape tool.

To change the text attributes of multiple text objects at the same time, select them with the Pick tool before you open the dialog box.

Choosing the Character Attributes command with no text objects selected enables you to change the default Artistic Text and/or Paragraph Text styles.

Note

Bar code fonts installed with CorelDRAW's Bar Code Wizard do not display in the Character dialog box because they are special fonts used for bar code generation only. Fonts in imported bar codes do not display in the document window and Character dialog box.

 Related Topics


Displays the names of the available fonts you can choose from. If necessary, use the scroll bar to the right to scroll through the list.


Converts selected text to subscript or superscript.


Converts selected text to SmallCaps or AllCaps.


Sets the size of the current font (available sizes are 0.72 to 4,000 points).


If you prefer a different unit of measure from the default, pick one from the list box.


Lists the type styles available for the chosen font.


Underlines selected text. The options are: Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.

If you want to underline each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Opens the Edit Underline dialog box, where you can change default line thicknesses or baseline shift.


Applies overlines to selected text. The options are: Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.

If you want to overline each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Opens the Edit Overline dialog box, where you can change default line thicknesses or baseline shift.


Applies strikeout to (draws a line through) selected text. The options are: Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin, and Double Thin Word.

If you want to strike out each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, or Double Thin Word.


Opens the Edit Strikeout Line dialog box, where you can change default line thicknesses or baseline shift.


Adjusts the amount of space, or range kerning, between selected characters.


Displays sample characters in the selected font and text style. The type of font you have selected, for example TrueType or PostScript Type 1, is indicated below the Preview area.


Applies Single Thin, Single Thin Word, Single Thick, Single Thick Word, Double Thin, or Double Thin Word underlining, overlining, or strikeout formatting.

If you want to apply formatting each word in the selected text but not space between words, choose Single Thin Word, Single Thick Word, Double Thin or Double Thin Word.


Provides choice of unit of measure.


Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes

Use the Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes if you want to change default line thicknesses or baseline shift. You can also use the Edit Underline, Overline, and Strikeout dialog boxes to change unit of measure if required.

 Related Topics


You can use the list boxes below to the default text line thicknesses.


You can use the list boxes below to set default baseline shift for the current type of line attribute you are editing.


Sets thickness for Single Thin lines.


Sets thickness for Single Thick lines.


Sets thickness for Double Thin lines.


Sets thickness for Double Thin lines.


Sets the amount of Baseline Shift applied for line effect.


 Character Attributes, Alignment options

Use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to control character, word, and line spacing, justification, shift, and angle.

Selecting characters individually enables you to rotate and shift them horizontally and vertically. You can also use the Character Attributes, Alignment dialog box to rotate selected characters or shift the characters horizontally and vertically.

Notes

The Horizontal Shift, Vertical Shift and Angle controls appear only when you have selected text by dragging with the Insertion Point or selected character nodes with the Shape tool.

Spacing changes apply to all text in the current string or paragraph, not just selected text.

 Related Topics


Sets spacing between Artistic Text and Paragraph Text characters as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between words as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between lines of text in points or percentages of character height or point size.


Provides choice of unit of measure.


Moves selected text along the baseline. Increments are measured in percent of point size.


Moves selected text above the baseline. Increments are measured in percent of point size.


Rotates selected text from the baseline. Increments are measured in degrees.


Use the character alignment controls to set text alignment, or justification options [image] Left, Center, Right, Full Justify, Force Justifiy or None. Choose None if you want to use the Shape tool to change the position of individual characters, adjust kerning or rotate a character without automatically repositioning remaining text.


Sets Paragraph Text spacing between characters as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between words as a percentage of the SPACE character in the selected font.


Sets spacing between lines of text in points or percentages of character height or point size.


Sets spacing before paragraphs in percentages of character height; uses the same measurement type set for Line spacing.


Sets spacing after paragraphs in percentages of character height; uses the same measurement type set for Line spacing.


Provides choices for the unit of measure for spacing before and after paragraphs. Choose % of Char. height, points, or % of Pt. size.


Turns off Alignment, so that if you can use the Shape tool to change the position of individual characters, adjust kerning or rotate a character without automatically repositioning remaining text.


Aligns text to both the left and right margins of the Paragraph Text frame.


Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right frame margin.


Aligns text to the left margin, resulting in a "ragged" or uneven right margin.


Aligns text to the center of the Paragraph Text frame.


Aligns text to the right margin, resulting in a ragged left margin.


If you choose Full Justify or Force Justify you can edit the settings for Maximum Word Spacing (0-999 %).


If you choose Full Justify or Force Justify you can edit the settings for Minimum Word Spacing (0-999 %).


If you choose Full Justify or Force Justify you can edit the default settings for how far apart you can set characters, the Maximum Character Spacing (0-999 %).


Enables the International Hyphenator. You can choose between various language databases for hyphenation in the International Proofreader's Advanced Options dialog box.


Enables hyphenation of capitalized words if required.


Sets how far the end of a line must be from the right margin before hyphenation of the first word of the next line occurs.

A smaller hot zone results in more hyphens and better word spacing along the margin.


Choose alternate units of measure from the list as required.


Sets the minimum length of words to be included for automatic hyphenation.


Sets the minimum number of characters (including spaces) that must appear in the Hot Zone before a hyphen.


Sets the minimum number of characters (including spaces) that must appear in the Hot Zone after a hyphen.


Displays the current tab settings and unit of measure selected. Drag tabs along the ruler if you want to move them. If you prefer another unit of measure, choose one from the Units list box.


Change the number if you want to change the distance between evenly spaced tabs along the ruler.


Inserts tab stops at evenly spaced intervals.


Choose another unit of measure from the list box if required.


Click a tab to select it or type in a tab stop above.


Click to place a new tab on the ruler at the tab stop location selected in the tabs list. The new tab assumes current alignment options.


Clears a tab stop selected from the list or ruler.


Clears all tab stops.


Sets leadered tab stops.


Sets the character used for leadered tab stops.


Sets the spacing for leadered tab stops. You can also enter a value from 0 (tight) to 10 (loose) to set leader spacing numerically.


Enables you to choose leader characters for leadered tab stops by their symbol numbers.


Drag the slider left or right to make leader tab spacing tighter or looser.

You can also enter a value from 0 (tight) to 10 (loose) to set leader spacing numerically.


Sets leadered tab stops close together.


Spreads leadered tab stops apart.


Text flows from the tab stop to the right


Centers text at the tab stop.


Text flows from the tab stop to the left.


Aligns decimal points in the text to the tab stop. Text without decimal points extends to the left of the tab stop.


Use the Indents group box to set Paragraph Text indents.


Displays the current indent settings and unit of measure selected. You can drag the markers along the ruler to change indents as required or use the Indents area below to make precise changes. If you prefer another unit of measure, choose one from the Units list box.


Sets the distance the first line of a paragraph is set from the left side of the text frame.

Drag the top marker along the ruler if you want to change your first-line indent visually.


Sets the distance of lines coming after the first line from the left side of the text frame.

Drag the bottom marker along the ruler if you want to change your indent visually.


Sets the distance of lines coming from the right side of the text frame. Drag the right-side bottom marker along the ruler if you want to change your right margin indents visually.


Choose another unit of measure from the list box if required.


Disables bullet effects.


Enables bullet effects. You can choose from all of the symbol sets included with your software.


Sets the size of the current bullet, from 0 to 360 points.


List units of measure for bullet indents.


Sets how far the bullet is set from the left margin of the text frame.


Sets the distance of the bullet from the baseline.


Lists all of the available bullet categories (symbol sets). Choose a bullet type from the preview area.


Displays all of the bullet symbols available in the selected symbol set.


You can use this box to type the Index number for the symbol listed in the Symbol and Clipart Catalog.


Enter a number to divide the selected text frame into columns The maximum number of columns for one frame is eight. If you want to add more columns you can drag out more text frames.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Displays the number of the column currently shown in the Width and Gutter boxes at right.

You can scroll through the Column number list to show other columns when you want to edit column and gutter widths. Column width editing is disabled if the Equal column width option is selected.


Displays a preview of your changes as you make them.


Sets the size of the column. Width also controls the overall frame width if you choose Automatically adjust frame width. Column width is adjustable from 0.25 to 1,000.00 inches.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Sets the spacing between columns. The maximum spacing is 200.00 inches.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Specifies the unit of measurement. If you prefer another unit of measure, choose one from the Units list box.


Sets the same column and gutter widths for all columns. Disable this option to set individual column and gutter widths.


Ensures frame width remains unchanged and adjusts column and gutter widths automatically, preventing settings that exceed the frame or page size.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Adjusts frame, column, and gutter widths automatically.

The preview area at right displays how your changes will look as you make them.


Enables on-screen text editing. When disabled, the Edit Text dialog box opens whenever you select a text object with a text tool or click in the drawing window or pasteboard area with a text tool.


Enables display of a font for drop-down list boxes. Disable this command if you want to turn the sample off.


Sets the minimum number of characters permitted in lines of Paragraph Text shaped to fit into odd-shaped envelopes. When set to the default value of three, lines must have at least three characters to appear.


Simplifies the appearance of text below a certain size to increase screen redraw speed. This option does not affect the appearance of printed text. You can make greeked text readable again by choosing a higher Greeking level or using Zoom.


Specifies whether calligraphic pen outlines are transferred to the Clipboard or exported using any of the vector graphics export filters. If your file contains many calligraphic outlines, excluding them during cut and paste operations reduces the size of the exported file and time required to transfer the file through the Clipboard.

Some export filters retain calligraphic outlines regardless of the setting chosen.


Specifies whether text cut or copied to the Clipboard should be pasted as text or curves. When enabled, text is pasted as text; when disabled, text is pasted as curve objects. When text is pasted as text, font, point size and other text attributes are copied along with the text string.


Enables PANOSE font matching. Font matching occurs when (a) you open a Corel file from another user or computer system, or (b) import text or graphics files that supports text and your current system does not have the same fonts.


Applies the same text formatting to all connected Paragraph Text frames.


Applies the same text formatting only to selected Paragraph Text frames.


Applies the same text formatting only to selected and succeeding linked Paragraph Text frames.


Toggles display of non-printing characters you want to appear in your document while in text editing mode.

To display, the Text menu's Show non-printing characters command must be enabled.


Fit Text To Path command

Opens Fit Text to Path, which enables you to shape a selected Artistic Text object to the outline of a selected non-text object. The text and path become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the path and automatically refit the text.

If you want to fit the text to a character, convert the character to a curve object using the Arrange menu's Convert to Curves command.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it then press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Fit Text To Path

Enables you to shape a selected Artistic Text object to the outline of a selected non-text object. The text and path become a dynamically-linked group, enabling you to edit the text or change the shape of the path and automatically refit the text.

If you want to fit the text to a character, convert the character to a curve object using the Arrange menu's Convert to Curves command.

If you want to keep the path, but prevent it from printing, click the path while holding down the CTRL key and remove the path's fill and outline. To delete the path, use the same technique to select it then press DELETE.

 Related Topics


Determines the orientation of the letters on the path.

	Rotate Letters	rotates individual characters to follow the contours of the path.
	Vertical Skew	vertically skews each character, creating the impression that the text is standing upright on the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.
	Horizontal Skew	similar to Vertical Skew, but with an added effect that makes letters appear to turn into the screen as they wrap around the path. The amount of skewing varies with the slope of the path.
	Center Base	centers the base of each letter on the path.


Determines the vertical placement of text with respect to the path.

	Baseline	aligns the text baseline with the path.
	Top	aligns the text ascender line with the path.
	Bottom	aligns the descender line of the text with the path.
	Center	Centers the text on the path.
	Variable	allows you to move the text off the path by dragging with the mouse.


Flips the text to the opposite side of the path and reverses the path's start and end nodes.


Displays a dialog box you can use to specify text placement on the path.


Fit Text to Path Offsets dialog box

Provides precision Horizontal Offset and Distance From Path controls for text shaped to paths.

 Related Topics


Specifies how far along the path you want to position the text.


Specifies how far above or below the path you want to position the text.


Describes what text objects in the document have been counted. If objects are selected, they are listed.

If no objects are selected, all text in the document is counted, including tab and space characters.


Lists all text object types counted and displays totals for each.


Proofreading command

Displays a flyout from which you can choose the Spelling, Quick Proofreading, Full Proofreading, and Advanced Options commands.

The International Proofreader's three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading and Full Proofreading [image] serve users with varying needs. For example, an office worker who considers speed paramount might want to check only for spelling and mechanical errors. Meanwhile, a journalist writing an article for publication might want to check for stylistic problems. The same journalist, however, having carefully polished and checked the article's style, might want to check the spelling quickly once again before submitting the article. Lastly, an academic or another journalist might be so confident as to consider it unnecessary to check for items such as confused words, clichés, or wordy expressions.

The International Proofreader's functionality is as uniform as linguistically possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by widely accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

The checking and correction functionality of the Proofreader is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proof mode

Full Proof mode

 Related Topics


Spell Checking dialog box

The Spell Checking dialog box detects and corrects numerous types of spelling errors, including those related to complex language-specific phenomena such as clitics in the Romance languages and compound words in the Germanic languages. Spelling mode corrects errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

A/An use (English)

Capitalization

Spelling (abbreviation errors, apostrophe errors, cognitive misspellings, and typographic errors)

Capitalization

Clitics (Romance languages)

Compounding (English and the other Germanic languages)

Doubled words

Hyphenation (including soft-hyphen errors and hyphenation-dependent spelling errors)

Tip

By default, the Spell Checker refers to the Personal Dictionary USERPD during spelling checks.

 Related Topics


Quick Proofreading dialog box

The Quick Proofreading dialog box provides all the functionality of Spelling mode, in addition to correcting errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

Confused words

Double negatives

Format

Homonyms

Inappropriate prepositions

Misspelled expressions

Misspelled foreign expressions

Noun-phrase agreement (Romance languages)

Punctuation

Spacing between words and sentences

Ungrammatical expressions

Uppercase/lowercase spellings of words, depending on their function or context (German)

 Related Topics


Enables you to choose between checking the current text object or the full document if necessary.


Highlights unrecognized words. Click the word and make your changes as you would in the document window.


Describes errors when found. The type of rule shown depends on the proofreading level you choose.


Opens a dialog box you can use to add words to your personal dictionary.


When an error is found, the International Proofreader lists all alternative spelling words found in its database.


Moves the Proofreader to the next sentence.


Leaves the current word unchanged and continues checking.


Ignores all subsequent words or phrases during the current proofreading session.


Replaces the currently flagged error with the word or phrase in the Change To box.


Replaces all instances of the currently flagged error and continues the proofreading session.


Stops the checking session and closes the International Proofreader.


Full Proofreading dialog box

The Full Proofreading dialog box provides all the functionality of Spelling mode and Quick Proofreading mode in addition to identifying many categories of stylistically questionable expressions and offering assistance in eliminating them. The words and expressions flagged in Full Proofreading mode are not grammatically incorrect, but they are ones that careful writers avoid in most contexts or use only for intentional effect. The error messages displayed in Full Proofreading mode are designed to provide you with the stylistic guidelines you need to make a subjective decision about including or omitting such words and expressions. The categories include the following:

Archaic expressions

Clichés

Contractions

Gender-specific expressions

Informal expressions

Jargon expressions

Overused phrases

Pretentious words

Redundant expressions

Sexist expressions

Stock phrases

Unnecessary prepositions

Vague quantifiers

Wordy expressions

 Related Topics


Advanced Options dialog box

This dialog box enables you to set the languages you want the Proofreader to check in your document. You can also set up which language rules and errors are displayed in, whether alternative spellings are displayed when an error is found, use of personal dictionaries, and maximum sentence elements.

 Related Topics


Lists all installed International Proofreader checking languages.


Lists all available International Proofreader Rule languages.


Lists all available International Proofreader Error languages.


Causes the International Proofreader to search the current language database for alternative spellings when an error is encountered.


Enables the creation of personal dictionaries.


Enables you to turn off your personal dictionary or the International Proofreader's dictionary.


Opens the New Personal Dictionary dialog box, where you can save Advanced Option settings in a file for reuse.


You can set the maximum number of sentence elements for each language that you initialize. Sentence elements are words or punctuation that International Proofreader treats as units. The default setting for each language should be acceptable for most text; you should not change the default unless you need to reduce the memory overhead required by the buffer-processing function.


Opens the Rule Manager, where you can customize the International Proofreader's rules.


Rule Manager dialog box

As International Proofreader processes text, it distinguishes between sentence text and non-sentence text and uses appropriate rules to check each type of text. With the Rule Manager, you can customize your proofreading environments by turning off specific rules or categories of rules (called rule types).

The Rule Manager gives you the ability to turn individual rules or entire rule types off and to use different combinations of rules or rule types when writing for different readers. It keeps track of which rules and rule types you have turned off, and of whether you want to do this for the current writing session and/or for future writing sessions. If you turn off rules or rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. If you turn off a rule or rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

The Rule Manager displays a description of each Rule Type when selected in the Rule Manager dialog box.

 Related Topics


Opens a dialog box where you can enter a name for a new user profile, a file containing personal rule settings.


Lists all personal user profiles created.


Enables you to choose between Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading modes for your user profile changes.


Enables you to choose between Formal, Standard, and Informal modes for your user profile changes.


Click to restore the default settings for the Check Mode selected.


Describes the error type highlighted in the Rules Types box.


New User Profile dialog box

Enables you to create a new custom file containing your own rule changes for the Proofreader. If you turn off rules or rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. By default these settings are kept in the user profile "USERPF." Type in a new name if you want to create one. Type in a new name if you want to create a new file.

Note

If you turn off a rule or rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

 Related Topics


New Personal Dictionary dialog box

Enables you to create a new custom file containing your own additional spellings for the Spell Checker. By default these settings are kept in the personal dictionary "USERPD." Type in a new name if you want to create a new personal dictionary.

 Related Topics


Thesaurus command

Opens the Thesaurus, which suggests synonyms for words in your document. Use one of the text tools to highlight the word you want a synonym for and then choose the Thesaurus command.

Tip

You can use the Thesaurus to look up any word, not just the current selection or document.

 Related Topics


Thesaurus

Suggests synonyms for words in your document. Use one of the text tools to highlight the word you want a synonym for, and then choose the Thesaurus command.

Tip

You can use the Thesaurus to look up any word, not just the current selection or document.

 Related Topics


Displays the currently selected word. You can type in any word you want if you did not select one. Click the down arrow to display previously looked up words.


Displays a list of found definitions of the word shown in the Looked up box.


Displays all of the text in the definition of the word in the Looked up box.


Displays the first synonym for the word you looked up.


Lists all synonyms for the word you looked up. Double-click any word in the list to look up its definition.


Click to look up a word.


Click to replace the word you looked up with the word in the Replace with box.


Click to see the previous word.


Type Assist command

Opens the Type Assist dialog box, which has automatic controls for text capitalization [image] the first letter of sentences, two initial consecutive capitals and names of days [image] and changing straight quotes to typographic quotes.

Type Assist also enables you to replace text strings automatically if you want to, replacing "teh" with "the" for example, and includes a number of presets.

If you enable the Replace Text While Typing option, correction takes place after you finish typing the word, either by entering a punctuation mark or a space.

 Related Topics


Type Assist

Opens Type Assist, which has automatic controls for text capitalization [image] the first letter of sentences, two initial consecutive capitals and names of days [image] and changing straight quotes to typographic quotes.

Type Assist also enables you to replace text strings automatically if you want to, replacing "teh" with "the" for example, and includes a number of presets.

If you enable the Replace Text While Typing option, the Replacement Text operation occurs after you finish typing the word, either by entering a punctuation mark or a space.

 Related Topics


Capitalizes the first letter following a sentence end. A sentence end is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.


Changes the standard quotation marks (") included in most font sets to curly, typographical quotes typically used in newspapers and books.


Changes the second capital to lowercase if by mistake you hold down the SHIFT key too long and start a word with two capitals. No change is made if the capitals are followed by a space or period or the word contains other capital letters.


Automatically capitalizes the names of days.


Enables the Replacement Text option, shown below. Text replacement occurs when you press the Spacebar or press ENTER.


Type the code you want Type Assist to use to replace longer text strings automatically .


Type the full word, phrase or text string you want to replace the abbreviation.


Click to add Replacement text to the list.


Deletes replacement options, including the defaults provided in Type Assist if you choose.


Lists the preset strings included with your software and any new ones you've created.


Find command

Opens the Find dialog box, which searches for specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool is active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.

If you want to limit your search to text with specific capitalization, enable Match case and enter the capitalized text string you want to find.

 Related Topics


Find dialog box

Searches for specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool is active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.

If you want to limit your search to text with specific capitalization, enable Match case and enter the capitalized text string you want to find.

 Related Topics


Finds and selects each occurrence of the specified text. You can type as many as 100 characters. The text scrolls horizontally as you type.


Select this option if you want to find only text that matches the combination of upper and lowercase letters you type in the Find What box.


Closes the dialog box.


Replace command

Opens the Replace dialog box, which searches for and replaces specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.


Replace dialog box

Searches for and replaces specific text in a document. In text mode, searching begins at the insertion point and continues to the end of the selected text. When the Pick tool active, the search checks the entire document one text object at a time. When the search has reached the end of the text, a prompt appears asking if you want to continue searching from the beginning.

 Related Topics


Type the text you want to find. You can type as many as 100 characters. The text scrolls horizontally as you type.


Type the replacement text. You can type as many as 100 characters. The text scrolls horizontally as you type.

If you want to delete the text in the Find What box from the document, leave the Replace With box empty.


Finds and selects each occurrence of the specified text.


Choose this button if you want to confirm the replacement of each occurrence of the text you are searching for. For long documents, it is recommended that you use Replace for a few occurrences of the text you want to replace. When you are sure that no similar text strings you do not want to include will be replaced, you can click Replace All.


Choose this button if you want to replace all instances of the text you are searching for.

You can press ESC to cancel replacing. To reverse changes made before you pressed ESC, choose the Undo command from the Edit menu.

For long documents, it is recommended that you use Replace for a few occurrences of the text you want to replace. When you are sure that no similar text strings you do not want to include will be replaced, you can click Replace All.


Select this option to find only text that matches the combination of upper and lowercase letters you type in the Find What box.


Change Case command

Opens the Change Case dialog box, which provides the following options for changing the case of selected text:

Sentence case (capitalizes the first word of the selection)

lowercase (makes all letters lower case)

UPPERCASE (converts all letters to upper case)

Title Case (capitalizes each word)

tOGGLE cASE (changes the case of all selected letters)

 Related Topics


Change Case dialog box

Changes the case of selected text. The available options are as follows:

Sentence case (first word initial capped)

lowercase (all letters lower case)

UPPERCASE (all letters upper case)

Title Case (each word initial capped)

tOGGLE cASE (changes the case of all selected letters)

 Related Topics


Capitalizes the first word of each sentence.


Changes all capitals in the selection to lower case.


Changes all capitals in the selection to UPPER case.


Capitalizes the first letter of all words in the selection.


Toggles the case of all letters in the selection.


Opens the Character Attributes dialog box, where you can apply special font and alignment effects to Artistic Text or Paragraph Text.


Opens the Paragraph dialog box, which controls Paragraph Text spacing, tabs, indents, and bullet effects.


Provides an editing window you can use to enter text without waiting for screen redraws.


 Scrolls the text window up and down.


Applies boldface text style. If no text is selected, boldfacing begins at the insertion point.


Applies italic text style to selected text. If no text is selected, italics begin at the insertion point.


Applies underline text style to selected text. If no text is selected, underlining begins at the insertion point.


Aligns lines of text down an imaginary center line down the middle of the current page or frame.


Stretches the last line of a paragraph to the right margin.


Automatically adjusts inter-word spacing to align text to both right and left margins


Aligns text to the left text frame margin, removing any shift effects you may have applied.


Like left justification, No justification causes text to align along a straight left margin, with "ragged right" margins. With this option, however, shifted or kerned characters are unaffected.


Causes text to align along a straight right margin, with uneven left margins.


Applies bullets to the selected text.


Text Object Properties

You can use Text Object Properties, available from the right-mouse button, to change your fonts, text styles and size, and justification. You can also use the to open the Character Attributes, Paragraph or Columns dialog boxes for further edits. The buttons for the Paragraph and Columns dialog boxes are available only for Paragraph Text.

 Related Topics


Locks current changes.


Makes your changes without closing the dialog box.


Opens the Columns dialog box.


Provides options for which frames your changes apply to.


Enables you to enter Artistic Text directly on the screen.


Enables you to enter Paragraph Text directly on the screen.


Topics taken from Draw 5, F2--p_text.rtf


Artistic and Paragraph Text overview

Adding Artistic and Paragraph Text

Corel's powerful text-handling capabilities let you add and manipulate text with ease, entering Artistic Text or Paragraph Text directly on the screen. In CorelDRAW, you can also add text in the Edit Text dialog box.

Editing and formatting text

As long as you don't convert it to curves, text remains editable even after you transform or apply special effects to it. Some of the formatting you can apply to text includes changing the font, point size, and spacing.

Using Paragraph Text, you can:

flow text into columns (CorelDRAW only);

choose a font and set its point size and attributes

set tabs and indents (CorelDRAW only)

create bulleted lists

adjust character, word, line, and paragraph spacing

hyphenate text automatically (CorelDRAW only)

You can change text formatting using commands in CorelDRAW’s Text menu and Corel PRESENTS Format menu, or the text toolbar.

Symbols (CorelDRAW only)

You can also add symbol from the Symbol Library, which is a collection of graphic symbols relating to business, transportation, sports and many other subjects.

Outline and fill

As with other objects, text and symbols are given a default outline and fill. You can change the defaults using the Outline and Fill tools.

Proofreading text

The new International Proofreader helps you improve your writing by finding spelling errors, correctly hyphenating words, and listing synonyms.

Using special text features

Some of the special text features let you:

fit text to the outline of another object

reshape and wrap Paragraph Text frames around other objects  (CorelDRAW only)

create your own Adobe Type 1 and TrueType-compatible fonts and symbols and use them in other Windows programs

extract text from a CorelDRAW document, edit it in a word processor, then merge it back into the document

 Related Topics


Adding text


To add Artistic Text

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Artistic Text.tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click the document window.

4.	Type the text.

Note

Once the text is on the page, you can use the text toolbar or Character Attributes command to change the font, point size, and other character attributes.

 Related Topics


To add Paragraph Text

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3	Click the document window.

4.	Type the Paragraph Text into the resulting text frame.

Notes

For projects that rely heavily on text, use Paragraph Text, which offers more formatting options than Artistic Text.

Once the text is on the page, you can use the text toolbar or the Character Attributes command to change the font, point size and other character attributes. To change paragraph formatting, use the Paragraph and Columns commands in the Text menu or toolbar.

 Related Topics


To flow Paragraph Text to another frame on the same page

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Drag to create another text frame.

4.	Click the frame filled with text. with the Pick tool.

5.	Click the text flow tab [image] on the top or bottom middle of the frame

6.	Click the empty frame to flow the text into it.

Notes

The frames are linked, so that if you shrink one frame (or change the size of the text), the amount of text in the next frame adjusts automatically. Similarly, if you enlarge a frame, text can flow in from the next linked frame.

You can use the Text menu's, Options, Formatting dialog box to apply formatting in the current frame to all linked frames, selected frames only, or selected and subsequent frames.

Changing the point size or font in the linked frame causes text to reflow, which can change the location of text in linked frames that follow.

For frames that have been previously linked, the previous link is broken and a new one is established with the new text.

 Related Topics


To import text

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the file format from the Files of Type box.

3.	From the Look in box, choose the drive and directory where your file is located.

4.	Type the name of the file in the File Name box.

Note

A new text frame appears, sized according to the page size specified in the file. If the frame can't hold all the text, additional frames and pages are created.

 Related Topics


To paste Artistic Text

1.	Cut or copy the text to the Clipboard.

2.	Open the document you want to paste the text into.

3.	Click where you want the text to appear.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

Note

If you paste the text before clicking the Artistic Text tool, the text will appear in the center of the page.

 Related Topics


To paste Paragraph Text

1.	Cut or copy the text to the Clipboard.

2.	Open the document you want to paste the text into.

3.	Click the Paragraph Text tool and drag to draw a frame.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To enter special characters using mnemonic hotkeys

1.	Press and hold down the CTRL key.

2.	Press the mnemonic symbol (e.g., ‘`~:,^@) associated with the letter you want accented.

Note

You can use the Character Reference Chart supplied with your software for a list of all mnemonic hotkeys.

 Related Topics


Adding and Creating Symbols


Selecting Text


To select text with a Text tool

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Click and hold the mouse button to the left of the first character you want to select.

4.	Drag the mouse pointer over the characters you want to edit to select.

Notes

To select one character at a time, hold down the SHIFT key and press an Arrow key.

 Related Topics


new topic:


To select a Text tool

If the Text tool you want to use is not active, hold the mouse button down on the tool button and choose either Artistic Text or Paragraph Text from the flyout.

Tip

Press F8 to activate the Artistic Text tool, or Shift+F8 for the Paragraph Text tool. For a complete list of the default hotkeys, click Default Hotkeys.

 Related Topics


To select text with the Pick tool

Click inside a Paragraph Text frame or on any Artistic Text character with the Pick tool.

Notes

To select Artistic Text while working in CorelDRAW's wireframe view, click anywhere on the outline of the text.

To select Paragraph Text while working in CorelDRAW's wireframe view, click anywhere on the outline of the frame.

 Related Topics


To select characters with the Shape tool

1.	Click the text with the Shape tool [image]. For Paragraph Text, click anywhere inside the frame. Character nodes appear next to each character along with a pair of handle for adjusting spacing.

2.	To select a single character, click the node to the left of the character.

Note

To select multiple characters, hold down the SHIFT key and click the nodes of each character you want selected. Or, drag until the marquee box encloses the characters' nodes.

 Related Topics


To deselect a character with the Shape tool

Hold down the SHIFT key and click the node to the left of the character.

 Related Topics


Editing Text


To type or edit text on screen

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to edit.

4.	Position the insertion point and make changes.

Notes

In CorelDRAW, use the Edit Text dialog box or wireframe view for word processing where system resources are heavily taxed.

You can edit text on screen provided none of the following CorelDRAW effects have been applied to it: Perspectives, Envelope, Extrude, Contour or PowerLine.

You can edit Artistic Text shaped to paths and Paragraph Text shaped with envelopes on-screen.

 Related Topics


Dublin: new topics to next note


To choose a new font

1.	Select the text you want to change.

2.	Choose a font from text toolbar.

Note

If you have created new Text Styles, select the text you want to change and click a new text style from the Styles list.

 Related Topics


To change font size

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click the Font Size list on the text toolbar.

Tip

In text editing mode, select the text in the current object, click the Font list, and select a new font size or type in a new one.

 Related Topics


To choose a new font style

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click a Text Style button [image] Bold, Italic, or Underline on the text toolbar.

Note

{bmc bullet.bmp	If a font does not support a text style, the button for that text style is grayed out.

 Related Topics


To edit line and strikeout thickness

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to edit.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Edit button next to the attribute type you want to change.

6.	Type a new underline or strikeout thickness as required.

Tip

To remove text underlining, overlining or strikeout, select None from the list box.

 Related Topics


To edit Baseline Shift

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Alignment tab.

6.	Type new values in the Vertical or Horizontal Baseline Shift number boxes.

Tip

To remove Vertical or Horizontal Baseline Shift, select the text and click Text, Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


To edit text character angle

1.	Click the Text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to change.

4.	Click Text, Character.

5.	Click the Alignment tab.

6.	Type a new value in the Angle number box.

Tip

To remove text Angle, reset the angle to 0, or on the Text menu, click Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


To straighten shifted or angled text

1.	Select the vertically or horizontally shifted or angled text.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Straighten Text.

 Related Topics


Dublin: back to old topics


To find text

1.	Click Text (Edit in PRESENTS), Find.

2.	In the Find What box, type the text you want to search for.

3.	Click the Match Case checkbox to find words that have a particular captilization.

4.	Click Find Next to begin searching. The first occurance of the search text is highlighted.

5.	Click Find Next to search for the next occurrence of the text.

Note

You can enter as many as 100 characters into the Find list box; the text will scroll horizontally as you type.

Click Close to edit the found text on-screen.

 Related Topics


To find and replace text

1.	Click Text (Edit in PRESENTS), Replace.

2.	In the Find What box type the text you want to search for.

3.	Type the replacement text in the Replace With box.

4.	Click the Match Case checkbox to find words that have a particular captilization.

5.	Click Replace to confirm the replacement of each occurrence.

Notes

If the string of text that you want to replace is unique (that is, it does not occur in any other text strings in the document) you can click the Replace All button to make the apply the change to the entire document.

You can type as many as 100 characters into the Find and Replace boxes; the text will scroll horizontally as you type.

 Related Topics


To copy and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to copy.

2.	Click Edit, Copy.

3.	Place the cursor where you want the text copied to.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To cut and paste text

1.	Select the text you want to cut.

2.	Click Edit, Cut.

3.	Place the cursor where you want the text moved to.

4.	Click Edit, Paste.

 Related Topics


To change text case with the Change Case command

1.	Select the text you want to change.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Change Case.

3.	Click a text case option.

 Related Topics


Formatting Text


new topic:


To apply or remove underline, overline or strikeout formatting
To apply or remove underline, overline, or strikeout formatting

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want to format.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Underline, Overline, or Strikeout list box.

6.	Click a line style option.

Note

 To remove underline, overline, or strikeout formatting, Click none from the option list

 Related Topics


To apply character attributes to selected text

1.	Drag the insertion point over some characters.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

3.	Choose the attributes you want.

Note

Click Text, Paragraph to set up spacing, tabs, indents, and bullets for Paragraph Text.

 Related Topics


To clear all tabs in a paragraph
To clear all tabs

1. Click anywhere in the Paragraph Text.

2. Click Text, Paragraph.

3.	Click the Tabs tab.

4. Click Delete All.

 Related Topics


To indent a paragraph using the mouse

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the Paragraph Text tool [image] from the flyout.

3.	Click anywhere in the paragraph.

4.	Drag the indent markers along the Tabs ruler to set your new indents.

Notes

You can indent all lines, only the first line, or all but the first line in a paragraph.

You cannot indent Artistic Text.

 Related Topics


To change text alignment

1.	Point to the text tool and hold down the left mouse button.

2.	Click the text tool you want to use from the flyout.

3.	Select the text you want change alignment, or justification for.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

5.	Click the Alignment tab.

6.	Click an Alignment option.

Note

Alignment changes apply to all text in the selected Artistic Text or Paragraph Text objects.

 Related Topics


To copy text attributes

1.	Select a text object or frame using the Pick tool.

2.	Click Edit, Copy Properties From.

3.	Enable the Text Attributes checkbox.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Click the text object or frame whose attributes you want to copy.

Tip

If you use a particular set of attributes often, you can make it easier to apply them to other text by saving them as a style.

 Related Topics


Using Bullets with Paragraph Text


Adjusting spacing


Changing spacing numerically


To adjust spacing with the Character Attributes dialog box

1.	Click a text object or paragraph.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

3.	Click Alignment.

4.	Under Spacing, make changes to Character, Word, or Line Spacing as required.

 Related Topics


To kern text with the Character Attributes dialog box

1.	Select two or more characters with either text tool.

2.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Character.

3.	In the Range kerning box, Enter a Percent of Space Width value.

Notes

You can also kern selected text using hotkeys.

Negative values shift the characters closer together, while positive values shift them farther apart.

You can also select the text using the Shape tool and apply the same changes indicated above.

 Related Topics


Changing Spacing On Screen


To adjust character spacing on screen

1.	Select the text with the Shape tool  [image].

2.	Click and drag the node at the left of the character.

Notes

To adjust character spacing for all the selected text, click and drag the Kerning arrow [image] to the right to increase or drag to the left to decrease spacing.

If you have two or more lines of Artistic Text, you can click and drag the Interline spacing arrow [image] up or down to adjust spacing as required.

 Related Topics


To kern text precisely with the Shape tool

1.	Select the text with the Shape tool  [image].

2.	Select two or more consecutive characters you want to shift.

3.	Click Text (Fomat in PRESENTS), Character.

4.	Click the Alignment tab.

5.	In the Characters number box, type the percent of space width you want to shift the selected characters.

Notes

Adjusting spacing for two or more consecutive characters is called range kerning. Inter-character spacing, set in the Paragraph, Spacing dialog box, applies to the entire paragraph.

You can also adjust the kerning of selected text manually using hotkeys.

 Related Topics


To adjust word spacing on screen
To adjust word spacing on-screen

1.	Select the text with the Shape tool  [image].

2.	Hold down the CTRL key.

3.	Click the kerning arrow [image] and drag.

 Related Topics


To adjust line spacing on screen
To adjust line spacing on-screen

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the Interline spacing arrow [image] and drag.

 Related Topics


To adjust paragraph spacing on screen
To adjust paragraph spacing on-screen

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the paragraph or text object you want to edit.

3.	Hold down the CTRL key.

4.	Click the Interline spacing arrow [image] and drag.

 Related Topics


Using text styles


Dublin: Following topic taken from p_custom.rtf


Special text features


To fit text to a path

1.	Draw a graphic object (ellipse, box, line, etc.) that has the shape you want to fit your Artistic Text to.

2.	Select the graphic object.

3.	Holding down the SHIFT key, select the Artistic Text you want to shape to the path.

4.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Fit Text to Path.

5.	Choose the text orientation in the first list box.

6.	Choose the vertical placement in the second list box.

7.	For objects with open paths, choose the horizontal placement in the third list box.

8.	For objects with closed paths, the following graphic appears [image]. Click the side you want to fit the object.

9.	Click Apply

Tips

You can edit Artistic Text strings directly on paths.

Enable the Place on other side checkbox to move the text to the opposite side of the path.

Click Edit if you want to change the Horizontal Offset and Distance From the Path by typing in numbers.

 Related Topics


To make changes to text shaped to a path

1.	Select the text/path group you want to edit.

2.	Click Text, Fit Text to Path.

3.	Select the text orientation in the first box.

4.	Select the vertical placement in the second box.

5.	Select horizontal placement when fitting text to an open path.

6.	For objects with closed paths, the following graphic appears [image]. Click the side of the graphic you want to fit the text object to.

7.	Click Apply.

9.	Enable the Place on other side checkbox to move the text to the opposite side of the path.

8.	Click Edit if you want to change the Horizontal Offset and Distance From the Path by typing in numberes

Tip

You can edit Artistic Text strings directly on paths.

 Related Topics


To edit the shape of a text path with the mouse

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the path (or object) you want to edit.

3.	Move selected character nodes and control points.

 Related Topics


To move Artistic Text along a path

1.	Click the Shape tool [image].

2.	Click the Artistic Text you want to move. The Shape tool's spacing arrows appear and character nodes (empty to indicate they are not selected) appear.

3.	Marqee select the text you want to move.

4.	Drag in the desired direction.

 Related Topics


To adjust the distance of text from a path

1.	Click the Pick tool.

2.	Hold the CTRL key down and click the text on the path.

3.	Drag away from the path in the desired direction. A slide control appears.

4.	Release the mouse button when the slide control is the distance you want the text to appear from the path.

Tip

If you prefer to change the Horizontal Offset and Distance From Path by typing in numbers, click Edit on the Fit Text to Path Roll-Up.

 Related Topics


To detach text from a path

1.	Select the text/path group.

2.	Click Arrange, Separate.

 Related Topics


Proofreading Text


Checking Statistics


Checking spelling


To run a spelling check

1.	Select the text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

3.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

4.	Click an option in the Check range list box to determine the scope of the spelling check.

5.	For each unknown word, you can choose from the following options:

Edit the word in the Sentence box. The unrecognized word is highlighted. Click the word and make your changes as you would in the document window.

Click Change if the Change To box shows the word you want.

Click Change All if you want to change all instances of the word as shown.

Click Ignore to leave the current word unchanged.

Click Ignore All if you want to leave all such words unchanged.

Click Add Word when you want to include unrecognized words in the current personal dictionary.

Tip

By default, the Spell Checker refers to the Personal Dictionary USERPD during spelling checks.

Click the Options button to customize you spelling check.

 Related Topics


To correct a misspelled word during a spelling check

Type the correct spelling in the Sentence display box and click Change.

Tip

You can also select one of the alternative spellings from the Change To list box and click Change, or to correct all occurrences of the word, click Change All.

 Related Topics


To create a personal dictionary

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options, Create New Dictionary when the Spell Checker selects an unknown word or name that you'd like to add to the spelling database.

4.	Type a name in the Dictionary Name box.

Note

After you create a personal dictionary, you can have the Spell Checker refer to it along with the standard dictionary during a spelling check.

By default the International Proofreader adds all new words to a personal dictionary called USERPD.

 Related Topics


To add a word to a personal dictionary

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	When the Spell Checker displays a word you want to add to a personal dictionary click the Add Word button.

 Related Topics


To open a personal dictionary

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options [image] Personal Dictionary.

4.	Choose the dictionary you want to use.

 Related Topics


Checking Grammar


To check grammar

1.	Select the text frame with the Pick tool.

2.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

3.	Click Quick Proofreading or Full Proofreading from the flyout.

4.	Click Options, Explain Error if you want an explanation of the grammatical errors.

5.	Change the Check range from Current Text Object to Full Text if necessary.

6.	For each unknown word, you can choose from the following options:

Edit the word in the Sentence box. The unrecognized word is highlighted. Click the word and make your changes as you would in the document window.

Click Change if the Change To box shows the word you want.

Click Change All if you want to change all instances of the word or phrase as shown.

Click Ignore to leave the current word unchanged.

Click Ignore All if you want to leave all such words unchanged.

Click Add Word when you want to include unrecognized words in the current personal dictionary.

Tip

Click the Options button to customize your grammar check.

 Related Topics


To set the Proofreader's formality level

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options  [image]  Rule Manager.

4.	Choose an option in the Formality Level list box.

 Related Topics


Setting Proofreading Options


To set advanced proofreading options

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Choose a new language from the Language box list box.

4.	Disable the Always provide alternative spelling checkbox if you do not want the International Proofreader to retrieve and display all possible spellings for words not listed in its spelling database.

5.	Enable the Use personal dictionaries checkbox if you want the International Proofreader to use personal dictionaries for the check.

Note

Change the Maximum sentence elements only if you want to reduce memory demands made by the International Proofreader.

 Related Topics


To set up the Rule Manager

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Spelling from the flyout.

3.	Click Options  [image]  Rule Manager.

4.	Choose an option in the User Profile or click New if you want to create and attach a new one to your file.

5.	To make changes to the rules for another proofreading mode, choose the mode in the Check Mode list box

6.	To set the checking level, choose an option in the Formality Level.

7.	Select or deselect Rule Types by clicking the asterisks as required. Options you change in the Current column apply to the current session only. Options changed under Long-Term are changed for all future sessions.

Tip

You can restore the original Rule Types settings at any time by clicking Defaults in the Rule Manager.

 Related Topics


To restore Rule Manager defaults

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Click Rule Manager.

4.	Click Defaults to restore the original rule settings.

 Related Topics


To choose proofreading language options
To choose language options

1.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Choose a language you want the International Proofreader to display rules in.

4.	Choose a language you want the International Proofreader to display errors in.

Note

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To choose another proofreading language

1.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Proofreading

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

2.	Click Languages.

3.	Choose a new proofreading language.

Note

U.S. English is the default language dictionary installed when you choose Full Install during your program setup. If you want to add another language, run Setup, click Custom installation, and choose the language database you want under Utilities.

 Related Topics


To choose spelling correction options

1.	Click Text (Format in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Click the language for which you want to choose spelling correction options.

4.	Under Spelling correction, enable the Always Provide Alternative Spellings check box if you want the International Proofreader to display suggested replacements for words that are misspelled.

5.	Under Spelling Correction, enable the Use Personal Dictionaries check box if you want to use a personal dictionary.

 Related Topics


To install another proofreading language
To install another proofreading language database

1.	Close all programs.

2.	Click Start, Run.

3.	Type Setup and click OK.

4.	Choose Custom installation and select the language databases you want to install under Utilities.

5.	Reopen your Corel program.

6.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading, Advanced Options.

7.	Click Languages.

8.	Choose a new proofreading language.

Notes

U.S. English is the default language dictionary installed when you choose Full Install during your program setup.

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To choose a proofreading error language

1.	Click Text, Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Under Error Language, click the name of the language in which you want error messages displayed.

Note

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To choose a proofreading rule language

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Under Rule Language, click the name of the language in which you want descriptions of rule types displayed.

Note

Portuguese and Spanish rules and error descriptions are not available.

 Related Topics


To turn proofreading rule types off or on
To turn rule types off or on

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Proofreading.

2.	Click Advanced Options from the flyout.

3.	Click Rule Manager.

4.	Under Check mode, click Full Proofreading.

5.	In the Rule Types box, click the name of the rule types that you want to turn off or on.

6.	If the rule types are not visible in the Rule Types box, make sure you chose Full Proofreading under Check mode to list all rule types, and if necessary, use the vertical scroll bar to make the desired rule type visible.

7.	Under Current Status (for the current writing session), click the check mark to enable or disable the rule type for the current session.

8.	Under Long-Term (for future writing sessions), click the check mark to enable or disable the rule type for future sessions.

Note

The Rule Manager accordingly modifies the long-term status of the rule and reloads it for the next International Proofreader session.

 Related Topics


Using Type Assist


To change straight quotes to typographic quotes
To change straight quotes to typographic quotes automatically

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable Change straight quotes to typographic quotes checkbox.

 Related Topics


To correct consecutive capitals

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Correct two initial, consecutive capitals checkbox.

Tip

No change is made if the capitals are followed by a space or period, or the word contains other capital letters.

 Related Topics


To capitalize the first letter of sentences

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Capitalize first letter of sentences checkbox.

Notes

A sentence end is defined by a period (.), an exclamation mark (!), or a question mark (?). In Spanish, the marks ¿ and ¡ are also supported.

You can also use the Change Case command to change selected text to Sentence case.

 Related Topics


To capitalize the names of days

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Capitalize names of days checkbox.

Tip

You can also use the Change Case command to change the case of selected text.

 Related Topics


To replace abbreviations while typing

1.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Type Assist.

2.	Enable the Replace text while typing checkbox.

3.	In the Replace box, type the code you'll use for your replacement string, for example, "H!".

4.	In the With box, type the replacement string of text.

In this case "H!" might become "Human Resources".

 Related Topics


Using the Thesaurus


To use the Thesaurus

1.	With the text tool active, click the word you want to look up synonyms for.

2.	Click Text (Tools in PRESENTS), Thesaurus.

3.	Click the synonym you want to replace the selected word.

4.	 Click Replace.

Note

You can also click other definitions to see their synonyms.

 Related Topics


Setting Text Options and Defaults


Dublin: Following topics (to the next note to you) are taken from p_custom.rtf


To display the text toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click Text.

 Related Topics


Dublin: Following topic taken from p_defaul.rtf


To change the default tab stops in a paragraph

1.	Select the Paragraph Text you want to set default tab stop for.

2.	Click anywhere in the paragraph or select the frame with the Pick tool.

To change tab stops for consecutive paragraphs, drag to highlight the paragraphs or select the frame with the Pick tool.

3.	Click Text, Paragraph.

4.	Click Tabs.

5.	In the box next to Apply Tabs Every, type the distance you want between tab stops.

To use a different unit of measurement, choose one from the units box. The Tab Stop value is converted to its equivalent in the unit you choose.

6.	Click Apply Tabs Every to implement your changes.

 Related Topics


Working with Fonts


To change the bullet style

1.	Select a bulleted paragraph with the Pick tool or the Paragraph Text tool.

2.	Click Text, Bullet Style.

3.	Do one or more of the following:

choose a Symbol category from the list.

click a bullet in the display box.

type a new point size.

4.	Enable the Enable Bullet check box.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To change the bullet style throughout the presentation
To change the bullet style in the master layout

1.	Click Master Layout, Slide Master.

2.	Select the buttlon on the level that you want to change.

3.	Click Format, Bullet Style.

4.	Do one or more of the following:

choose a Symbol category from the list

click a bullet in the display box

type a new point size

5.	Enable the Enable Bullet check box.

6.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To change the bullet color

1.	Select a bullet with the Pick tool.

2.	Select the required color from the Color Palette.

 Related Topics


To change the bullet color throughout the presentation
To change the bullet color in the master layout

1.	Click Master Layout, Slide Master.

2.	Select the bullet on the  level that you want to change.

3.	Select the color you want from the Color Palette.

 Related Topics


To set the default tab width

1.	Click Tools, Options, Text.

2.	Type the tab width to apply to all text tabs, in the Tab Width scroll box.

3.	Choose the units of measurement to apply to the tab widths, in the Tab Width list box.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To set the inter bullet spacing

1.	Click Tools, Options, Text.

2.	Type the spacing to apply to all bullets, in the Inter Bullet Spacing scroll box.

3.	Choose the units of measurement to apply to the bullets in the Inter Bullet Spacing list box.

4.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To draw a rectangle

1.	Click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the crossbar where you want one corner of the rectangle to appear.

3.	Click and drag.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the rectangle from the corner opposite to the mouse pointer.

Press CTRL while dragging to constrain the shape to a square.

Press CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw the rectangle from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a square

1.	Click the Rectangle tool.

2.	Position the crossbar where you want one corner of the square to appear.

3.	Hold down CTRL, click and drag.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the square from the corner opposite to the mouse pointer.

Press CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw the square from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw an ellipse

1.	Click the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the crossbar where you want one corner of the ellipse's highlighting box to appear.

3.	Click and drag.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the ellipse from the side opposite to the mouse pointer.

Press CTRL while dragging to constrain the shape to a circle.

Press CTRL and SHIFT while dragging to draw the ellipse from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a circle

1.	Click the Ellipse tool.

2.	Position the crossbar where you want the center of  the ellipse to appear.

3.	Hold down CTRL, click and drag.

Tip

Press SHIFT while dragging to draw the circle from the center.

 Related Topics


To draw a star

1.	Click the Star from the toolbar.

2.	Mark the size you want the shape to appear on the slide.

3.	Click the Node Edit tool.

4.	Click and drag the shape to create the star image you want.

 Related Topics


To draw a geometric shape

1.	Click the Geometric Shape tool from the toolbar.

2.	Mark the size you want the shape to appear on the slide.


To draw curves with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Freehand tool.

3.	Click and drag along the desired path.

Note

To erase part of the path you have drawn, hold down SHIFT while continuing to drag backwards. When you release SHIFT, you will resume drawing your line.

 Related Topics


To draw a curve connected to another with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Freehand tool.

3.	Click and drag from the endpoint of another curve.

Note

To connect the line segments, you must click within five pixels of the endpoint. You can adjust this five-pixel threshold by changing the pixel value in the AutoJoin box on the Curve, Bezier tool properties sheet.

 Related Topics


To draw curves with the Bezier tool.

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Choose the Bezier tool.

3.	Click where you want the curve segment to start and drag.

As you drag, two control points move in opposite directions from the node. The distance between the control points and the node determines the height or depth of the curve. The angle of the control points determines the slope of the curve.

4.	Click where you want the curve segment to end and drag.

As you drag, two more control points appear. These allow you to change the curve further.

5.	Click where you want the next curve segment to end and drag.

As you drag, two more control points appear.

6.	Repeat step 5 to draw more connected curves.

7.	Press SPACEBAR twice or choose another tool to stop drawing connected curves.

Note

Curves created with the bezier tool have symmetrical nodes.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you position the control points to move in 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle on the General page in the Options dialog box.

To draw a curve with no change of direction (i.e., a curve with one bump) drag in the direction the curve is moving through the end node. Dragging in the opposite direction creates a curve with a smooth change in direction (i.e., a curve with two bumps).

 Related Topics


To draw unconnected curves with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Choose the Bezier tool.

3.	Click where you want the curve segment to start and drag.

As you drag, two control points move in opposite directions from the node. The distance between the control points and the node determines the height or depth of the curve. The angle of the control points determines the slope of the curve.

4.	Click where you want the curve segment to end and drag.

As you drag, two more control points appear. These allow you to change the curve further.

5.	Press SPACEBAR twice.

6.	Repeat steps 3 through 5 to create the next curve.

Note

Curves created with the bezier tool have symmetrical nodes.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you position the control points to move in 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle on the General page in the Options dialog box.

To draw a curve with no change of direction (i.e., a curve with one bump) drag in the direction the curve is moving through the end node. Dragging in the opposite direction creates a curve with a smooth change in direction (i.e., a curve with two bumps).

 Related Topics


To draw a straight line with the Freehand tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Click the Freehand tool.

3.	Click where you want the line to begin.

4.	Click where you want the line to end.

Note

To draw another line connected to the first, click the endpoint of the last line and continue drawing. You can streamline this action by double-clicking to finish each line segment and start the next. Remember to click, not double-click, when you finish the final segment.

To connect the line segments, you must click within five pixels of the endpoint. You can adjust this five-pixel threshold by changing the pixel value in the AutoJoin box on the Curve, Bezier tool properties sheet.

Tip

Hold down CTRL as you draw the line to constrain it to 15 degree increments. You can specify a different angle on the General page in the Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


To draw connected straight lines with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Choose the Bezier tool.

3.	Click where you want the line to start.

4.	Click where you want the line to end.

5.	Click where you want the next line to end.

6.	Repeat step 5 to draw more lines.

7.	Press SPACEBAR twice or choose another tool to stop drawing connected lines.

 Related Topics


To draw unconnected lines with the Bezier tool

1.	Open the Curve flyout.

2.	Choose the Bezier tool.

3.	Click where you want the line to start.

4.	Click where you want the line to end.

5.	Press SPACEBAR twice

6.	Repeat steps 3 through 5 to draw another line.

 Related Topics


To draw a closed shape with the Bezier tool

1.	Draw the shape segment by segment.

2.	When placing the final node, click the start node of the first segment.

 Related Topics


 The Curve flyout can be opened by clicking on any of the tool buttons it contains. One of these is visible in the Toolbox.


 The Freehand tool allows you to create a curve by dragging the mouse along the path of the curve.


 The Bezier tool allows you to create a curve by placing and manipulating bezier nodes.


 The Polygon tool allows you to create complex shapes by clicking and dragging.


 The Shape flyout can be opened by clicking on any of the tool buttons it contains. One of these is visible in the Toolbox.


Filling objects

Any object with a closed path can be filled in with a solid color or one of several Special Fill types. If you leave an object without a fill or remove an object's existing fill, objects behind it will show through as if it were transparent.

Fountain Fills

A fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path. You can have a direct blend from one color to another, or a cascade of different colors. You can use pre-generated fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.

Texture fills

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your object the appearance of natural materials. You can choose from a series of pre-generated textures, or randomly generate variations.

Pattern Fills

Pattern fills are pre-generated, symmetrical images that easily lend themselves to tiling. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics to use as pattern fills, and you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns.

Uniform Fills

You can quickly fill an object with a solid color using the on-screen palette. If you want more control over the color, you should use the Color dialog box.

 Related Topics


To make an object transparent using the Fill tool

1.	Select the object with the fill you want to remove.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click No Fill.

 Related Topics


To make an object transparent using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Choose one of the palettes from the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object with the fill you want to remove.

3.	Click No Color.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the Fill tool

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click Black Fill or White Fill.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Choose one of the palettes from the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object.

3.	Click the palette's scroll arrows until the color you want is visible.

4.	Click the color you want with the left mouse button.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a uniform color using the Fill Color dialog box

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fill Color.

3.	Choose the color you want (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To change the default fill for graphic objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click No Fill to give all new graphic objects a transparent fill.

4.	Enable the Graphic option.

5.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new non-text objects you create. You may of course change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To change the default background fill for paragraph text

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click No Fill to give all new Paragraph text objects a transparent background.

4.	Enable the Paragraph Text option.

5.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new paragraph text objects you create. You may of course change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To change the default background fill for artistic text objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click Fill tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of fill you want for the default. Click No Fill to give all new Artistic text objects a transparent background.

4.	Enable the Artistic Text option.

5.	Set the appropriate fill attributes.

The set attributes are now applied to any new artistic text objects you create. You may of course change the fill of any individual object.

 Related Topics


Fountain fills

A fountain fill is a progression of colors following a circular, square, straight, or radial path. You can have a direct blend from one color to another, a rainbow of several colors, or a set of color peaks and highlights. You can use pre-generated fountain fills to create neon tubes, metal cylinders, and a variety of similar effects.

You can change the number of color steps in a fill to give it a smoother or rougher appearance. However, since a large number of steps is slow to draw, you might want to limit how the fill appears on screen and how it prints.

The Preview Fountain Steps option in the Display pane of the Options dialog box sets the number of steps that are drawn on screen.

The Fountain Steps option in the Options pane of the Print Options dialog box sets the number of steps that are printed.

The Steps option in the Fountain Fill dialog box overrides these two settings when unlocked (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	In the Type list, click the type of fountain you want:

Linear Fountain creates a fill that changes color in one direction.

Radial Fountain creates a fill that changes color in concentric circles from the center of the object outwards.

Conical Fountain creates a fill that radiates from the center of the object.

Square Fountain creates a fill that changes color in concentric squares from the center of the object outwards.

4.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

5.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

Tip

You can change the number of color steps in a fountain fill with the Steps option. Enable Unlock and enter a new value. When the Steps option is locked, the fill will print with the number of steps specified in the Print Options dialog box and display with the number of steps specified in the Options dialog box (see Related Topics)

 Related Topics


To change the orientation of a fountain fill using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Adjust the Horizontal Offset setting until the center of the fill is where you want it. A value of -50% will place the center on the left edge of your object; a value of 50% will place it on the right edge.

4.	Adjust the Vertical Offset setting until the center of the fill is where you want it. A value of -50% will place the center on the bottom edge of your object; a value of 50% will place it on the top edge.

5.	Adjust the Angle setting until the fill is oriented the way you want it. Positive values will rotate the fill counter-clockwise, negative values will rotate it clockwise.

Note

The Horizontal and Vertical Offset options are not available for linear fountain fills.

The Angle option is not available for radial fountain fills.

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill containing only two colors

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Click Two Color.

4.	Click Direct Color Path.

5.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

6.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

7.	Adjust the Mid-Point slider until the color proportions are correct.

Tip

You can increase the percentage of start and end color by adjusting the Edge Pad value.

 Related Topics


To create a fountain fill containing multiple colors

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Click Two Color.

4.	Click the From color button and choose a color for the start of the fountain.

5.	Click the To color button and choose a color for the end of the fountain.

6.	Click Clockwise Color Path to determine the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.

or

Click Counter-Clockwise Color Path to determine the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.

7.	Adjust the Mid-Point slider until the color proportions are correct.

Note

You can increase the percentage of start and end color by adjusting the Edge Pad value.

 Related Topics


To specify the intermediate colors of a fountain fill

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Fountain Fill.

3.	Click Custom.

4.	Double-click in the preview ribbon to add a color marker.

You can move existing markers by dragging them along the preview ribbon, and delete them by double-clicking.

5.	Click a color in the palette to assign it to the marker.

You can change the color of an existing marker by selecting it and clicking a new color in the palette.

6.	Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you achieve the desired effect.

 Related Topics


Pattern fills

Pattern fills are pre-generated, symmetrical images that easily lend themselves to tiling. You can fill an object completely with one image, but you would more often use a series of repeated images to form a tiled fill. You can import bitmaps or vector graphics to use as pattern fills, and you can create simple two-color bitmap patterns.

For information on a specific type of pattern fill, click the appropriate button:

 Two-color bitmap patterns%two_color_bitmap_patterns

 Full-color bitmap patterns%full_color_bitmap_patterns

 Vector patterns%vector_patterns


Two-color bitmap patterns

A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define. The pre-generated patterns are designed so that they will interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can import an external bitmap to use as a two-color pattern, providing it is composed of just two colors. If you want to import a multi-colored pattern, use the Full-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box (see Related Topics).

Transformations applied to objects with two-color bitmap pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

 Related Topics


Two-Color Bitmap Pattern Editor

This dialog box lets you create your own two-color bitmap patterns. A two-color bitmap is a very simple picture composed of only "on" and "off" pixels. There are no colors in the bitmap except for the two you define in the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box.

Remember that two-color bitmap patterns are meant to be tiled. If the pattern you create is not symmetrical, it might not look very good as a tiled fill.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a two-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap pattern.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

5.	Click the Back color button and choose a color for the background.

6.	Click the Front color button and choose a color for the foreground.

 Related Topics


To create a new two-color bitmap pattern fill

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Create.

4.	Click the Bitmap Pattern size you want. The size you choose determines the resolution of the pattern.

5.	Click the Pen Size you want. The size you choose determines how many squares in the drawing area are filled when you click with the mouse.

6.	Click with the left mouse button to fill squares in the drawing area.

Click with the right mouse button to erase squares in the drawing area.

Note

Once you have completed your pattern, you can change its colors and tile properties just as you would any other two-color bitmap pattern. The pattern you create is added to the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To set the size of two-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options

or

Click Tiling.

4.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a two-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

5.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of two-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Row.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of two-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Column.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To create a two-color bitmap pattern fill from an imported image

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Import.

4.	Choose the file to import (see Related Topics). For best results, import graphics with only two colors.

Note

Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To delete a two-color bitmap pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Two-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Full-color bitmap patterns

A full-color bitmap is a regular color picture such as you might get with an electronic photograph. They can vary widely in complexity, and it is best to use simpler bitmaps for fill patterns, as complex ones will be very memory-intensive and slow to draw. The pre-generated patterns are designed so that they will interlock to fill an object with seamless tiles.

You can import external bitmaps to use as full-color bitmap patterns. If you want to import a simple two-color or black and white bitmap, you might want to use the Two-Color Bitmap Pattern dialog box (see Related Topics).

Transformations applied to objects with full-color bitmap pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a full-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

 Related Topics


To set the size of full-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options

or

Click Tiling.

4.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a full-color bitmap pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

5.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of full-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Row.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of full-color bitmap pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Click Column.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To create full-color bitmap pattern fills from imported images

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click Import.

4.	Choose the file to import (see Related Topics).

Note

Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To delete a full-color bitmap pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Full-Color Bitmap Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Vector patterns

A vector pattern is a picture composed of lines and fills, instead of just dots of color like a bitmap. These pictures are smoother and more complex than bitmap images, and are generally easier to manipulate.

You can import any CorelDRAW file to use as a vector pattern.

Transformations applied to objects with vector pattern fills do not affect the pattern. For example, if you rotate the object, the orientation of the pattern remains constant. However, you can have the designs maintain their aspect when you scale or stretch the object.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a vector pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click the preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want.

 Related Topics


To set the size of vector pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Enable one of the Small (0.25x0.25 inches), Medium (0.50x0.50 inches) or Large (1.00x1.00 inches) options

or

3.	Click Tiling.

4.	Type a value in the Width box. The maximum tile width is 3 inches.

5.	Type a value in the Height box. The maximum tile height is 3 inches.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The height and width values are automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To offset the first tile of a vector pattern using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Type the amount of horizontal offset in the X box under First Tile Offset.

5.	Type the amount of vertical offset in the Y box under First Tile Offset.

 Related Topics


To offset rows of vector pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Click Row.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To offset columns of vector pattern tiles using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to change.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Tiling

4.	Click Column.

5.	Type the amount of offset in the % of Tile Side box.

 Related Topics


To create vector pattern fills from imported images

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click Import.

4.	Choose the file to import (see Related Topics).

Note

Imported patterns appear at the end of the pattern list.

 Related Topics


To delete a vector pattern

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Vector Pattern.

3.	Click the Preview box.

4.	Click the pattern you want to delete.

5.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


Texture fills

A texture fill is a fractally-generated picture that you can use to give your objects a natural appearance. There are more than three hundred pre-generated textures, and each texture has a set of parameters that you can change to create millions of variations.

Texture fills add significantly to the size of your file and the time it takes to print. As such, you should avoid filling numerous or large objects with them.

When you rotate an object with a texture fill, the fill does not rotate. Re-sizing an object with a texture fill can distort the texture. To restore its appearance, apply the texture to the object a second time.

Note

You can use colors from any color model or palette for texture fills. However, if you apply a Spot color to a texture fill, it is converted to a Process color (CMYK) when you create color separations. Since the conversion may not reproduce exactly the same color, and since you would necessarily have four color plates in a CMYK separation, it's best to apply Process colors to texture fills.

 Related Topics


To fill an object with a texture using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to fill.

2.	Click Fill tool, Texture.

3.	In the Textures Library list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

4.	In the Textures List box, click the texture you want.

5.	Adjust the parameters to customize the texture as required. Click the Preview button to see the results of your modifications.

Tip

Click the Preview button to randomly change the unlocked parameters. You can unlock a parameter by enabling the Unlock button next to it.

 Related Topics


To save a customized texture

1.	Make sure the texture you want to save is displayed in the Preview box.

2.	Click Add.

3.	Type a name in the Texture Name box. The name can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces. You can overwrite an existing texture by typing its name.

4.	Click the library in which you want to save the texture.

or

Type the name of a new library in the Library Name box.

Note

You cannot save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a Styles texture and then save it in another library.


To delete a texture

1.	In the Textures Library list box, click the library containing the texture you want.

2.	In the Texture List box, click the texture you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Note

You cannot save or overwrite textures in the Styles library. You can, however, modify a Styles texture and then save it in another library.

 Related Topics


Outlining objects

Every object has a set of outline attributes that you can manipulate in a variety of ways. You can think of each object as being drawn with a pen that changes size, shape, and color. You can use round or square nibs, slanted or symmetrical, thick or hairline-thin to draw dashed, dotted, solid , or calligraphic lines.

In addition to the shape and color of the nib, you can also change the ending shape of an outline. Lines, or objects with open paths, can have ends that are rounded, square, cropped, or tipped with arrowheads and other line-ending shapes. Objects with closed paths (squares, polygons, etc.) naturally have no end-points, but you can still choose from pointed, rounded, or truncated corners.

You can change the outline of an object using the Outline tool or the Outline Pen dialog box.

The Outline tool gives you quick access to the most commonly-used outline styles, and buttons to access more detailed controls.

The Outline Pen dialog box lets you change any aspect of your outline or line-ending shape.

If you just want to change the color of an outline, you can also use the on-screen palette (see Related Topics).

The outline attributes of the current object are always displayed on the far right end of the Status Line.

 Related Topics


To set an object's corner shape

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click a corner style.

 Related Topics


To set an object's line cap shape

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click Square Line Caps to cut the line off exactly at the end points.

Click Rounded Line Caps to round off the ends of the line.

Click Extended Square Line Caps to square off the line and extend it beyond the endpoints for a distance equal to half the line thickness.

 Related Topics


To set outline width using the Outline tool

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the line width you want.

The available widths are: Hairline, Thin, Medium, Medium-Thick, and Thick.

 Related Topics


To set outline width using the Outline Pen dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	In the Width box, type the line width you want.

Note

To use a different unit of measurement, choose it from the Units list. The width value is automatically converted when you change units.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Outline tool

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click Black Outline Color or White Outline Color.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Click one of the palettes in the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object you want to outline.

3.	Click the palette's scroll arrows until the color you want is visible.

4.	Click the color you want with the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To set outline color using the Outline Color dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Color.

3.	Select the color you want (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To remove an object's outline using the Outline tool

1.	Select the object with the outline you want to remove.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click No Outline.

 Related Topics


To remove an object's outline using the on-screen color palette

1.	If the palette is not displayed:

Click View, Color Palette.

Click one of the palettes in the sub-menu (see Related Topics).

2.	Select the object with the outline you want to remove.

3.	Click No Color with the right mouse button.

 Related Topics


To create a dashed outline using the dialog box

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click the Line Style Selector.

4.	Click the style you want.

 Related Topics


To create a dotted line or a line with rounded line segments

1.	Select the object you want to outline.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click the Line Style Selector.

4.	Click the style you want. For a dotted line, click a style with short, widely spaced segments.

5.	Click Rounded Line Caps.

 Related Topics


To set the default outline for graphic objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click No Outline to give all new graphic objects a transparent outline.

4.	Enable the Graphic option.

5.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new non-text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To set the default outline for paragraph text

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click No Outline to give all new Paragraph text objects a transparent outline.

4.	Enable the Paragraph Text option.

5.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new paragraph text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To set the default outline for artistic text objects

1.	Click a white space in the window to ensure that no object is selected.

2.	Click the Outline tool.

3.	Click the tool that corresponds to the type of outline you want for the default. Click No Outline to give all new Artistic text objects a transparent outline.

4.	Enable the Artistic Text option.

5.	If you're using the Outline Pen dialog box, set the appropriate attributes (see Related Topics).

The outline is now applied to any new artistic text objects you create. You may of course change the outline of any individual object.

 Related Topics


To create a calligraphic outline

1.	Select the object with the outline you want to change.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click one of the Corner Styles. The first and third options make the nib square; the second makes it round.

4.	Type a value in the Stretch box.

Lowering the value makes a square nib rectangular and a round nib oval. A low value will create a more pronounced calligraphic effect.

5.	Type a value in the Angle box. The angle controls the orientation of the pen to the drawing surface.

Tip

You can adjust Stretch and Angle interactively by dragging in the Nib Shape box. Experiment to find the combination you want.

Note

To change line widths after creating the calligraphic outline, use the Width setting in the Outline Pen dialog box. Choosing a line width from the Outline menu will reset the Angle to zero degrees and Stretch to 100 percent, thus removing the calligraphic effect.

 Related Topics


Arrowhead Editor

The Arrowhead Editor lets you make changes to the existing line-ending shapes. You can stretch, scale, or move the arrowhead around in relation to the ending point of the line, but you cannot change its basic shape.

If you are looking for a specific effect, choose the line-ending shape closest to what you are looking for, and then edit it using the Arrowhead Editor.

 Related Topics


To apply line-ending shapes using the dialog box

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Click the left Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the start of the line.

4.	Click the right Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the end of the line.

Note

To swap arrowheads from one end of the line to another, click Options, Swap.

To remove an arrowhead, click Options, None.

 Related Topics


To apply line-ending shapes using the Pen Roll-Up

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Pen Roll-Up.

3.	Click the left Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the start of the line.

4.	Click the right Arrowhead Selector, then click the shape you want for the end of the line.

5.	Click Apply.

Notes

To remove an arrowhead, click the first option in the shape list.

 Related Topics


To stretch an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Drag on the solid handles along the sides of the arrow's box to stretch, or on the corner handles to scale.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


To move an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Drag the hollow nodes along the arrow's outline.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


To center an arrowhead or line-ending shape

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Click Center in X to center the arrowhead horizontally.

Click Center in Y to center it vertically.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


To flip an arrowhead

1.	Select a line or curve.

2.	Click Outline tool, Outline Pen.

3.	Under the arrowhead you want to edit, Click Options, Edit.

4.	Click Reflect in X to flip the arrowhead horizontally.

Click Reflect in Y to flip it vertically.

Tip

To get a closer view of the arrowhead, enable the 4X zoom option.

 Related Topics


Views


Slide view displays a single slide with any objects that are included on it. You can draw shapes, write text, add sound, video and OLE objects, and insert maps and charts. You can also print the presentation slides. Use the View menu to switch to other views.


Slide Sorter view displays all presentation slides as thumbnails in a scrollable window. You can change the order of slides, insert/delete slides, apply backgrounds and layouts to selections of slides, show/hide slides in the presentation, or proof a presentation before printing it or starting the screen show. Use the View menu to switch to other views.


Master Layout view displays the current master layout; the four different master layouts are: Title Slide Master, Slide Master, Handout, and Speaker Notes. When you choose a master layout to apply, all slides that follow have the same layout.

You can change the following attributes within the master layouts:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the frames

Use the View menu to switch to Master Layout view.


Speaker Notes view displays presentation slides in thumbnail form on a notes page, along with room for you to type key notes that you want to remember. You can print out the Speaker Notes and use them as a presentation aid when speaking to the audience. Use the View menu to switch to Speaker Notes view.


Handout view displays presentation slides as two slide thumbnails per notes page, along with room for you to add relevant text. Handouts make it easy for the audience to make notes during your presentation, and to remember key points later. You can print out the Handouts. Use the View menu to switch to Handout view.


Animation view displays the current slide you are working on, in animation mode. A VCR toolbar appears at the bottom of the screen. When you are in animation mode, you can select objects to animate, create multicel actors, sequence cels, assign paths, snap to key frames, advance the time, and play the animation. Use the View menu to switch to Animation view.


Background view displays the background of the current slide you are working on. You can apply a new background from fills or the library, modify an existing background, draw objects, add text and insert graphics into the background. When you choose a background to apply, all slides that follow have the same background. Use the View menu to switch to Background view.


Outline view displays the text of all presentation slides. You can arrange the text of a slide in hierarchical order; rearrange the order of slides or bullets; choose the type of text, font or style; select basic effects such as bold, italic and underline; and display text in draft or preview mode. Use the View menu to switch to Outline view.


Handout Layout view displays the slide and text layout frames for handouts. You can change the following attributes within the master layout:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the slide and text frames

Use the View menu to switch to Master Handout Layout view.


Speaker Notes Layout view displays the slide and text layout frames for Speaker Notes. You can change the following attributes within the master layout:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the slide and text frames

Use the View menu to switch to Master Handout Layout view.


Frames


The Group frame contains objects that are grouped using the Arrange menu. An object group, while made up of several objects, is treated as one entity.


The MCI frame contains an .AVI video file. The video plays at the same size as the video frame on the slide. You can enable the check box in the Video Properties dialog box to show the video at the full screen size. Click with the right mouse button on the MCI frame and choose the Properties command to display the Video Properties dialog box.


The Notes Constrain Group frame contains the slide image on the Handout or Speaker Notes page.


The Sound Object frame contains a sound file. You can edit the sound file by double-clicking anywhere within the frame, launching the Wave Editor. You can sequence cels, select mono or stereo output, and create special sound effects while in editing mode.


The thumbnail frame contains a miniature image of a slide or group of slides.


The Text Object frame contains text created in PRESENTS. You can add and manipulate text with ease, entering Artistic Text or Paragraph Text directly onto the screen. Text features include editing and formatting; selecting a font and setting its point size and attributes; adjusting character, word, line, and paragraph spacing; adding symbols; and proofreading.


The Template frame is empty until you double-click to insert the type of object you chose from the layout. For example, if you chose a chart layout, a chart appears when you double-click inside the empty frame.


The Title Object frame contains the slide title or subtitle master layout. You can do the following in the Title Slide Master layout:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the slide and text frames

Use the View menu to switch to other Master Layout views.


The Body Text Object frame contains the body text master layout. This frame is available in Slide Master, Handout, or Speaker Notes master layouts. You can do the following in the body text frames:

change text attributes

change bullet styles

move or size the slide and text frames

Use the View menu to switch to Master Layout views.


The Header Text Object frame contains the header that appears on your slides. You can create a header by accessing File, Page Setup, Header/Footer. Headers can be created for slides, handouts and speaker notes. You can modify the size or location of the header frame on the Slide Master, Handout, or Speaker Notes master layouts, accessible from the View, Master Layouts command.


The Footer Text Object frame contains the footer that appears on your slides. You can create a footer by accessing File, Page Setup, Header/Footer. Footers can be created for slides, handouts and speaker notes. You can modify the size or location of the footer frame in the Slide Master, Handout, or Speaker Notes master layouts, accessible from the View, Master Layouts command.


The OLE Object frame contains objects that are linked or embedded from other applications. You can insert and OLE object onto your slide from the Insert, New Object command.


The Chart OLE Object frame contains a chart that is inserted into your presentation. You can double-click the chart to open the Chart server, which contains two principal tools: the chart-building screen, called Chart View, and an underlying spreadsheet program called the Datasheet. You can create custom charts and display them in PRESENTS.


The Map OLE Object frame contains a map that is inserted into your presentation. You can double-click the map to open the Map server. You can create custom maps and display them in PRESENTS.


The bitmap object frame contains a graphic object that you inserted, imported, linked, or embedded into the file.


The Rectangle frame contains a rectangle drawn using the Rectangle tool [image].

You can change the shape, size, angle, rotation, outline, or fill; edit nodes, or zoom in or out on the rectangle.


The Ellipse frame contains an ellipse drawn using the Ellipse tool [image].

You can change the shape, size, angle, rotation, outline, or fill; edit nodes, or zoom in or out on the ellipse.


The Polygon frame contains a Polygon drawn using the Polygon tool. You can change the shape, size, angle, rotation, outline, or fill; edit nodes, or zoom in or out on the Polygon. To create a variety of star shapes, click on the Edit Nodes tool and drag the Polygon into the desired shape.


The Curve frame contains curve objects drawn using the Freehand tool.


The Artistic Text frame contains Artistic text created using the [image] tool. Use Artistic Text when you want to apply special effects such as shaping text to a path and creating extrusions or contours. You can add Artistic Text objects containing up to 32,000 characters.


Print dialog box

The Print dialog box allows you to set basic print settings, to set more complex print settings, and to print. Use the dialog box to indicate:

which device driver to use

whether to print to the device or to a file instead

which pages or objects to print

how many copies you require

whether to collate the pages

which printer color profile to use

which printing style to use

You can also choose the following:

To change or to review your printer settings

To set more complex parameters, including color separation specifications, and preview your print job

To print using the settings you have chosen

 Related Topics


Print Options dialog box

The Print Options dialog box allows you to set more complex parameters, including color separation specifications and to preview your print job.

Printing style

Use Printing style to select, create, edit, and delete printing styles. Printing style allows you to save the Print Options settings for later use.

Preview box

Use the Preview box to position and size your artwork. The Preview box also allows you to review color-separated jobs separation by separation.

Reference tools

Use reference tools to add reference marks to your print job (e.g., crop marks and page number), as well as to specify whether you wish to print a negative or positive image and whether you wish to print with the film emulsion up or down.

Layout page

Use Layout page options to position and size your artwork.

The Layout style options allow you to print your work in different forms. For example, you can create a greeting card or a booklet with your work by properly applying layout styles.

Options page

Use the Options page to set various advanced options.

The Fountain steps option allows you to specify how many steps your linear fountain fills will contain when printed.

The Screen frequency option allows you to specify what halftone screen frequency you will use.

Note

If you are using color separations and advanced settings, set the screen frequency in advanced settings

The PostScript Preferences button allows you to change your PostScript settings if you are using a PostScript device driver.

The Proofing options allow you to specify specific types of objects to print (e.g., text only). They also allows you to print colors as black or grayscale, to print text as black, and to fit printer's marks (such as crop marks and calibration bars) and layout to the page.

The Print job information sheet option prints a report with information about your print job. Use the Info Settings to customize the information sheet.

The Special settings option allows you to change settings that were previously edited in CORELPRN.INI.

 Related Topics


Print Job Information dialog box

The Print Job Information dialog box allows you to specify what type of information you want included in the print job report. You can direct the report to a printer or text file or both.

 Related Topics


PostScript Preferences dialog box

The PostScript Preferences dialog box allows you to set advanced PostScript options. You can optimize object outlines and fills for printing, and control the way your PostScript driver handles fonts and bitmaps.

 Related Topics


Save Print Style dialog box

The Save Print Style dialog box allows you choose a name for the current print style (i.e., the current settings in Print Options). You can also change any settings you wish in Settings to save in style.

 Related Topics


Print Setup dialog box

The Print Setup dialog box allows you to select a device driver. Click Properties to change or review your printer settings.

 Related Topics


Edit Layout Style dialog box

The Edit Layout Style dialog box allows you to create custom layout styles. By increasing the Across and Down values, you allow space for several working pages on a single sheet of paper. The options in this dialog box allow you to place the working pages in any order.

Note

When you create a custom style you are creating a template for the entire print job. If your document has a lot of pages, Corel will place subsequent pages in an order based on the page order of the template. For example, if page seven is place on the right page of a booklet, page fourteen will appear on the next right page.

 Related Topics


Edit Positioning dialog box

The Edit Positioning dialog box allows you to place several existing printable pages on a single printable page, or to place several copies of an existing printable page on a single page. You can also set page margins in this dialog box.

 Related Topics


Advanced Separations Settings dialog box

The Advanced Separations Settings dialog box allows you to customize the color separations. You can specify screen technology, adjust individual color separations, create color trapping for individual color separations, and select a halftone type.

Consult your service bureau to ensure that all options are set properly.

 Related Topics


Opens a Windows dialog box which allows you to set printing options not controlled by Corel.


Opens the Print Options dialog box which allows you to set advanced printing parameters such as sizing and positioning, halftone screening, color separations, etc.


Indicates which device driver is selected. Click the arrow to access a list of other available printer and imagesetter drivers.

If the driver you need is not listed, install it by using the usual Windows procedure.


Ensures that colors will print as expected.

The printer color profile shown here matches the printer that was chosen in the System Profile (Color Manager).

If you want your print job to be filtered through a different profile, you must go back to the Color Manager, select the appropriate printer, and generate a new System Profile.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Saves the current print settings as a new style.


Deletes the selected style.


Creates a .PRN file from your print job (instead of actually printing).


Prepares the .PRN file for printing from a Macintosh computer.


Identifies the number of copies that will be printed.

Note

When printing to file, request one copy only, with no collation.


Prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).

If you do not enable Collate, the requested number of copies of each selected page will print before the next page will print (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).


Prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).

If you do not enable Collate, the requested number of copies of each selected page will print before the next page will print (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).


Print all pages in your document.


Prints only the objects that are currently selected.


Prints only the page currently displayed.


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Odd/Even Pages option.


Specifies the pages, or the range of pages, to print.

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 to 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print pages 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example, 1~6 will print pages 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

The option works in conjunction with the Print Odd/Even Pages option.


Allows you to specify whether odd, even, or both odd and even pages will be printed.


Displays your file as it will print and allows you to size and reposition your image. Right click on the preview window to choose one of four options: Preview Image, Preview in Color, Full Image Drag, and Print This Sheet Now.

Note

For your image to appear, you must enable Preview image. Otherwise your image will be represented by a bounding box.


Displays your file as it will print and allows you to size and reposition your image. Right click on the preview window to choose one of four options: Preview Image, Preview in Color, Full Image Drag, and Print This Sheet Now.

Note

For your image to appear, you must enable Preview image. Otherwise your image will be represented by a bounding box.


Allows you to move back in a multi-page document.


Allows you to move forward in a multi-page document.


Changes to a full screen preview. Click it again to return to a normal preview.


Displays your file in the Preview box as it will print.

Preview Image is a handy feature. Enable it, unless the image is complex and takes a long time to display. If you disable the preview, a bounding box will still indicate the position and size of your image.


Allows you to choose whether the Preview box will display a composite view of your print job or only a specific color separation.

Note

This feature is only available when Print Separations is enabled.


Prints the filename, current date, and time (and tile number, if applicable) at the bottom of the sheet.

If applicable, color separation information (color, screen frequency and angle, plate number) is printed at the top of the sheet.

Note

To see the file information, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work. If not, you can request that the file information be printed within the page.


Places page numbers on the printed sheets.

Note

To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Causes the file information to print within the page.

Tip

If the working page size is identical to the paper or film size, enable File Info Within Page. Make sure the artwork is positioned so that the file information does not overlap it.


Prints crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.

Note

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints crop marks only along the outer edge of the sheet.

Tip

This option is often preferable when you are printing multiple layouts per sheet.


Prints registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.

Note

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints a bar of the six basic colors (red, green, blue; cyan, magenta, yellow) beside your artwork. These color patches are used to verify the quality of the printed output.

Note

To see the calibration bar, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.


Prints a Densitometer Scale, a bar of varying shades of gray, on each separation sheet. This is an advanced feature that allows you to check the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output with an instrument called a densitometer.

Note

To see the densitometer scale, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work


Prints a negative image when enabled.


Specifies that the film emulsion faces down when enabled.

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film.


These options allow you to resize and reposition your artwork.

Note

These options do not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.


Applies positioning and sizing to all pages.


Identifies the unit of measurement that is used when you specify the layout of your artwork.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Top value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Top value indicates the distance from the top edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Scales the width of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the width of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the height of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Scales the height of your printed artwork (not the original document) by the specified percentage.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Automatically centers your artwork on the page.


Automatically scales your artwork so that it fits the printable page.

Note

Unless Maintain aspect ratio is enabled, Fit to Page will distort your image.


Constrains resizing and scaling so that the height and width ratio of the artwork is maintained.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks a graphic can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks a graphic can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Enables a limit for bleeds. The bleed limit determines how far beyond the crop marks a graphic can extend when printed.

The corresponding value identifies how far beyond the crop marks the bleed can extend.


Allows you to print large artwork on multiple sheets, or tiles, that can later be assembled to form the whole picture.


Indicates the level of flatness that will be applied to curves when you print.

Tip

Increasing the flatness reduces printing time and therefore is useful when you need to produce quick proofs. Be careful however as a flatness level set too high will produce distorted curves.


Causes Corel to automatically increase the flatness in increments of 2, as needed. Attempts to print an object will stop when the flatness value exceeds the value set in the Set Flatness To box by 10. At this point, the printer skips the problematic object and goes on to the next object.


Specifies the maximum allowable number of control points per curve. Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex.


Allows one or more warnings to be issued if objects that are too complex and could cause printing problems are detected.


This value reflects the number of steps that will be used to render any fountain fills in your artwork. A low value (less than 20) will print faster but the transition between shades may be coarse, which causes what is known as banding. A higher value (over 40) will result in a smoother blend but longer printing times.

Note

Fountain steps that are set in the Options dialog box only affect the way fountain fills display on your monitor. To control how the fountain fills actually print, you must set the value for fountain steps here or in the Fountain Fill dialog box.


Warns you of potential banding (the appearance of discreet strips in a fill) which is caused by to few steps in a fountain fill, when it is enabled.

Note

This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.


Prints a job information sheet with your print job. This report contains information about the application that produced the job, the driver that was used, the print settings, the font information, and the file links.


Opens the Job Information Sheet dialog box, which allows you to specify which categories of information you want included in the report.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Identifies the basic halftone screen frequency that your job will print at.

Screen frequency is expressed as a number of lines per inch (lpi). This value refers to the number of lines of dots (or other shapes) that make up a halftone screen. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes of various sizes that is used to simulate a continuous tone image.

Note

Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your print job.


Enables the use of PostScript level 2 features.

Note

This option is only available to level 2 PostScript devices. If you are not certain whether you will be printing on a level 2 postscript device, DO NOT enable this option.


Enables an analysis of your file and the various print settings you have specified, and, if necessary, automatically increases the number of steps used to render fountain fills to avoid banding.

Note

This option may increase print time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.


Enables an analysis of your file and the various print settings you have specified. If the number of steps in a fountain fill is greater than the number that your output device can render, the number of steps used to render the fountain fill is decreased automatically.


Downloads Type 1 fonts to the output device. Generally, this option is enabled because it is particularly beneficial when you want to print large tracts of text that use only a few fonts. Printing is faster as each font is first downloaded, and then only referenced by text that uses it.

If you disable this option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take longer to download, or not download at all, because of sheer size.


Converts True Type fonts to Type 1 fonts. If you enabled the Download Type 1 Fonts option, by default the Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded.

Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.


Tells the service bureau's OPI server to substitute the corresponding high-resolution images for the low-resolution ones in your file. This substitution is done before your print file is rasterized and imaged to film.


Defines bitmaps in RGB values instead of the usual CMYK values that are found in PostScript files.

Tip

Use this option when you are outputting to RGB devices (e.g., slidemakers).

Also use this option when you are printing to CMY devices. It is easier for these devices to translate from RGB to CMY than from CMYK to CMY.


Separates color artwork into its component colors, causing each component color to print out on a single sheet.

If you used a process color model (which uses four colors to simulate any color), you'll get up to four sheets per page.

If you used spot colors, one sheet per color is printed.


Allows you to print the separations in color (i.e., on a color printer). Separations are usually printed in black, with a screen to represent shading. This option allows you to print the separations in color instead.


Converts any spot colors present in your artwork to process colors.

Note

This does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.


Prints all plates, including those that contain no image.

Note

Printing empty plates wastes film and adds to the cost of your job. Generally, you'll want to leave this option disabled.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your artwork. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Allows you to adjust the advanced settings of your color separations, which includes setting halftone screens and creating color trapping.

Note

Do not adjust these settings without first talking to your service bureau or printing shop.


Opens the Advanced Separations Setting dialog box that allows you to set advanced screening parameters such as screening technology, screen frequency and angle per color plate, overprinting per plate, halftone dot type, etc.


Identifies the imagesetter and screening technology that will be used to image your job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT and, HQS screening.


Identifies the imagesetter and screening technology that will be used to image your job.

Proprietary screening technologies supported by Corel include AGFA Balanced screening, Linotronic RT and, HQS screening.


Identifies the resolution (in dots per inch, or "dpi") the job will be printed at.


Identifies the resolution (in dots per inch, or "dpi") the job will be printed at.


Identifies the basic screen frequency (in lines per inch, or "lpi") the job will be printed at.

Note

The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.

The upper limit of your screen frequency is define by the type of printing press to be used and the type of paper stock.


Identifies the basic screen frequency (in lines per inch, or "lpi") the job will be printed at.

Note

The higher the screen frequency setting, the more intense the colors and the sharper the image. The lower the screen frequency, the lighter the colors and the less sharp the image.

A high frequency gives you fewer levels of gray; a low frequency gives you more levels of gray.

The upper limit of your screen frequency is define by the type of printing press to be used and the type of paper stock.


Identifies the screen frequency the selected color separation will be printed at. The default values are based on the imagesetter, screening technology, and basic screen frequency chosen; it is best not to change these values.

Note

Check with your service bureau before modifying these values.


Shows the screen angle for the selected color separation. Screen angles are used to offset the different films in process color separations to avoid moiré patterns. The default values are based on the imagesetter, screening technology, and basic screen frequency chosen; it is best not to change these values.

Note

Check with your service bureau before modifying these values.


Allows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Allows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Allows you to select a color to print over any underlying color (instead of the underlying color being knocked out), thereby making white gaps impossible. This option is best used when the top color is much darker than the underlying color, otherwise an undesirable third color might result (e.g., red over yellow would result in an orange object).

When you enable Overprint color both text and graphics are selected by default. If you do not want one of these options to overprint, disable it.


Allows you to specify a halftone screen for your drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes that is used to simulate shades of colors (i.e. darker to lighter) while using the same ink. Dot, line, diamond, elliptical, and Euclidean are only a few of the available halftone types.


Allows you to specify a halftone screen for your drawing if you are printing to a PostScript device. A halftone screen is a pattern of shapes that is used to simulate shades of colors (i.e. darker to lighter) while using the same ink. Dot, line, diamond, elliptical, and Euclidean are only a few of the available halftone types.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Creates color trapping by assigning an outline to an object that is the same color as the object's fill, and by then having the outline overprint underlying objects.

To be able to apply Auto-spreading to an object, it must

not already have an outline

be filled with a uniform fill

not already be designated to overprint

The maximum trap value defines the amount of spread that autotrapping assigns to an object, along with the object's color. The lighter the color, the greater the percentage of the maximum trap value. The darker the color, the smaller the percentage of the maximum trap value.

The value for Text Above determines the minimum font size to which auto-spreading is applied. Applying auto-spreading to small font sizes can make the text illegible.


Causes any object that contains 95% black or more to overprint underlying objects.

Note

This is a useful option for artwork containing a lot of black text, but it should be used with caution on artwork with a high graphics content.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Opens the Edit Layout dialog box.


Specifies the number of working pages to place on a single printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to place on a single printable page.


Places the current layout in each frame of the printable page.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Allows you to set the amount the images on each tile overlap with the images on adjacent tiles based on a percentage of the page width.


Specifies the placement of your artwork on the page. The Left value indicates the distance from the left edge of the printable page.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the width specified.


Resizes your printed artwork (not the original document) according to the height specified.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in the Positioning dialog box.


Opens the Positioning dialog box. This dialog box allows you to specify positioning settings that can be save in Positioning styles.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in the Positioning dialog box.


Prints only vector graphics unless combined with Print bitmaps or Print text.


Prints only bitmaps unless combined with Print vectors or Print text.


Prints only text unless combined with Print vectors or Print bitmaps.


Prints all text in black.


Prints using the full color capabilities of the selected printing device.


Prints all colors in black.


Prints all colors in grayscale.


Opens the Postscript Preferences dialog box.


Scales everything that will be printed so that it fits within the printable page of the current printer. Use this setting to proof a large layout on your desktop printer.

This option is only intended for proofing, and should be disabled for the final output. If you wish to scale your artwork to fill the printable page, you should use the fit to page option. Position and size measurements reflect the size of the final output, not the size of the proof.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device's location.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Displays a list of documents that you can print.


Allows you to choose what to print.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Stores a configuration of print settings that can be used again.


Displays a list of the current device's mode settings.


Displays information about the current printing device.


Displays a list of the current device's capabilities.


Displays information about the current printing device.


Specifies which color separation(s) to print.

The list of colors shows all separations used in your artwork. You can choose to print all separations, one separation only, or any combination of separations.


Shows all separations used in your artwork. Click each one to change frequency, angle, and to enable overprinting.


Shows all separations used in your artwork. Click each one to change frequency, angle, and to enable overprinting.


Displays the present print style, or a name you have typed for a new style.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Allows you to save this dialog box's settings.


Makes the right margin equal to the left margin, and the bottom margin equal to the top margin.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Automatically sets the gutters.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Displays a model of the printable page based on the positioning settings.


Automatically sets the margins.


Specifies the number of rows of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Specifies the number of columns of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in this dialog box.


Saves the present positioning settings.


Deletes the selected positioning style.


Specifies the number of rows of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Specifies the number of columns of positioning frames to be placed on the printable page.


Stores the page positioning settings specified in this dialog box.


Specifies the number of working pages to position across the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position across the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position down the printable page.


Specifies the number of working pages to position down the printable page.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


Keeps the frame size equal to the working page size.


Displays a model of how the pages will be arranged on the printed sheet.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Shows the other side of a double sided layout.


Allows you to print on both sides of the page.

Note

When you enable this option, and you print to a non-double sided printer, Corel automatically runs a wizard that ensures all of the pages are ordered and oriented correctly.


Provides preset page layouts and allows you to store custom styles.


Saves the present layout settings.


Deletes the selected layout style.


Selects a page to be placed on the layout sheet.


Selects a page to be placed on the layout sheet.


Allows you to specify whether the top of the selected page points up or down.


Allows you to specify whether the top of the selected page points up or down.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Shows the contents of the Print Job Information Sheet.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a .TXT file.


Allows you to specify the .TXT file the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Sends the Print Job Information Sheet to a printer.


Allows you to specify the printer the Print Job Information Sheet is sent to.


Places the current working page in each frame of the printable page.


BOO


Allows you to choose proofing options.


Allows you to choose an option and assign a new setting to it.

Note

The Special Settings options allow you to change settings that were previously edited in the CORELPRN.INI file.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device's location.


Provides information about the current printing device.


Provides information about the current printing device, and allows you to change devices.


Allows you to specify the number of copies and whether to collate them.


Allows you to specify color trapping settings.


Allows you to change screening options for the selected color separation.


Provides a list of the present print options and allows you to change them.


Allows you to specify the distance between each layout frame that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Allows you to set the page margins. You can also change the units.


Allows you to specify the distance between each working page that is placed on the printable page. You can also change the units.


Sets PostScript font handling.


Sets PostScript bitmap handling.


Allows you to enable PostScript warnings.


Allows you to specify what information the Print Job Information Sheet will contain.


Allows you to choose the output format and destination of the Print Job Information Sheet.


To print all pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose All.

 Related Topics


To print only the current page

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose Current Page.

 Related Topics


To print only certain pages

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose Pages.

3.	Choose Even Pages, Odd Pages, or Even and Odd from the pages list box.

4.	Type the pages you want printed in the pages box.

Note

A dash (-) between numbers defines a range of sequential pages (e.g., 1-5 will print pages 1 through 5).

A comma (,) between numbers defines a series of non-sequential pages (e.g., 1,5 will print pages 1 and 5 only).

Any combination of dashes and commas is supported (e.g., 1-3, 5, 7, 10-12 will print the following pages: 1, 2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 11 and 12).

Inserting a tilde (~) between two numbers will cause those two pages plus every second page in between to print. For example,1~6 will print the following pages: 1, 3, 5 and 6. If you enter 2~6, pages 2, 4 and 6 will print.

 Related Topics


To print only selected objects

1.	Select the objects to print.

2.	Click File, Print.

3.	Choose Selection.

 Related Topics


To print only vectors, bitmaps or text

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Enable Vectors, Bitmaps, Text, or a combination of these.

5.	(Optional) Enable Print All Text In Black if you want to print text in black instead of in color.

 Related Topics


To print only certain layers

1.	Click Layout, Layers Roll-Up.

2.	Enable or disable the Printable option for each layer, as required.

 Related Topics


To immediately print the sheet being previewed

1.	Point to the Preview box.

2.	Click the right mouse button, click Print This Sheet Now.

 Related Topics


To print a memo

1.	Select the memo you want to print.

2.	Click Edit, Note object, Open.

3.	Click File, Print from inside the Memo window.

4.	Choose a printing device.

 Related Topics


To select a device

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printer or imagesetter from the Name list box. If the device driver you need is not listed, install it following the usual Windows procedure.

Tip

If you're proofing or printing a job in-house, choose the driver for your local device.

If you're sending a file to a service bureau, choose the device driver that's specified by the service bureau.

 Related Topics


To set the device properties

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Properties.

3.	If printing to a PostScript device, set only the Page Size, Orientation, Tray, and Resolution here. Leave all other options at their default and set them from Print options instead.

or

If printing to a non-PostScript device, set all relevant options here.

Note

As these are Windows-controlled options, see your Windows documentation for more information.

Tip

To verify the extent of the unprintable area for the selected device, click Unprintable Area.

To print on both sides of the page (duplex printing), click More Options.

 Related Topics


To print to file

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable Print to File.

3.	Enable For Mac if your print file is being sent to a service bureau with Macintosh equipment.

PostScript files created using the Print to File option contain two Control-D (^D) characters that prevent them from printing on any PostScript device controlled by Macintosh computers. Enabling the For Mac option removes the ^D characters from the files.

4.	Click OK.

5.	Type a filename and choose a destination. The appropriate extension (.PRN) will be appended to your filename.

 Related Topics


To select a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a print style from the Style list box.

 Related Topics


To edit an existing print style or create a new one

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	(Optional) Choose an existing print style to edit from the Style list box.

4.	Change the print options.

5.	Click [image].

6.	Choose a name for the style.

Tip

When you click Cancel instead of OK in the Print dialog box, all of the changes you have made in print options are discarded. If you do not want to lose these changes and you need to click Cancel (i.e. you need to change your work before you print), save your settings as a print style.

 Related Topics


To delete a print style

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Select a print style to delete from the Style list box.

4.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To print color artwork in black or grayscale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click All Colors As Black or All Colors As Grayscale.

 Related Topics


To print multiple copies

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Type the number of copies you need in the Number of copies number box.

 Related Topics


To collate multiple copies

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Enable Collate.

Note

Choosing Collate allows you to print one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a set of pages 1 to 10 will print before a second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on). Otherwise the requested number of copies of each selected page will print going on to the next page (e.g., five copies of page 1 will print, before five copies of page 2 will print, and so on).

 Related Topics


To preview your print job

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Preview Image.

Tip

You can choose whether you prefer the preview to be on or off by default. Click the Options tab, and from Special Settings choose Preview Image Default. Set to On By Default or Off By Default.

You can also toggle the preview on or off by clicking the Preview box with the right mouse button and then clicking Preview Image on the pop-up menu.

Preview Image is a handy feature. We recommend that you enable it unless the image is complex and takes a long time to display. If you disable the preview, a bounding box will indicate the position and size of your image.

 Related Topics


To preview your color separations

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Preview Image.

4.	Choose composite (all color separations together) or a single color separation (e.g., cyan) from the list box.

Note

You can only view individual Color separations if you have enabled color separations in Print Options.

Tip

You can choose whether you prefer the preview to be on or off by default. Click the Options tab, and from Special Settings choose Preview Image Default. Set to On By Default or Off By Default.

You can also toggle the preview on or off by clicking on the Preview box with the right mouse button and then clicking Preview Image on the pop-up menu.

Preview Image is a handy feature. We recommend that you enable it unless the image is complex and takes a long time to display. If you disable the preview, a bounding box will indicate the position and size of your image.

 Related Topics


To specify a color or grayscale print preview

1.	Point to the Preview box.

2.	Click the right mouse button. Enable Preview In Color to specify a color preview. Disable this option to specify a grayscale preview.

Tip

Displaying individual color separations in grayscale instead of color can be helpful when you are attempting to study color distribution. Yellow in particular can be difficult to discern against a white background. Even magenta and cyan, if sparse, can be easier to discern when displayed in grayscale.

 Related Topics


To enlarge the preview box

Click the enlarge icon at the top-left corner of the Preview box.

 Related Topics


To move from page to page in print preview

Click one of the page-flipper buttons. The button pointing left flips back through the pages and the button pointing right flips forward.

 Related Topics


To specify full image or marquee drag in print preview

1.	Point to the Preview box.

2.	Click the right mouse button. Enable Full Image Drag to keep the image visible while it is being repositioned. Disable this option to change the image to a marquee box while it is being repositioned.

Tip

The default is Full Image Drag. To make the default drag marquee, click the Options tab, and in Special Settings, and choose Print Preview Drag Mode. Change the setting to Drag Marquee.

 Related Topics


To size your artwork when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	(optional) Enable (or disable) Maintain Aspect.

5.	Assign the height and width values in the unit of measurement you want

or

Drag the handles in the Preview box.

Note

You can only size your artwork this way when you are using the Full Page layout style with no rows or columns, or when you are using the Manual layout style.

If you enabled Maintain Aspect, you can only resize the image proportionally.

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To fit your artwork to the page when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	(optional) Enable (or disable) Maintain aspect ratio.

5.	Click Fit to Page.

Note

Your artwork is automatically scaled (up or down) so that it fits the printable page. Your image will be distorted if you do not enable Maintain Aspect.

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To maintain the aspect ratio of your artwork when sizing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Maintain aspect ratio.

Note

This is the default setting.

This option does not affect your artwork. When you are finished printing you will still be able to change the aspect ratio of your work.

Tip

The height and width ratio of an image is known as its "aspect". If you are resizing or scaling your artwork using the print preview, it is a good idea to enable Maintain Aspect to prevent image distortion.

 Related Topics


To manually position your artwork when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Change the Top value (distance from the top of the printable area) and the Left value (distance from the left side of the printable area).

or

Drag the graphic in the Preview box.

Note

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

If you select the Manual Layout style, you can place several working pages on a single printable page. Each of these pages can be sized and positioned individually. You can also use the Clone Page option to place several copies of the same working page on a single sheet of paper.

 Related Topics


To automatically center your artwork when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Center image.

Note

This option does not affect the artwork itself, only the way it is printed.

 Related Topics


To set a bleed limit

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Bleed Limit.

6.	Enter a bleed limit value. This value represents the distance the artwork will be allowed to bleed beyond the crop marks (i.e. the edge of final paper size).

Note

This setting has no effect unless the working page size is smaller than the printable page and your artwork extends beyond the edge of the working page (see Page layout (and printing) in related topics).

Consult your service bureau or printing shop to determine the appropriate bleed limit for your job. Excessive bleeds waste film and may cause other problems.

 Related Topics


To print large artwork as tiles

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Print tiled pages.

5.	Indicate by how much you want the tiles to overlap. Enter a value (e.g., a quarter of an inch) or a percentage of the page size.

 Related Topics


To apply position and size settings to all pages when printing

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Enable Apply Settings to All Pages.

 Related Topics


To choose a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Choose a layout style from the Layout Styles list box.

Note

If you chose a layout style  before you open the print dialog box (i.e. using Page Setup) then the appropriate layout style will automatically be selected in the print dialog box. If you change it (with the exception of Full Page)your work will not print correctly.

Tip

If you have created your work in a Full Page layout then you may choose to print this work using a different layout style. For example, if you have designed a four-page document set up as Full Page, but would like to print it as a top-fold or side-fold card, you can choose the appropriate card style here. Or you may have designed a business card as full-page document and elect to print it using the labels layout.

 Related Topics


To edit a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Choose a layout style to edit from the Layout style list box.

5.	Click the Layout style, Edit button.

6.	Indicate the number of working pages from the Corel document to include on each printable page in the Across and Down number boxes.

7.	Indicate the size of the gutters (space between pages) in the Horizontal and Vertical number boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

8.	Click each box on the model of the of the printable page and choose a page number and an angle.

9.	If you will be printing on both sides of the paper, enable Double sided layout. Click Flip Page to see each side.

Note

When you select Double sided layout and you print on a non-duplex printer, a wizard automatically provides instructions on how to insert the pages.

 Related Topics


To save a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Layout style, Edit button.

5.	Edit a layout style (see related topics).

6.	Click [image].

7.	Choose a name for the layout style.

 Related Topics


To delete a layout style in the Print Options dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Layout style, Edit button.

5.	Choose a layout style from the Layout style list box.

6.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To print several pages on a single sheet of paper

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button

5.	Indicate how many rows and columns of the chosen layout you want printed per sheet.

6.	Indicate the size of the gutters (space between rows and columns) in the Horizontal and Vertical number boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

or

Enable Auto Spacing.

7.	(Optional) Enable Clone frame.

8.	(Optional) Enable Maintain document page size.

Note

When you use Rows and Columns without enabling Clone Frame or Maintain document page size, each page of your work will be reduced in size and placed into a single frame (the intersection of one row and column). Each frame is placed starting with the first page at the top left and then each succeeding page is placed from left to right and down.

If you enable Clone Frame, only one page of your work is placed in all of the frames for that sheet. In this way you can print multiple copies of one piece of artwork on a single sheet.

If you enable Maintain document page size each frame will be the same size as the page size specified in the document. For example, if you create a document on an 8.5 inch by 11 inch page, the frames will be constrained to that size. Thus, if you choose 11 inch by 17 inch paper, and specify 2 rows by 2 columns, some of the frames will not fit on the page.

When you use Rows and Columns with a layout style that places several working pages on a single printable page (e.g., Tent-Card) each printable page is treated as a frame.

 Related Topics


To change the margins of the printed sheet of paper

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button

5.	Indicate the size of the margins in the Left, Right, Top, and Bottom number boxes. You can change the unit of measurement in the Units number box on the right.

or

Enable Auto Margins.

6.	If you want the left and right margins to be equal, and you want the top and bottom margins to be equal, enable Equal Margins.

 Related Topics


To save settings in the Edit Positioning dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button.

5.	Change the settings (see related topics).

6.	Click [image].

7.	Choose a name for the settings.

 Related Topics


To delete settings in the Edit Positioning dialog box

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Layout tab.

4.	Click the Positioning, Edit button.

5.	Choose a saved settings name from the Positioning list box.

6.	Click [image].

 Related Topics


To print file information

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable File Info Button.

4.	(Optional) Enable File info within page.

Note

To see the file information, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work, or you must indicate that the file information should be printed within the page. If you do print the file information within the working page, make sure the artwork is positioned so that the file information does not overlap it.

 Related Topics


To print crop marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Crop Marks.

4.	(Optional) Enable Exterior crop marks only.

Note

To see the crop marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

If you are printing multiple pages per sheet (e.g., 2 rows by 2 columns), and you will not be cutting these pages into individual sheets, you may want to enable Exterior crop marks only. If you disable this option there will be crop marks around each row and column.

 Related Topics


To print registration marks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Registration Marks.

Note

To see the registration marks, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

Tip

Corel offers a variety of registration mark styles. Look up what's available under Registration Mark Type in Special Settings on the options page in Print options. Choose a different style if you prefer. This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To print page numbers

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Page numbers.

Note

To see the page numbers, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

 Related Topics


To print a calibration bar

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Calibration Bar.

Note

To see the calibration bar, you must define a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

 Related Topics


To print a densitometer scale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Densitometer Scale.

Note

To see the densitometer scale, you must defined a working page size that is smaller than the dimensions of the actual sheet of paper or film that is used to image the work.

 Related Topics


To print negative film

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Negative Film.

Tip

Do not choose negative film if you are outputting to a desktop printer.Check with your service bureau. Be especially careful if you require negative film: if you enable Negative Film and the service bureau's equipment is also set to negative, you will end up with positive film.

 Related Topics


To specify emulsion down

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Enable Emulsion Down

Note

Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film. Normally, images printed to a laser printer are printed with the emulsion up (button not enabled). Other types of reproduction may call for either emulsion up or down. Check with your service bureau.

Printing with the emulsion down produces a backwards image.

 Related Topics


To set the screen frequency

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Choose a screen frequency, expressed in lines per inch (lpi). Check with your service bureau for the optimum setting for your job.

Note

When the screen frequency is set to Default, your artwork is printed using the default screen frequency of the output device.

If you are using the Advanced settings, found on the Separations page in the Print Options dialog box, set the screen frequencies for each color separation here. These settings override the settings on the Options page.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To set Level 2 usage

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Use PostScript Level 2 Features.

Note

This option is only available to Level 2 PostScript devices. If you are not certain whether you will be printing on a Level 2 PostScript device, DO NOT enable this option.

 Related Topics


To test for complex objects

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Complex Objects Warnings.

Note

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To reduce curve complexity by increasing flatness

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Increase the flatness value manually

or

enable Auto Increase Flatness.

Note

If you enable Auto Increase Flatness, the printer increases the flatness of curves in each object which is too complex by increments of 2. If the object is still too complex when the flatness value exceeds the value in the Set Flatness To box by 10, the printer will skip the problematic object and go on to the next object. With this option enabled, the PostScript program is far less likely to cause errors on complex printing jobs.

If the printer skips an object because Auto increase flatness is enabled then the object will NOT appear in the final output. You will not be informed that this has happened while you print. The problem will only become evident when the print job is imaged to paper or film. Therefore it is important to inspect proofs before your job is printed.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To reduce curve complexity by limiting control points

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enter a value for Maximum points per curve.

Note

Reducing this number helps alleviate printing problems caused by objects that are too complex. A lower number of points per curve will not reduce quality but it will increase printing time.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To verify fountain fills for banding

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Banded fountain fill warnings.

Note

This warning only applies to linear fountain fills.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To automatically increase fountain steps

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Auto increase fountain steps.

Note

This option will increase the number of steps that are used to render fountain fills to avoid banding (the appearance of discreet strips in a fountain fill). This may increase printing time, but it will ensure the best possible rendering of fountain fills.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

You can enable both Auto increase fountain steps and Optimize Fountain Fills. Fountain steps will be increased in fountain fills that require more steps and fountain steps will be reduced in fountain fills that have too many.

 Related Topics


To optimize fountain fills to reduce complexity

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Optimize fountain fills.

Note

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

You can enable both Auto increase Fountain steps and Optimize Fountain Fills. Fountain steps will be increased in fountain fills that require more steps and fountain steps will be reduced in fountain fills that have too many.

 Related Topics


To download type 1 fonts

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Click Download Type 1 Fonts.

Note

If you enable the Download Type 1 Fonts , by default Convert True Type to Type 1 is also enabled. This ensures that True Type fonts are converted to Type 1 fonts so that they can be downloaded. Only disable this option if your output device has difficulty interpreting the Type 1 fonts.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

Generally, you will want to leave this option enabled and let the driver download the Type 1 fonts to the output device. If you disable this option, fonts are output as graphics (either curves or bitmaps). This may be useful if the file contains a large number of fonts that would take an unacceptably long time to download, or not download at all, because of sheer size.

 Related Topics


To limit the number of bitmap fonts created

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Bitmap Font Limit.

5.	Enter a number between 0 and 250.

Note

This option applies to text that will be printed on a PostScript printer.

If the font used meets certain criteria, a bitmap version of the font is created in the printer's memory. Bitmap character descriptions are used because they look better at small point sizes and they print faster than the normal character outline descriptions. The fonts created in this way consume a large amount of PostScript memory. As a result, you may need to limit the number of such fonts created to avoid a PostScript error when you are printing.

The following criteria must be met for a bitmap version of the font to be created in printer memory:

The printed character size is no larger than 75 pixels. This corresponds to a point size of 18 at 300 dpi, 9 points at 600 dpi, and so on.

The text is not scaled or skewed.

The text does not have an outline or a fill other than a uniform fill.

The text does not have any envelopes (non-linear transformations) applied to it.

The drawing is not being printed using the Sizing options or Fit To Page option in the Print Options dialog box.

 Related Topics


To set a bitmap font size threshold

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From Special Settings choose Bitmap Font Size Threshold.

5.	Enter a number between 0 and 1000. This value represents the bitmap height in pixels.

Note

The value set here determines if a Bitmap representation of the font can be created by the printer if the specific font is not loaded on the printer. The value represents the bitmap height in pixels. The higher the value, the bigger the bitmaps. If a bitmap cannot be created, the text can be sent to the printer as curves.

This option applies to text that will be printed on a Postscript printer.

 Related Topics


To control bitmap conversion to grayscale

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Color Bitmap Output.

5.	Choose Send Color Bitmaps As Grayscale or Send Color Bitmaps As Color.

Note

The default setting calls for color bitmaps to be reduced to grayscale if they are going to a grayscale device. Transmission time is much faster this way and the file size is smaller. If you switch this setting to Send As Color the device will do the conversion which results in slower transmission and a larger file size.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

 Related Topics


To output color bitmaps in RGB

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Output Color Bitmaps in RGB.

Note

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

PostScript output normally uses the CMYK color model. If outputting color bitmaps to an RGB or CMY device, enable the Output Color Bitmaps in RGB option. RGB devices will then receive ready-to-use RGB values (instead of CMYK). CMY devices will have an easier time translating RGB to CMY (3-color model to 3-color model) than CMYK to CMY (4-color model to 3-color model).

 Related Topics


To maintain OPI links

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Click PostScript Preferences.

5.	Enable Maintain OPI links.

Note

To use OPI links, you must enable the "Link to high resolution file for output using OPI" option when importing your TIFF (or CT) files. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in your file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.

Maintain OPI links is enabled automatically if you import your bitmaps correctly.

This option is available to PostScript devices only.

Tip

To proof a file that contains OPI images on a device that doesn't have the high-resolution files (e.g., your desktop printer), disable the Maintain OPI Links option.

 Related Topics


To specify fountain steps

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Specify the number of steps to be used when rendering fountain fills.

Note

Fountain steps set from the Options dialog box only affect the way fountain fills display on your monitor. To control how they actually print, you must set the fountain steps on the Print Options page.

A low value will print faster but the transition between shades may be rather coarse, causing what is known as "banding". A higher value will result in a smoother blend but the printing times will be longer.

Tip

You can assign a custom fountain fill to one particular object. Select the object and 'open' the lock in the Fountain Fill dialog box (if the lock is closed then the number box is grayed out). Objects that are locked will print according to the number of steps assigned in the Print facilities. For example, you might want to set a high number of fountain steps for the one or two big objects in your drawing and leave the smaller items locked into the printer settings to be printed at a smaller step setting.

 Related Topics


To print a job information sheet

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Enable Print job information sheet.

5.	(Optional) To customize this report, click Info Settings and indicate which categories of information are to be included. Also specify whether the job information is to be saved to a file or printed or both.

 Related Topics


To define special settings

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	Choose an option from the Special Settings group box.

5.	Choose a new setting for it.

Note

In previous versions of Corel products, these options were only changed by editing the CORELPRN.INI file. This new feature in the Print Options dialog box allows you to customize these options directly from the Corel program.

This is a list of all of the special settings:

Bitmap Font Limit (PostScript only)

Bitmap Font Size Threshold (PostScript only)

Composite Crop Marks (PostScript only)

Conform to DSC (PostScript only)

Grayscale Driver Bitmap Output (PostScript only)

Overprint Black Threshold (PostScript only)

Postscript 2 Stroke Adjust (PostScript only)

Registration Mark Type (PostScript only)

Bitmap Printing

Drive Banding

Fill Clipping

Page Orientation Warning

Preview Image Default

Print Preview Drag Mode

Text Output Method

 Related Topics


To print bitmaps in small chunks

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Bitmap Printing.

5.	Choose Output In 64K Chunks.

Note

This switch determines whether bitmaps are sent to non-PostScript printers all at once or in smaller blocks (below 64K). Usually, the driver tells the application which method it can or cannot handle. If you find that bitmaps do not print as expected, try forcing bitmaps to be output in a number of smaller blocks.

 Related Topics


To assign control over printer bands

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Driver Banding.

5.	Choose Let Driver Handle Banding (the printer driver creates the bands) or Send Bands to Driver (the Corel application splits the print job into bands before sending it to the printer driver).

Note

This option applies to non-PostScript printers only.

Tip

Some printers can't hold a full page in memory; therefore they must print the page in multiple passes, or "bands". The default setting lets the driver split the page into bands before sending them to the printer. If this proves too slow, or you encounter problems, request that Corel send the page to the driver already split into bands.

 Related Topics


To assign control over fill clipping

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Click Options.

3.	Click the Options tab.

4.	From the Special Settings group box, choose Fill Clipping.

5.	Choose Use Driver Clipping For Fills or Use Software Clipping For Fills.

Note

This option applies to non-PostScript printers only.

Tip

Any fill other than Uniform fill (including Lenses and PowerClips) requires clipping if the object is not rectangular. The default setting is clipping controlled by the driver, because that usually means faster processing. If you encounter a problem printing non-Uniform fills, switch to clipping controlled by the software.

 Related Topics


To print to a black and white desktop printer

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose a printer and make sure its properties are set correctly.

3.	Make sure the Printer color profile and the Print to file options are NOT selected.

4.	Indicate which pages or objects to print.

5.	Indicate how many copies you need and whether to collate them.

6.	(Optional) Click Options.

If required, enable file information, page numbering and crop marks.

Enable Preview Image and adjust the size and position of your artwork.

Click OK.

Note

The above procedure applies to printing a black and white composite to a black and white desktop printer. If you are printing color separations to a black & white desktop printer, also set the appropriate options under the Separations tab.

 Related Topics


To print to a color desktop printer

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose the printer and make sure its properties are set correctly.

3.	Verify that the Print to file option is NOT selected.

4.	Make sure the printer color profile that matches your printer is identified and enabled. If the profile identified is not the correct one, go to Tools, Color Manager and select the appropriate profile. Enable the correct profile in the Print dialog box.

5.	Indicate which pages or objects to print.

6.	Indicate how many copies you need and whether to collate them.

7.	(Optional) Click Options.

If required, enable file information, page numbering and crop marks.

Enable Preview Image and adjust the size and position of your artwork.

Click OK.

Note

The above procedure applies to printing a color composite to a color desktop printer. If you are printing color separations to a color desktop printer also set the appropriate options under the Separations tab.

 Related Topics


To print to a color press

1.	Prepare your project.

It is crucial that you start off on the right foot. Make sure you understand the importance of color management and color correction. Also, consult your service bureau and printing shop AT THE VERY BEGINNING of your project. They will provide you with invaluable information. Skipping this preparatory step can result in costly errors or omissions.

Once you have all the necessary information from your service bureau and printing shop, and your artwork is ready, you will need to create a "print file"(.PRN). This is the file you will send to your service bureau.

For a better understanding of what will happen to your file once you send it out, review the information about going to press (see related topics).

To begin creating the .PRN file, click File, Print.

2.	Set up the basics of the print job.

Enable Print to File. (You will enter a name for the file later, at step 7.)

Choose the imagesetter driver specified by your service bureau.

Make sure the printer color profile that matches the above imagesetter is selected. If it isn't, go to File, Color Manager and select the appropriate profile.

Specify a print range.

Set the number of copies to 1.

3.	Set up the printable page.

Click Options and enable Preview Image.

Adjust the size and position of your artwork, if required.

Set the bleed limit, if required.

Choose a layout style, if required.

4.	Set up the reference tools (below the Preview box).

Set the printers' marks as specified by your service bureau: file information, crop marks, registration marks, calibration bar, and densitometer scale.

Choose negative or positive film and emulsion up or down, according to your service bureau's specifications.

5.	Set the advanced options (Options tab).

If required, adjust the number of fountain steps.

Set the screen frequency. You can fine-tune this setting at step 6, if required.

Click PostScript Preferences and set all options that apply.

(optional) Enable Print job information

6.	Set the color separation parameters (Separations tab) if applicable.

Enabled Print Separations. Make sure the In Color option is NOT enabled.

If required, enable Convert Spot Colors to CMYK.

Choose all the color separations; indicate whether you want empty plates printed.

Customize your halftone screen, in consultation with your service bureau, if required.

Choose the appropriate trapping strategy, in consultation with your service bureau, if required.

7.	Click OK.

At the prompt, enter a name for your print file.

8.	Send out, proof, and approve your job for printing.

 Related Topics


To print Object Data

1.	In the Object Data Manager dialog box, click File, Print.

2.	(Optional) To print only the highlighted range of cells, choose Selection for Page Range.


To print slides, notes, handouts, or an outline

1.	Click File, Print.

2.	Choose Slides, Notes, Handouts, or Outline from the Print box (lower left corner of the Print dialog box).


The printer icon is in the second column from the left. When it is not grayed out (as in the fourth row), the layer will print.


The Enlarge Print Preview button allows you to switch from a regular to a full-screen print preview and back again.


These two arrow buttons allow you flip through the pages of your document. They are located at the lower-right corner of the Preview box.


The File Information button allows you to print the filename, current date, and time (and tile number, if applicable) at the bottom of the sheet.

If applicable, color separation information (color, screen frequency and angle, plate number) is printed at the top of the sheet.


The Crop Mark button allows you to print crop marks. These marks are used as alignment aids when trimming the printed output down to its final size.


The Registration mark button allows you to print registration marks on each sheet. These marks serve as guides for aligning color separations.


The Page Number button allows you to place page numbers on the printed sheets.


The Calibration bar button allows you to print a bar of the six basic colors (red, green, blue; cyan, magenta, yellow) beside your artwork. These color patches are used to verify the quality of the printed output.


The Densitometer Scale button allows you to print a Densitometer Scale, a bar of varying shades of gray, on each separation sheet. This is an advanced feature that allows you to check the accuracy, quality, and consistency of the output with an instrument called a densitometer.


The Negative button allows you to print a negative image.


The Emulsion Down button allows you to specify that the film emulsion faces down.


These controls let you specify the number of rows and columns of labels you want to appear on each sheet.


The available corner styles.


The available line cap styles.


These controls let you change the nib shape and angle to create calligraphic effects.


These controls specify the size of each label on the sheet.


These controls change the margins of a sheet of labels.


These controls change the distance between labels in a sheet.


The number of pages on each sheet of paper. Some layout styles have more than one page per sheet.


The width of the text on each page.


The width of the text on each page.


The type of fold or cut used in the specified layout style.


The height of the text on each page.


The height of the text on each page.


The label type.


Displays controls for choosing and editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing and editing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing PostScript texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing uniform color fills.


Displays a pair of boxes inside the selected object for scaling and offsetting tiles.

Drag the left box to offset the first tile.

Drag the node along the bottom edge of the boxes to scale the tiles. Hold down the CTRL key as you drag to maintain the pattern's aspect.

Drag the right box down to offset alternating columns of tiles.

Drag the right box down and to the left to offset alternating rows of tiles.


Prompts you to choose an existing object, and displays that object's fill attributes in the Fill Roll-up. You can then easily apply the same fill to other objects.


Opens a dialog box where you can further refine your fill properties.


Applies your fill to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default fill for new objects.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Changes the foreground color to one you select from a palette.


Changes the background color to one you select from a palette.


Displays a linear fountain in the Preview box.

To change the angle of the linear fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a radial fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a radial fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.


Displays a conical fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a conical fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a conical fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a square fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a square fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a square fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Shows the name of the current texture. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of the textures in this library.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Previews the current fill.


Lists the available textures by name. Click on a name, or use the scroll bars to see the entire list.

Each name represents a special type of pattern fill which will only print on a PostScript printer. In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Changes the current color. Click the color you want, or use the scroll bars to see more of the palette.


Displays the current color.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the start of an open path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the end of an open path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a selection of dashed and dotted line styles.

Use the scroll bars to see other styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a palette of outline colors. Use the scroll bars to see other colors in the list. Click the one you want.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box where you can access all of the available Outline Pen controls.


Applies your choices to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default outline for new objects.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Specifies whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible. This option is particularly useful for outlined text.


Specifies whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.

If enabled, the outline thickness increases when the object is enlarged (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when the object is made smaller. If the object is rotated, the nib shape also changes accordingly.


Toggles the current outline on and off. If the button is depressed, the object will have no outline.


Displays controls for choosing and editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing and editing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays a pair of boxes inside the selected object for scaling and offsetting tiles.

Drag the left box to offset the first tile.

Drag the node along the bottom edge of the boxes to scale the tiles. Hold down the CTRL key as you drag to maintain the pattern's aspect.

Drag the right box down to offset alternating columns of tiles.

Drag the right box down and to the left to offset alternating rows of tiles.


Prompts you to choose an existing object, and displays that object's fill attributes in the Fill Roll-up. You can then easily apply the same fill to other objects.


Opens a dialog box where you can further refine your fill properties.


Applies your fill to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default fill for new objects.


Previews the current fill.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new starting color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new ending color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Displays a linear fountain in the Preview box.

To change the angle of the linear fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a radial fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a radial fountain, click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.


Displays a conical fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a conical fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a conical fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Displays a square fountain in the Preview box.

To move the center of a square fountain, left-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain your movements to 10-percent increments.

To change the angle of a square fountain, right-click in the preview box. Hold down the CTRL key to constrain the angle to multiples of 15 degrees.


Previews the current pattern. Click the preview box to display a list of available patterns.


Opens the Load dialog box, where you can load a new vector pattern file.


These controls let you choose the foreground and background colors of your pattern.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new background color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new foreground color.


Opens the PostScript Options Dialog Box, where you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors. This button is only active when there is a spot color selected for both the background and foreground.


Opens the Two-Color Pattern Editor, where you can create your own two-color patterns.


Opens the Import dialog box, where you can import a graphic to use as your pattern.


Permanently removes the current pattern from the pattern list.


Reveals controls for editing the pattern's tiling properties.


Sets the size of your pattern tiles. You can choose one of the pre-set sizes, or enter custom dimensions.


Sets the tile size to 0.25 x 0.25 inches, or to 25% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


Sets the tile size to 0.50 x 0.50 inches, or to 50% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


Sets the tile size to 1.00 x 1.00 inches, or to 100% if Scale pattern with object is enabled.


The width of each tile. You can specify new tile widths from 0.1 to 15 inches.


The width of each tile.


Displays the units you are using to measure the tile width. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Width value is automatically converted when you change units.


The height  of each tile. You can specify new tile heights from 0.1 to 15 inches.


The height  of each tile.


Displays the units you are using to measure the tile height. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Height value is automatically converted when you change units.


Sets the offset of the first tile (and therefor, the rest of the pattern) relative to the top right-hand corner of the object. If you want the pattern to start flush with the corner, set these two values to zero.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the horizontal position of the first pattern tile relative to the left side of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Sets the vertical position of the first pattern tile relative to the top of the object.


Shifts rows or columns of tiles so that the pattern is staggered, rather than continuous.


Shifts alternating rows of tiles by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating columns of tiles by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Shifts alternating rows or columns by the amount specified.


Alters the pattern tiles so that they seem to be continuous.


Toggles between absolute and proportional tile sizes. When the option is enabled, the tiles will grow and shrink with the object.


The width of each tile. You can specify widths from 5 to 500% of the object width.


The width of each tile. You can specify widths from 5 to 500% of the object width.


The height of each tile. You can specify heights from 5 to 500% of the object height.


The height of each tile. You can specify heights from 5 to 500% of the object height.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your pattern as you draw it. Left-click to add a colored area to the grid, right-click to erase.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 16 x 16 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 32 x 32 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the resolution of the Edit Grid to 64 x 64 squares. You lose all pattern edits when you change resolutions.


Changes the pen size to 1 grid square.


Changes the pen size to a 2 x 2 square.


Changes the pen size to a 4 x 4 square.


Changes the pen size to an 8 x 8 square.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Shows the name of the current texture. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of the textures in this library.


Displays the current fountain fill type. Click in this field to choose one of the four fountain fill types.

A Linear fountain fill changes color in one direction. A Radial fountain fill changes color in concentric circles from the center of the object outwards. A Conical fountain fill radiates from the center of the object like rays of light. A Square fountain fill changes color in concentric squares from the center of the object outwards.


Repositions the center of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that it no longer coincides with the center of the object. Negative values shift to the left, positive values shift to the right.


Repositions the center of a radial, conical, or square fountain fill so that it no longer coincides with the center of the object. Negative values shift the center down, positive values shift it up.


Changes the angle of linear, conical, and square fountain fills. Positive values rotate the fill counter-clockwise, negative values rotate it clockwise.


Changes the number of bands used to display and print the fountain fill. For a smoother gradation, increase the number of steps.


Toggles the lock on the Steps box.


Adds extra steps of the From and To colors to the ends of your fountain fill.


Previews the selected fountain fill.

You can change the fill's orientation by dragging the pointer in the preview box. Left-click to move the center of radial, conical and square fills. Right-click to change the angle of linear, conical, and square fills. Holding down the CTRL key while dragging constrains your adjustments to regular increments.


These controls let you modify the intermediate colors of your fill.


Determines the intermediate fill colors from a straight line beginning at the From color and continuing across the color wheel to the To color.

This option produces a color series composed of blends of your From and To colors.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a starting color for your fill.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose an ending color for your fill.


Displays controls to set the starting and ending colors of your fill, and the color wheel path that the intermediated colors follow. You can create a direct blend containing only two colors, or a multi-colored rainbow blend.


Determines the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Determines the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Adjusts the midpoint of the color blend.


Displays controls that let you manually determine the intermediate colors of your fountain fill. You can add up to 99 color markers to control your blend.


Shows the position of the current color marker. You can change a marker's position by editing its position value.


Opens a flyout from which you can change the current color.


Changes the current color. Click the color you want, or use the scroll bars to see more of the palette.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Shows the positions of your color markers. Each triangle marks a peak of color in your fountain fill. Once you have selected a color marker by clicking it, you can change its color with the on-screen palette.

You reposition a peak by dragging it along the marker bar, and you delete it by double-clicking. You can add a new peak by double-clicking a blank spot on the bar.


Displays a list of pregenerated fountain fills. You can save a modified fill by typing a name in this field and clicking on the add button.


Saves the current fountain fill. If you have created the fill from scratch, you must first type a name in the Presets field.


Deletes the selected fill from the Presets list.


Opens the PostScript Options Dialog Box, where you can adjust the halftone screen settings for spot colors.


Shows the current texture library. Click in this field to get a drop-down list of available texture libraries.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, where you can add a new texture to one of your libraries, or overwrite an existing texture with the current one.

You cannot overwrite textures in the Style Library, but you can modify them and then save the modified textures in other libraries.


Deletes the selected texture. You can delete textures from any Library except the Styles library.


Shows a list of the textures in the current texture library. Click on the texture you want, or use the scrollbars to see the entire list.


Displays a preview of the texture with the current parameters. Click the Preview button to update the preview after making changes to the texture parameters.


Updates the texture preview to reflect any changes to the texture parameters.

If you have not made any changes, the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Opens the Texture Options dialog box where you can set the resolution and maximum tile width of your texture fill.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.

To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, click the Preview button. If you have not made any changes since the last time you updated the preview, clicking the Preview button randomizes all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture.

To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, click the Preview button. If you have not made any changes since the last time you updated the preview, clicking the Preview button randomizes all unlocked parameters. Click a parameter's Lock icon to lock or unlock it.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven numeric parameters that control different aspects of the texture generation. To change a numeric parameter, enter a value in the text box.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Each texture can have up to eleven color  parameters that control the different shades used to create the texture. To change a color, click on the color button and select a new one from the pop-up palette. Click the More button to create a color or to choose it by name.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


Locks and unlocks the texture parameters.

If you have not made changes to any parameters, clicking the Preview button varies the selected texture by randomly changing all unlocked parameters. Locked parameters are not randomized when you click the Preview button.


The name of your texture. It can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

You cannot save new textures or overwrite existing textures in the Style Library.


The name of the library where you want to store your texture. It can be up to 32 characters long, including spaces.

You cannot save new textures or overwrite existing textures in the Style Library.


Sets the resolution at which your pattern will print.


Sets the maximum width of your pattern at full resolution. Larger tile widths take more memory to draw.


The amount of memory your bitmap will use at its maximum tile width. Reduce the Maximum Tile Width value to conserve memory.


Returns the texture options to their default settings.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose a new color.


These controls let you add arrowheads and other line-ending shapes to the ends of lines (open paths).


Opens a flyout containing a list of arrowheads and symbols you can apply to the beginning of a line. Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the flyout without making a selection, press the ESC key.

To find out which terminus of a line is the beginning, select the line with the Shape Tool and press the HOME key.


Opens a flyout containing a list of arrowheads and symbols you can apply to the end of a line. Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.

To find out which terminus of a line is the end, select the line with the Shape Tool and press the END key.


Opens a menu of options that you can apply to the start of the line.

The None option removes the current arrowhead from your line.

The Swap option moves the arrowhead to the other end of the line.

The Edit option opens the Arrowhead Editor, where you can change the size, Placement , and general shape of the arrowhead.

The Delete option deletes the current arrowhead.


Opens a menu of options that you can apply to the end of the line.

The None option removes the current arrowhead from your line.

The Swap option moves the arrowhead to the other end of the line.

The Edit option opens the Arrowhead Editor, where you can change the size, Placement , and general shape of the arrowhead.

The Delete option deletes the current arrowhead.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Displays the current thickness of the outline. To change the width, enter a new value, or click the arrow buttons.


Displays the units you are using to measure the line width. Click in this field to display a list of units. The width value is automatically converted when you change units.


Opens a flyout containing a list of dashed styles that you can apply to your line. Use the scroll bars to see other line styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the flyout without making a selection, press the ESC key

You can create dotted lines by applying round Line Caps to a line style with short, widely-spaced dashes.


Draws mitered (pointed) corners for polygons, and selects a square nib shape.


Draws rounded corners for polygons, and selects a round nib shape.


Draws blunted corners for polygons, and selects a square nib shape.


Truncates the line at each endpoint.


Draws round caps extending beyond the ends of the line.


Draws square caps extending beyond the ends of the line.


Previews the shape and orientation of the nib, showing the effects of varying Angle and Stretch. You can also change the shape of the nib by dragging in the preview box.


Previews the shape and orientation of the nib, showing the effects of varying Angle and Stretch. You can also change the shape of the nib by dragging in the preview box.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Changes the width of the nib. A square nib has a stretch value of 100%; smaller values will make the nib narrower, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphy effect.


Varies the angle of the nib, creating a calligraphy effect.


Resets the Angle value to 0.0 degrees and the Stretch value to 100%.


Specifies whether the outline is placed behind or in front of the object's fill. When placed behind, only half the outline's thickness will be visible. This option is particularly useful for outlined text.


Specifies whether the outline thickness and nib orientation remain the same or change in proportion to the object.

If enabled, the outline thickness increases when the object is enlarged (by scaling or stretching) and decreases when the object is made smaller. If the object is rotated, the nib shape also changes accordingly.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your arrowhead. You can stretch the arrowhead with the solid markers, and move it with the hollow markers.


Displays a magnified, editable image of your arrowhead. You can stretch the arrowhead with the solid markers, and move it with the hollow markers.


Flips the arrowhead horizontally.


Flips the arrowhead vertically.


Centers the arrowhead horizontally with respect to the X marker.


Centers the arrowhead vertically with respect to the X marker.


Magnifies the arrowhead by a factor of four. Helpful when positioning the arrowhead.


Selects a line thickness. Each click on the scroll arrows changes the thickness by .01 inches. Scroll down repeatedly for the Hairline or No Outline options.


Selects a line thickness from .001 to 0.5 inches. Each click on the scroll arrows changes the thickness by .01 inches. Scroll down repeatedly for the Hairline or No Outline options.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the ends of open paths. The left and right selectors let you choose different arrowheads for both ends of the path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Opens a box with a selection of arrowheads you can apply to the ends of open paths. The left and right selectors let you choose different arrowheads for both ends of the path.

Use the scroll bars to see other arrowheads in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a selection of dashed and dotted line styles.

Use the scroll bars to see other styles in the list. Click the one you want. To close the box without making a selection, press the ESC key.


Displays a palette of outline colors. Use the scroll bars to see other colors in the list. Click the one you want.


Prompts you to choose an existing object, and displays that object's outline attributes in the roll-up. You can then easily apply the same outline to other objects.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box where you can access all of the available Outline Pen controls.


Applies your choices to the selected objects. If no objects are selected, you can define the default outline for new objects.


Swaps the height and width values so that the vertical dimension of the page is greater than the horizontal dimension. This switch is not available with paper styles that have fixed orientations, such as labels and envelopes.


Swaps the height and width values so that the horizontal dimension of the page is greater than the vertical dimension. This switch is not available with paper styles that have fixed orientations, such as labels and envelopes.


The current paper style. Click in this field to get a list of available paper styles. When you select a style, the height and width values will adjust to reflect the paper you are using.

Use the Custom style to manually determine the size of your page. Use the Labels style to create your own labels.


The width of the page. When you modify this value, the paper style is automatically set to Custom.


The height of the page. When you modify this value, the paper style is automatically set to Custom.


Displays the units you are using to measure the page size. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Height and Width values are automatically converted when you change units.


Queries the current printer for the page size and orientation, and displays those dimensions in the Width and Height fields.


Previews the page dimensions and orientation, and shows examples of the page layout you have selected.


Previews the page dimensions and orientation, and shows examples of the page layout you have selected.


Toggles the working page border in the Drawing Window. When you disable this option, the shadowed page outline is no longer displayed in the Drawing Window.

Note that any part of your drawing that falls outside the border will not be printed, so it's a good idea to make sure this option is enabled before printing.


Displays two facing pages at the same time in the Drawing Window.

When this option is enabled, and your document has multiple pages, individual objects can lie across two facing pages. Such objects will not print in the page gutter.

This option is not available for top-fold and tent cards.


Indicates whether you want to begin a document with facing pages on the left or right page. This option is only available when using the Book layout style or the Facing Pages option.


Puts a printable background frame the same size as the page on the screen. The frame will have the default fill and outline, and you can change it the same way as you would any other object.


Opens a flyout that lets you color the Preview screen to approximate the paper you plan to print on.

The color you choose is for viewing and information only; it does not print. If you want a color background that does print, choose Add Page Frame.


Displays the current page layout style. Click in this field to get a list of available styles. When you choose a style from the list, an example of it appears in the preview box above.

Once you've chosen a page layout style, you still need to insert the required number of pages for the particular style. For example, Side-Fold Card prints four pages per sheet, however, when you start a new drawing and choose this style, you still need to insert the three remaining pages.

Note that the layout styles in the Print Options Dialog Box will not work properly unless the Full Page Layout is selected here. Any other combination will have unpredictable results.


Opens the Customize Label dialog box, where you can modify an existing label style, or create your own labels from scratch.


Shows the available label styles, grouped by manufacturer.


Saves the current custom label setting under a name you specify.


Automatically adjusts the margins to evenly space the labels on the page.


Automatically equalizes the space between labels. If possible, auto spacing will keep the labels within the defined margins.


Adjusts the bottom page margin.


Adjusts the number of label columns.


Removes the current label style from the Label Style list.


Automatically sets the right margin to mirror the left, and the bottom margin to mirror the top.


Adjusts the height of each label.


Adjusts the horizontal space between labels.


Sets the Gutter units. When you choose a new unit, the values are automatically recalculated.


Adjusts the left page margin.


Sets the Margin units. When you choose a new unit, the values are automatically recalculated.


Previews the current label settings.


Adjusts the right page margin.


Toggles the label corners from square to rounded.


Adjusts the number of label rows.


Shows the name of the current label style.


Adjusts the top page margin.


Adjusts the vertical space between labels.


Adjusts the width of each label.


Sets the Label Size units. When you choose a new unit, the values are automatically recalculated.


The name of the new custom label style.


Three unique PHOTO-PAINT controls in the Full-Color Bmp Pattern DB


Enable to use the original (default) tile size of the currently selected bitmap pattern.


Enable to scale the tile pattern to fit entirely within the tile Preview window.


Enable to maintain identical tile width and height values. When enabled, any value entered in one number box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Lists the available textures by name. Click a texture, or use the scroll bars to see the entire list.

Note

In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


The current texture. Enable Preview fill to preview the texture, and click Refresh to regenerate the texture after changing the parameters.

Note

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate. In the Drawing Window, PostScript textures are represented by the letters PS instead of the actual pattern.


Toggles the PostScript texture preview.

Note

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate.


Regenerates the texture preview with the current parameters.

Note

Some textures are extremely complicated and require several minutes or more to generate.


Lists parameters for the current texture. Changing one or more of these parameters alters the appearance of the texture. To see the effect of your changes to the texture parameters, enable Preview fill and click the Refresh button.


Saves the current custom label setting under a name you specify.


Removes the current label style from the Label Style list.


Displays controls for choosing texture fills.


Opens the Save Texture As dialog box, where you can add a new texture to one of your libraries, or overwrite an existing texture with the current one.


Deletes the selected texture.


Locks and unlocks the parameter.


Determines the intermediate colors from a counter-clockwise path around the color wheel.


Determines the intermediate colors from a clockwise path around the color wheel.


Displays a linear fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Displays a radial fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Displays a conical fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Displays a square fountain in the roll-up's Preview box.


Opens a flyout from which you can choose colors. Click More to open the Color dialog box.


Previews your custom fountain fill. You can add, remove, or edit color markers by clicking in the marker bar just above the preview ribbon.


Adjusts the midpoint of the color blend.


Shows the color path that determines your intermediate fill colors.


Determines the intermediate fill colors from a straight line beginning at the From color and continuing across the color wheel to the To color.


Removes the current fill or outline color.


Lets you adjust the tiling in the current object.


Opens the Fill Tool flyout.


Opens the Special Fill Roll-Up.


Displays controls for editing fountain fills.


Displays controls for choosing full-color bitmap pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing vector pattern fills.


Displays controls for choosing two-color bitmap pattern fills.


Opens the PostScript Texture dialog box.


Deletes the fill of the current object, leaving it transparent.


Fills the current object with solid black.


Fills the current object with solid white.


Opens the Color Roll-Up.


Opens the Fill Color dialog box.


Opens the Outline Tool flyout.


Applies a hairline (0.25-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a thin (2-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a medium (8-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a medium-thick (16-point) outline to the current object.


Applies a thick (24-point) outline to the current object.


Opens the Pen Roll-Up.


Opens the Outline Pen dialog box.


Opens the Outline Color dialog box.


Applies a solid black outline to the current object.


Applies a solid white outline to the current object.


Removes the outline from the current object.


Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line styles. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


Rounds off the ends of each line segment so that it appears to be dotted.


Determines the corner shape, and, therefore, the nib shape of the outline.


Opens a flyout where you can choose from a variety of line -ending shapes. Press the ESC key to exit without making a selection.


The nodes marked in red stretch the arrowhead in one direction.


The nodes marked in red scale the arrowhead evenly.


The nodes marked in red move the arrowhead without changing its size or shape.


To import a file into PRESENTS

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the drive and folder in the Look in list box.

3.	Choose the type of file to import from the Files of type list box.

4.	Type the name of an existing file in the File Name box.

5.	Choose Full Image from the list box.

6.	Click the Options button.

7.	Enable the New Slides, Current Slide or Background radio button, to select where the imported image will appear.

8.	Click Import.

 Related Topics


To import a cropped bitmap

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the file to import.

3.	Choose Crop from the list box.

4.	Click Import.

The Crop Image dialog box appears.

5.	Resize the bounding box by dragging the handles with the mouse, or enter exact values for the top left corner and the dimensions of the bounding box.

The image size indicator is updated as you resize the image.

6.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To import a resampled bitmap

1.	Click File, Import.

2.	Choose the file to import.

3.	Choose Resample from the list box.

4.	Click Import.

The Resample Image dialog box appears.

5.	Use one of the following methods to resample the image:

Assign specific values for Width or Height.

Indicate percentages for Width or Height.

Change the Horizontal or Vertical resolution.

The aspect ratio is always maintained. The image size indicator is updated as you resize the image.

6.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


Toggles guideline visibility. When Show Guidelines is disabled, guidelines will not appear on the screen.


Toggles the guideline snap on and off. When Snap To Guidelines is enabled, objects dragged close to a guideline will fall into alignment with it.


Removes all existing horizontal, vertical, and slanted guidelines.


Click here to display an overview of this dialog box.

For Help on an item, click the question mark at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_ADD	(0x5400003A)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_DELETE	(0x5400003B)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_DELETE_ALL	(0x5400003C)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_HORZ	(0x5400003D)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_MOVE	(0x5400003E)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_POS	(0x5400003F)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_SHOW_GUIDELINES	(0x54000040)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_SNAP_GUIDELINES	(0x54000041)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_UNITS	(0x54000042)


IDH_GUIDELINES_SETUP_GUIDE_VERT	(0x54000043)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_ABORTPROCESS	(0x5400001A)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_HIGHERPRIORITY	(0x5400001B)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_LOWERPRIORITY	(0x5400001C)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_SUSPENDPROCESS	(0x5400001D)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_THREADHELP	(0x5400001E)


IDH_CDRUI_THREADLIST_CDRUI_THREADTITLE	(0x5400001F)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_LEFTMOVEDOWN	(0x54000064)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_LEFTMOVEUP	(0x54000065)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_RIGHTMOVEDOWN	(0x5400006E)


IDH_ROLLUPPAGE_RIGHTMOVEUP	(0x5400006F)


IDH_CDRUI_TOOLPAGE_CDRUI_TB_NOITEMS


IDH_SETUP_GRID_CDRUI_SNAPTOFRAMES


IDH_SETUP_GRID_CDRUI_SNAPTOMARGINS


IDH_SETUP_GRID_SHOWMARGINS2


IDH_SETUP_GRID_SNAPTOFRAMES2


The units in which the current value is expressed.


The minimum increment. This is the amount by which the value will increase or decrease when you click one of the spin box arrows.


The units in which the increment value is expressed.


The highest value you can use.


The units in which the maximum value is expressed.


The lowest value you can use.


The units in which the minimum value is expressed.


Displays the roll-ups and roll-up groups that arrange to the left side of the screen.


Displays the roll-ups and roll-up groups that arrange to the right side of the screen.


Moves the current roll-up or roll-up group from the right list to the left list.


Moves the current roll-up or roll-up group from the left list to the right list.


Adds a new, empty roll-up group to the left list.


Adds a new, empty roll-up group to the right list.


The roll-up configuration that will appear on start up.


Resets the roll-up arrangements to their original configuration.


Removes the current roll-up group from the left list.


Moves the current group down.


Moves the current group up.


Removes the current roll-up group from the right list.


Moves the current group down.


Moves the current group up.


Opens the Customize dialog box, where you can change the configuration of your toolbar buttons.


Deletes a custom toolbar, or resets a built-in toolbar.


Displays the available toolbars. Enable the checkbox next to a toolbar to activate it. Click the toolbar's name tag to rename it.


Creates a new toolbar. Click Customize to add buttons to the new toolbar.


Enables large toolbar buttons.


Enables medium toolbar buttons.


Enables small toolbar buttons.


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Gives a short description of  the selected command.


Resets the keyboard assignments to their original configuration.


Shows the new keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.


Shows the new keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.


Displays any commands assigned to the keyboard combination you typed. You cannot have the same combination for more than one command.


Displays any commands assigned to the keyboard combination you typed. You cannot have the same combination for more than one command.


Automatically resolves conflicts by erasing the old keyboard assignment, and prompting you to assign a new combination to the old command.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


Assigns the new keyboard combination to the current command.


Deletes the selected shortcut keys.


Loads a new keyboard assignment table.


Saves the current keyboard assignment table.


Gives a short description of  the selected command


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Adds the selected command to the menu.


Removes the selected command from the menu.


Adds a separating line to a menu below the current selection.


Adds a new menu.


Moves the current menu or menu entry up.


Moves the current menu or menu entry down.


Displays the current menu structure. Double-click a menu or sub-menu to open it.


Resets the menu assignments to their original configuration.


Gives a short description of  the selected command


Gives a short description of any toolbar button you click.


Displays the available command categories. Click a category to display its command buttons.


Displays the command buttons for the current command category. Click a button to see its description, or drag it to add it to any toolbar on the screen.


A command button. Click it to see its description, or drag it to add it to any toolbar on the screen.


Resets the toolbar assignments to their original configuration.


You can also open the color palette menu by right-clicking the palette border.


These controls let you change the appearance of the on-screen color palette.


The colors in the current palette. Right-click the palette border to open the Color Palette menu.


Shows and hides the color swatch borders.


Toggles between large and small color swatches.


Shows and hides the No Color swatch.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the color palette is docked.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the color palette is docked.


Specifies the number of rows of colors to be displayed while the color palette is docked.


These controls let you change the effect of right-clicking the color palette.


Changes the effect of right-clicking a color swatch on the palette.


Changes the effect of right-clicking a color swatch on the palette.


Determines the number of horizontal grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the number of horizontal grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the number of vertical grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the number of vertical grid lines per unit of measure.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit of measure apart, enter fractional values from the keyboard. For example, to space the grid lines two inches apart, enter 0.5. The maximum number of grid lines is 200 per inch, 33.3 per pica, 1.01 per point, 7.87 per millimeter, 1.01 per didot, and 35.52 per cicero.


Determines the horizontal position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


Determines the horizontal position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


You can choose another unit of measure for the horizontal ruler from the units box. When you change units, you must specify the Grid Frequency you want to use with that unit.


Determines the vertical position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


Determines the vertical position of the zero point for the rulers relative to the lower left corner of the working page. Useful as a reference point when sizing and placing objects. You can also use the ruler crosshairs to set the Grid Origin.


You can choose another unit of measure for the vertical ruler from the units box. When you change units, you must specify the Grid Frequency you want to use with that unit.


Displays markers showing where the grid lines are.

The frequency of the grid marks is determined by the current view. When you use the Zoom tool to magnify the view, the frequency of the grid marks increases.


Forces objects drawn or moved close to a grid line into alignment with the grid. You can also toggle Snap To Grid using the Snap To Grid command in the Layout menu.


Opens the Drawing Scale dialog box where you can set a scale to your drawing other than one to one.


Represents the distance in your drawing that is equivalent to the World Distance value.


Displays the current Page Distance units. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The Page Distance value is automatically converted when you change units.


Displays the current World Distance units. Click in this field to display a list of available units. The World Distance value is automatically converted when you change units.


Selects one of several pre-defined drawing scales. The Page Distance and World Distance values are updated to reflect your choice.


Represents the real distance, in inches, that is equivalent to the Page Distance in your drawing.


Creates a slanted guideline at the position and angle you have specified.


The guideline definition method. You can define a slanted guideline using two points, or a single point and an angle. A guideline defined by the points (1,1) and (5,5) would follow the same path as a guideline starting at (1,1) with a 45-degree angle.


The guideline definition method. You can define a slanted guideline using two points, or a single point and an angle. A guideline defined by the points (1,1) and (5,5) would follow the same path as a guideline starting at (1,1) with a 45-degree angle.


The horizontal position of the guideline's origin point.


The horizontal position of the guideline's origin point.


The horizontal position of the guideline's first origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's first origin point.


The guideline's angle, or the horizontal position of the second origin point.


The guideline's angle, or the horizontal position of the second origin point.


The guideline's angle.


The horizontal position of the guideline's second origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's second origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's second origin point.


The vertical position of the guideline's second origin point.


The current guideline definition.


Displays the current guideline units. Click to display a list of available units. The guideline position value is automatically converted when you change units.

Changing the guideline units has no effect on the Ruler units. To change the ruler display units, use the Grid & Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu.


Displays a list of existing slanted guidelines. Click a guideline to edit it.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all existing horizontal, vertical, and slanted guidelines.


Moves the current guideline to the position and angle you have specified.


Creates a vertical guideline at the position you have specified.


The guideline position. Click Add to make a new guideline at this point, or Move to change the selected guideline's position.


Displays the current guideline units. Click to display a list of available units. The guideline position value is automatically converted when you change units.

Changing the guideline units has no effect on the Ruler units. To change the ruler display units, use the Grid & Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu.


Displays a list of existing vertical guidelines. Click a guideline to edit it.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all existing vertical guidelines.


Moves the current guideline to the position you have specified.


Creates a horizontal guideline at the position you have specified.


The guideline position. Click Add to make a new guideline at this point, or Move to change the selected guideline's position.


Displays the current guideline units. Click to display a list of available units. The guideline position value is automatically converted when you change units.

Changing the guideline units has no effect on the Ruler units. To change the ruler display units, use the Grid & Ruler Setup command in the Layout menu.


Displays a list of existing horizontal guidelines. Click a guideline to edit it.


Removes the selected guideline.


Removes all existing horizontal guidelines.


Moves the current guideline to the position you have specified.


Changes the current value.


Displays the roll-ups in this group. Click a roll-up to activate it, or drag it to another part of the screen to split it from the group.


To round the corners of a rectangle or square

1.	Select the rectangle or square with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag one of the corner nodes along the outline of the rectangle or square.

As you drag, the four corner nodes each divide into two nodes with a round corner forming in between. As you continue to drag, the corners become increasingly round.

3.	Release the mouse button when the rectangle/square is shaped the way you want.

Note

The amount of rounding (the corner radius) is displayed on the Status Line.

 Related Topics


To convert an ellipse or circle into an arc or pie wedge

1.	Select the ellipse or circle with the Shape tool.

2.	Drag the node at the top or bottom of the ellipse or circle around the outside to create an arc, or around the inside to create a pie wedge.

As you drag, the node divides into two nodes with the arc or pie wedge forming in between.

3.	Continue dragging until the arc or pie wedge is the shape and size you want.

Note

 The Status Line shows the position of the two nodes and the distance (the total angle) between them in degrees.

If you are creating the arc or pie wedge from an ellipse, the word "distorted" appears after the total angle. This means, for example, that a 45-degree angle will be an eighth of the way around the ellipse rather than actually being at 45 degrees.

Holding down the CTRL key as you drag the arc or pie wedge constrains the movement to 15-degree increments.

 Related Topics


To mirror edit objects created with the Polygon tool

1.	Select the object created with the Polygon tool using the Shape tool.

2.	Mirror edit the object using the features of the Shape tool and Node Edit Roll-Up.

Note

You cannot mirror edit an object if it has been converted to curves.

 Related Topics


To convert an object to a curve object

1.	Select the object.

2.	Click Arrange, Convert To Curves.

Note

The object looks the same, but it is now a curve object that you can reshape by manipulating its nodes and control points with the Shape tool.

 Related Topics


To select the first or end node in a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Press HOME to select the first node and END to select the end node.

Note

On a closed curve, the first and last nodes are the same.

In an object with subpaths, HOME selects the first node of the first object and END selects the last node of the last object.

 Related Topics


To select a single node or segment on a curve object

Click the node or segment with the Shape tool.

Note

 Selected nodes becomes highlighted in one of two ways: hollow if the associated segment is a line; solid if it's a curve.

If the node is on a curve, control points extending from the selected node and those on either side of it appear.

The Status Line shows the type of node (smooth, cusped or symmetrical) and segment (line or curve).

If you click the segment, a dot appears.

Once you select a node or segment, you can change its characteristics by applying commands from the Node Edit Roll-Up. You can also move a selected node and its associated control points.

 Related Topics


To select multiple nodes

 Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to select.

Note

You can also drag a marquee box around the nodes to select them.

 Related Topics


To deselect one or more nodes

Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to deselect.

Note

You can also hold down SHIFT and drag a marquee box around the nodes you want to deselect. This method also selects any nodes inside the marquee box that are not selected.

To deselect all of the nodes, click any white space away from the outline of the curve.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its segments

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag the segment.

Note

You cannot move line segments in this fashion.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click and drag a node.

Note

As you drag, the segments on either side of the node move. If the node is on a curved segment, the control points also move so that the angles at which the curve enters and leaves the node remain unchanged.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving several nodes at once

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click the nodes you want to select.

3.	Enable Elastic Mode (optional).

4.	Click and drag any of the selected nodes.

Note

Elastic Mode changes the way several nodes move when dragged with the mouse. If left unchecked, all nodes move by the same amount. When checked, nodes move in proportion to their distance from the base node (i.e., the node you are dragging). The end result is that the curve appears to behave like an elastic, expanding and contracting in response to the movement of the mouse.

 Related Topics


To shape a curve object by moving its control points

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to manipulate.

3.	Click and drag the control points.

Note

Control points only extend from the selected node and those on either side of it if the node is on a curved segment.

 The control points move differently depending on whether the node they are associated with is smooth, cusped or symmetrical. This, in turn, affects the shape of the curve.

 Related Topics


To constrain the movement of a node or control point

Pressing CTRL while dragging forces the node or control point to move horizontally or vertically from its starting point.

 Related Topics


To add a single node to a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the spot along the curve where you want the node added.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Add Node button.

Note

If you clicked a node, the new node appears midway along the adjacent segment.

Adding more nodes to a curve  is useful when you are shaping a curve object, especially if the existing segments, and control points are not giving you the results you want.

 Related Topics


To add several nodes at once to a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes between which you want further nodes added.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Add Node button.

 Related Topics


To delete a node or segment from a curve object

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to delete.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Remove Node button.

Note

The position of the deleted node determines the change in the curve's shape.

Tips

Deleting closely bunched nodes and segments helps to simplify complex curve objects. You can also delete them to smooth unwanted bumps along a curve.

You can delete several nodes at once by selecting multiple nodes.

 Related Topics


To delete all extraneous nodes
To simplify a curve object using Auto-reduce

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select all the nodes in the portion of the object that you want to simplify.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Auto-reduce button.

Note

The Auto-reduce setting on the Node Edit tools property sheet controls the extent to which the curve's shape changes when nodes are removed.

 Related Topics


To break a path

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the spot where you want to break the path.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Break Path button.

Note

When you break a path, any subpaths and nodes that are created remain a part of the original curved object.

Two superimposed nodes appear at each break.

To break the path at several nodes at once, select all of the nodes.

 Related Topics


To change a segment to a curve or line
To change curve or a segment to a line

1.	Click the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the segment you want to change.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the To Line button or the To Curve button.

Note

If you chose To Line, the curve segment redraws as a straight line.

If you chose To Curve, the line segment appears unchanged. However, if you select a node at either end of the segment, control points appear, indicating that it is now a curve.

You can also change a segment to a curve or line by selecting a node on the end of the segment.

To change several segments at once, select them or their associated nodes.

 Related Topics


To determine whether you need to add or delete nodes

A curve requires more nodes if you cannot shape it the way you want by moving the existing nodes. You need to delete nodes to remove unwanted dips or bumps associated with them.

There are three rules of thumb for determining whether you need to add or delete nodes on a curve.

For curves moving in one direction, you need a node every 120 degrees.
For curves changing direction smoothly, you need a node for at least every two points at which the curve changes direction.
For curves changing direction at a cusp (pointed corner) you need a node at every cusp.
 Related Topics


To join two nodes

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Select the nodes you want to join.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Click the Join button.

Note

You cannot join nodes of two separate objects. You must first combine the objects with the Combine command in the Arrange menu.

If you join nodes that are not in the same place, the new node is placed in the middle.

 Related Topics


To make a node smooth, cusped or symmetrical

1.	Select the curve object with the Shape tool.

2.	Click the node you want to change.

3.	Double-click a node or segment to open the Node Edit Roll-Up.

4.	Choose Smooth, Cusp or Symmetrical.

Note

Unless the curve passed through the node on a fairly sharp angle, changing the node's type will not noticeably affect its shape. It will, however, affect the way in which you can reshape the curve by adjusting the node's control points.

Tip

You can change several nodes at once, select them by dragging a marquee box around them or by holding down SHIFT and clicking them.

 Related Topics


To move a control point hidden under a node

1.	Deselect all nodes on the curve object.

2.	Hold down SHIFT and click and drag the control point out from under the node.

 Related Topics


The Add Node button allows you to add nodes to a path.


The Remove Node button allows you to remove nodes from path.


The Auto-reduce button allows you to automatically reduce the number of nodes on a path.


The Align button allows you to align selected nodes.


The Break button allows you break a path. Two unconnected nodes will appear at the break.


The To Line button allows you to convert curve segments to line segments.


The To Curve button allows you to convert line segments to curve segments.


The Join button allows you to connect two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


The Stretch button allows you to stretch and size selected nodes.


The Rotate button allows you to rotate and skew selected nodes.


The Extend button allows you to draw a line between two unconnected nodes. Each node must be at the end of a path.


The Shape tool allows you to manipulate nodes and paths.


The PowerLine Auto-reduce button allows you to reduce the number of PowerLine nodes in a PowerLine.


The Add PowerLine Node button allows you to add a pair of PowerLine nodes to a PowerLine.


The Remove PowerLine Node button allows you to remove a PowerLine node from a PowerLine.


The PowerLine To Curve button allows you to change a straight PowerLine segment to a curved PowerLine segment.


 The PowerLine To Line button allows you to change a curved PowerLine segment to a straight PowerLine segment.


 The PowerLine Convex button allows you to make a PowerLine segment Convex.


 The PowerLine Concave button allows you to make a PowerLine segment Concave.


 The knife tool allows you to break paths.


 The Eraser tool allows you to erase portions of objects.


 The Node Edit flyout can be opened by clicking on any of the three tool buttons it contains. One of these is visible in the Toolbox.


The Smooth Node button allows to make a node smaooth. A smooth node is a bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, but allows you to vary the length of the control points independantly. Use when you want a smooth transition between line segments.


The Cusp Node button allows you to make a node cusped. A cusped node is a bezier node that allows you to edit the line segments on either side of the node independantly. Use when you want to add a sharp bend to a curve.


The Symmetrical Node button allows you to make a node symmetrical. A symmetrical node is a bezier node that constrains the angle between the two control points to 180 degrees, and keeps both control points equal lengths. Use when you want the same curvature on both sides of the node.


The Separate button allows you to separate a subpath from an object to create a separate path.


Customize command

Opens the Customize dialog box, where you can customize your toolbars, menus, status bar information, keyboard shortcuts, and other properties of the Corel user interface.


To launch other installed Corel applications

1.	Click Application Launcher.

2.	Click the application you want to run.


Customizing keyboard assignments

Accelerator keys give you quick access to commands that you use frequently.

You can change built-in keyboard assignments, or assign an accelerator key combination to any command. You can create several sets of keyboard assignments to use for different types of operations, saving and loading sets as they are needed.

 Related Topics


To assign an accelerator key to a command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize.

4.	Click the command.

5.	Click the Press new shortcut key box.

6.	Press the keyboard combination that you want to assign to the command. If you need to make a correction, press the Backspace key.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL+ALT+1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1,2,3, and 4 keys in succession.

Tip

To automatically resolve accelerator conflicts, enable the Go to conflict on assign option.

 Related Topics


To remove an accelerator key from a command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to customize.

4.	Click the command.

5.	In the Current shortcut keys box, select the key combination you want to remove.

6.	Click Delete.

 Related Topics


To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Reset All.

 Related Topics


To save a set of customized keyboard assignments

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Save As.

4.	Choose the Accelerator File in which you want to save your assignments.

Tip

To change the default settings, save your custom accelerator set over the file DEFAULT.ACL.

 Related Topics


To load a set of customized keyboard assignments

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Keyboard.

3.	Click Load.

4.	Choose the Accelerator File you want to load.

 Related Topics


Customizing menus

Your Corel menus are completely customizable. You can add commands to existing menus, or you can add new menus to the menu bar. You can change the order of the menus and their commands to give you quick, easy access to the functions you use most.

Note

When you customize your menus, keep in mind that the help topics referring to those menus do not change.

 Related Topics


To change the order of menus and menu commands

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to move. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click Move Up or Move Down.

 Related Topics


To add a command to a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Commands box, double-click the command category folder containing the command you want to add.

4.	Click the command.

5.	In the Menu box, click the menu or sub-menu where you want to add the command.

6.	Click Add.

Tip

Use the Separator button to add organizational lines to your menus.

 Related Topics


To remove a menu or menu command

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to remove. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click Remove.

 Related Topics


To rename a menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to rename. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click the command's name tag, and type the new name.

 Related Topics


To change a menu command's accelerator key

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	In the Menu box, click the menu or menu command you want to rename. Double-click to open a menu or sub-menu.

4.	Click the command's name tag, and insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as an accelerator.

5.	Remove all unnecessary ampersands.

 Related Topics


To add a new menu

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	Click Add Menu.

4.	Type a name for the new menu.

Tip

You can add a sub-menu to an existing menu by first double-clicking the existing menu.

 Related Topics


To restore the original menu settings

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Menu.

3.	Click Reset All.

Note

You will lose all changes to the menu settings.

 Related Topics


Customizing the on-screen color palette

Using the on-screen color palette is the easiest way to change colors in your objects. You can move the palette anywhere on the screen and edit the color order to make it easy to find your favorite colors.

 Related Topics


To move the on-screen palette

1.	Click the border of the palette.

2.	Drag the palette to its new position.

Tip

To dock the palette, drag it towards the edge of the window until it changes shape.

 Related Topics


To resize the on-screen palette while it's floating

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the edge of the palette.

2.	Drag the edge until the palette is the size you want.

 Related Topics


To resize the on-screen palette while it's docked

1.	Click Tools, Customize.

2.	Click Color Palette.

3.	Type a new value in the Display rows while docked box.

Note

The palette will display up to seven rows of colors.

 Related Topics


To move a color swatch on the on-screen palette

1.	Click the color you want to move.

2.	Drag the color swatch to its new position.

Note

You cannot move the No Color swatch.

 Related Topics


To remove a color swatch from the on-screen palette

1.	Click the color you want to remove.

2.	Right-click the palette border to bring up the palette menu.

3.	Click Delete Color.

 Related Topics


To edit a color swatch on the on-screen palette

1.	Click the color you want to edit.

2.	Right-click the palette border to bring up the palette menu.

3.	Click Edit Color.

4.	Choose the new swatch color (See Related Topics).

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars

Except for the toolbox and its flyouts, you have complete control over the commands on your toolbars. With simple mouse actions, you can dock, undock, resize, and move your toolbars anywhere on the screen.

You can also add and remove buttons to the built-in toolbars, or create your own toolbars containing only the commands you use most often.

Note

When you customize your toolbars, keep in mind that the help topics referring to those toolbars do not change.

 Related Topics


Customizing toolbars

You have complete control over your toolbars. With simple mouse actions, you can dock, undock, resize, and move your toolbars anywhere on the screen.

The Toolbars dialog box to controls which toolbars are displayed on the screen at any given moment.

 Related Topics


To move a toolbar

1.	Click the border of the toolbar.

2.	Drag it to its new location. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

Double-click a toolbar's title or border to dock and undock it.

 Related Topics


To resize a toolbar

1.	Move the cursor to the edge of a floating toolbar.

2.	Drag the edge until the toolbar is the correct size. Right-click to cancel the movement.

 Related Topics


To display an existing toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the check box next to the toolbar that you want to activate.

 Related Topics


To create a custom toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click New.

3.	Type a name for the new toolbar.

4.	Use the Customize command to add commands buttons to the new toolbar (See Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To add a button to a toolbar

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit (See Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Click Customize.

4.	In the Commands box, click the command category folder containing the command you want to add.

5.	Drag the appropriate command button to the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

Click a button to see its description.

You can also hold down the CTRL and ALT keys and drag a button to copy it to another toolbar without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To remove a button from a toolbar

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit (See Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Click Customize.

4.	Drag the button off the toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

You can also hold down the ALT key and drag a button off a toolbar to delete it without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To rename a toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the toolbar you want to rename.

3.	Click the toolbar's name tag.

4.	Type the new name.

 Related Topics


To move a toolbar button

1.	Activate the toolbar you want to edit (See Related Topics).

2.	Click View, Toolbars.

3.	Click Customize.

4.	Drag the button to another toolbar, or to another spot on the same toolbar. Right-click to cancel the movement.

Tip

To add space between two toolbar buttons, drag the right-most button slightly further to the right.

You can also hold down the ALT key and drag a button to move it without opening the dialog box.

 Related Topics


To delete a custom toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the custom toolbar you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Note

You cannot delete a built-in toolbar.

 Related Topics


To restore the original configuration of a built-in toolbar

1.	Click View, Toolbars.

2.	Click the built-in toolbar you want to reset.

3.	Click Reset.

 Related Topics


Navigating your document

The Navigator gives you a quick and easy way to move around in your documents. You can move to any  page in your document with a single mouse click, or quickly add blank pages without interrupting your work.

 Related Topics


To add a page to the beginning of your document using the Navigator

1.	Move to the first page of the document.

2.	In the Navigator, click Add Beginning Page.

 Related Topics


To add a page to the end of your document using the Navigator

1.	Move to the last page of the document.

2.	In the Navigator, click Add Ending Page.

 Related Topics


To go to an existing page of your document using the Navigator

1.	Scroll through the Navigator until you can see the page you want.

2.	Click the Page icon that corresponds to the page you want.

 Related Topics


To go to the first page of your document using the Navigator

In the Navigator, click First Page.

 Related Topics


To go to the last page of your document using the Navigator

In the Navigator, click Last Page.

 Related Topics


To resize the Navigator

1.	Move the mouse pointer to the right border of the Navigator.

2.	Drag the border until the Navigator is the size you want.

 Related Topics


Customizing the status bar

The status bar gives you constant, up-to-date information about your document. You can control the information it gives you so that you always know what you need to know about your work.

 Related Topics


To move the status bar

1.	Right-click the status bar.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, click Place at Top or Place at Bottom.

 Related Topics


To change the number of status bar display regions

1.	Right-click the status bar.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, click Number of Regions.

3.	Click the number of regions you want displayed.

Tip

You can have up to six regions displaying different information on a small status bar. When you use a large status bar, you have space for double that amount (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To change what the status bar displays

1.	Right-click the area of the status bar you want to change.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, click Show.

3.	Click the type of information you want to display.

Tip

To clear the current region, click None.

 Related Topics


To resize the status bar

1.	Right-click the status bar.

2.	In the Status Bar menu, Click Large Status Bar or Small Status Bar.

 Related Topics


Working with grids and rulers

Among its many powerful drawing aids, CorelDRAW allows you to display rulers at the edges of the Drawing window that help determine the size and position of objects in your drawing. CorelDRAW also provides an adjustable grid that lets you align these objects. Using these tools, you can give your drawing the precise look you want.

The Grid and Ruler Setup dialog box provides controls that let you set the grid and ruler parameters, including scale, units, and frequency. You can use rulers or a grid to help you align objects in your drawing.

 Related Topics


Drawing Scale dialog box

Use the Drawing Scale dialog box to set the scale for your drawing. For example, if you are drawing floor plans for your office, this feature allows you to specify how many units on your page (the Page Distance) are equivalent to a given number of units on the floor (the World Distance).

Note

The units you specify in Page Distance are the units used by the Contour Roll-Up and Transform Roll-Up. These units are also the ones used for the rulers. However, if the Drawing Scale is set to its default values (where 1 inch of Page Distance equals 1 inch of World Distance), the rulers use the units specified for Grid Frequency.

 Related Topics


To set ruler parameters

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	In the Horizontal and Vertical Unit boxes, specify the unit of measurement you want displayed on the ruler.

4.	Set the 0,0 point in the Horizontal and Vertical Original number boxes.

The 0,0 points determine the cursor and object position information you see in the Status Line. The coordinate values you specify in some dialog boxes are also based on the position of the 0,0 points.

5.	Click OK.

Tip

You can drag the cross hairs onto the drawing window to set the Horizontal and Vertical origins.

 Related Topics


To change the units of measurement on the rulers

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Ruler tab.

3.	In the Horizontal Units box, choose the unit of measurement you want the horizontal ruler to use.

4.	In the Vertical Units box, choose the unit of measurement you want the vertical ruler to use.

5.	Click OK.

 Related Topics


To reposition the rulers

1.	Hold down the SHIFT key and click the ruler you want to move.

2.	Drag it to a new position.

Tip

To return a ruler to its previous position, hold down the SHIFT key and double-click it.

To move both rulers at once, hold down the SHIFT key and drag the intersection point of the two rulers.

 Related Topics


To display or hide the grid

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Enable or disable the Show Grid check box.

 Related Topics


To set grid parameters

1.	Click Layout, Grid & Ruler Setup.

2.	Click the Grid tab.

3.	Under Grid Frequency, specify the number of Horizontal and Vertical grid lines you want per unit of measure.

The unit of measure corresponds to the unit set for the rulers.

4.	Enable the Show Grid check box to display the grid in the drawing window. Enable the Snap to Grid check box to have objects snap to the grid.

Notes

When you change the ruler units, you must also specify a new grid frequency. Changing the grid frequency unit also changes the corresponding ruler unit. If the drawing scale setting is not 1:1, the Grid Frequency units appear grayed out and correspond to the drawing scale units.

To space the grid lines more than one whole unit apart, type a fractional value in the Grid Frequency field. If the unit of measure is set to inches, for example, you can specify 0.5 to space the grid lines two inches apart.

The Horizontal and Vertical field units are accurate up to two decimal places.

 Related Topics


Working with guidelines

Guidelines provide a useful and easy way to align objects. Guidelines are non-printing lines that you can place anywhere in the drawing window. You can create any number of guidelines and have CorelDRAW save them along with your drawing.

The Guidelines Setup dialog box provides controls that let you set up horizontal, vertical, and slanted guidelines.

 Related Topics


To move a horizontal or vertical guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Horizontal or Vertical tab.

3.	Choose the guideline you want from the list of guidelines. The guidelines are listed by location.

4.	Specify the location you want relative to the 0 point on the guideline's ruler.

5.	Change the unit of measure as required.

6.	Click Move.

Tip

You can also move a guideline by dragging it. However, If you drag a horizontal or vertical guideline by the handles at the edge of the drawing window, it will convert to a slanted guideline, and cannot be converted back (see Related Topics).

 Related Topics


To move a slanted guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Slanted tab.

3.	Choose the guideline you want from the list of guidelines. The guidelines are listed by the coordinates of their endpoints.

4.	Choose a two-point guideline or one that has an angle and one point.

5.	Change the unit of measure as required.

6.	Type the guideline's new endpoint coordinates in the four boxes provided; X1, Y1, X2, and Y2.

7.	Click Move.

Tip

You can also move a guideline by dragging the handles where it meets the edge of the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To set up a horizontal guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Horizontal tab.

3.	Type the units and the location relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

Tip

You can also set up a horizontal guideline by pointing to the horizontal ruler and dragging into the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To set up a slanted guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Slanted tab.

3.	Type the units and endpoint coordinates (X1, Y1, X2, and Y2) relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

Tip

You can also set up a slanted guideline by creating a horizontal or vertical guideline, then dragging one of the handles until the guideline reaches the desired angle.

 Related Topics


To set up a vertical guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the Vertical tab.

3.	Type the units and the location relative to the 0,0 point on the rulers.

4.	Click Add.

Tip

You can also set up a vertical guideline by pointing to the vertical ruler and dragging into the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To delete a guideline

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click the tab that corresponds to the type of guideline you want to delete.

3.	Choose the guideline you want to delete.

3.	Click Delete.

Tip

You can also delete a horizontal or vertical guideline by dragging it off the drawing window.

 Related Topics


To position slanted guidelines using the rulers

1.	If you don't see the horizontal and vertical rulers, click View and enable Rulers.

2.	Point to the horizontal or vertical ruler.

3.	Click and drag the guideline onto the drawing window.

4.	Click and drag one of the guideline handles until it is at the desired angle.

Note

Once you have converted a horizontal or vertical guideline to a slanted guideline, you cannot convert it back.

 Related Topics


To position slanted guidelines using the Guidelines Setup box

1.	Click Layout, Guidelines Setup.

2.	Click Slanted Guideline.

3.	Type the guideline angle relative to the 0,0 points on the ruler.

4.	Click Add.

 Related Topics


(On the left or right side of the Navigator.) Adds a page to your document.


(In the bottom, left-hand corner of the window.) Helps you move through your document quickly.


(In the upper, right-hand corner of a roll-up.) Minimizes and maximizes the roll-up.


(On the right side of the Navigator.) Displays the last page of your document.


(On the left side of the Navigator.) Displays the first page of your document.


Jumps to the specified page of your document.


Launches installed Corel applications.


Removes the current fill or outline color.


Dublin: This rtf is new in ver. 6. Source doc IPRP012.DOC from InfoSoft, the vendor

Formatting and editing for Corel: Gordon Brown


International Proofreader overview

The proofreading system, International Proofreader, provided with your Corel program is a powerful proofreading system that addresses complex writing errors and style issues.

The International Proofreader's three checking modes [image] Spelling, Quick Proofreading, and Full Proofreading [image] serve users with varying needs. For example, you might do a quick check for spelling errors only, a check for spelling and mechanical errors, or a detailed check for stylistic problems, depending on the context and time constraints of your project.

The International Proofreader's functionality is as uniform as linguistically possible across all supported languages. It follows the conventions prescribed by accepted grammar and style manuals for each language, and it handles language variants appropriately.

The checking and correction functionality of the International Proofreader is divided into three checking modes:

Spelling mode

Quick Proof mode

Full Proof mode

 Related Topics


Spelling mode overview

The International Proofreader's Spelling mode detects and corrects numerous types of spelling errors, including those related to language-specific phenomena such as compound words in the Germanic languages. Spelling mode corrects errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

A/An use (English)

Capitalization

Spelling (abbreviation errors, apostrophe errors, cognitive misspellings, and typographic errors)

Capitalization

Clitics (Romance languages)

Compounding (English and the other Germanic languages)

Doubled words

Hyphenation (including soft-hyphen errors and hyphenation-dependent spelling errors)

 Related Topics


Quick Proof mode overview

Quick Proof mode provides all the functionality of Spelling mode, in addition to correcting errors involving the following categories of writing elements:

Confused words

Double negatives

Format

Homonyms

Inappropriate prepositions

Misspelled expressions

Misspelled foreign expressions

Noun-phrase agreement (Romance languages)

Punctuation

Spacing between words and sentences

Ungrammatical expressions

Uppercase/lowercase spellings of words, depending on their function or context (German)

 Related Topics


Full Proof mode overview

Full Proof mode provides the functionality of Spelling mode and Quick Proofreading mode, identifies many categories of stylistically questionable expressions, and offers assistance in eliminating them. The words and expressions flagged in Full Proofreading mode are not grammatically incorrect, but style and grammar guides suggest that they be avoided in most contexts or used only for intentional effect. The error messages displayed in Full Proofreading mode are designed to provide you with the stylistic guidelines you need to make a subjective decision about including or omitting such words and expressions. The flagged categories include the following:

Archaic expressions

Clichés

Contractions

Gender-specific expressions

Informal expressions

Jargon expressions

Overused phrases

Pretentious words

Redundant expressions

Sexist expressions

Stock phrases

Unnecessary prepositions

Vague quantifiers

Wordy expressions

 Related Topics


Rule Manager overview

As International Proofreader processes text, it distinguishes between sentence text and non-sentence text and uses appropriate rules to check each type. With the Rule Manager, you can customize your proofreading environments by turning off rule types.

The Rule Manager gives you the ability to turn off rule types and to use different combinations of rule types when writing for different readers. It keeps track of which rule types you have turned off, and of whether you want to do this for the current writing session and/or for future writing sessions. If you turn off rule types for future sessions, the Rule Manager maintains a list of these in a user profile and reloads it when the next writing session starts. If you turn off a rule type for the current session only, the Rule Manager discards the information at the end of that session.

The Rule Manager displays a description of each Rule Type when highlighted in the Rule Manager dialog box or when an error is found during proofreading.

 Related Topics


A/An use (English Spelling mode)
A/An use (English) (Spelling mode)

an European country	a European country
 Related Topics


Capitalization errors (Spelling mode)

In addition to flagging all capitalization errors flagged during a spelling check (including errors in proper nouns), the International Proofreader flags errors in the following categories:

Compass points

English	in the South of France	in the south of France
	in the north	in the North
First word in a sentence

Because the International Proofreader processes text sentence by sentence, it recognizes the first word in each sentence and flags it if it is not capitalized.

Language-specific capitalization

English	Summer	summer
French	Mardi	mardi
	Janvier	janvier
German	Montags	montags
Word groups

English	mount Everest	Mount Everest
	New Year’s day	New Year’s Day
	New York state	New York State
	State of New York	state of New York
Portuguese	dia das mões	Dia das mões
 Related Topics


The following text was removed from the next topic--CorrectSpell is not part of the package.

International Proof Reader incorporates International CorrectSpell's algorithms, which reflect the cliticizing rules of each language. International Proof Reader uses International CorrectSpell to draw on grammatical information in the language databases and verify that clitics and stems are correctly paired.


Clitic errors (Romance languages--Spelling mode)
Clitic errors (Romance languages) (Spelling mode)

Clitics are articles, pronouns, or prepositions that are attached to other words (called stems when clitics are attached) for grammatical reasons. The use of clitics in the Romance languages supported by the International Proofreader involves language-specific changes in spelling and accents.

In French, for example, certain grammatical constructions require that articles or pronouns called preclitics be attached to the beginnings of words in specific ways, while other constructions require that pronouns or other forms called postclitics be attached to the ends of words. The French words le 'the' and enfant 'child', for example, are combined in the cliticized form l'enfant 'the child', and donnez-le-moi 'give it to me' has two postclitics, -le 'it' and -moi 'me'. In Spanish, equivocarse 'to be mistaken' combines the verb equivocar 'to mistake' with the pronoun se 'oneself'. In Italian, ciascun'amica 'each (girl) friend' combines the adjective ciascuna 'each' with the noun amica '(girl) friend'.

Strict and complex rules govern the combination of stems and clitics in each Romance language. These rules take into consideration the part of speech of the clitic (article, pronoun, or preposition); its position (preceding or following the stem); the phonetic value (vowel or consonant) of the initial or final letter of the stem; and the gender, number, and grammatical role of the stem. Consequently, spelling verification for these languages requires special checking. International Proofreader can do the following:

Verify correct clitics

All of the following are correct and are verified as such by the International Proofreader:

French	envoyez-les-lui [envoyez + les + lui]
	l’ordinateur [le + ordinateur]
Italian	portarglielo [portare + glie + lo]
	senz’alzarsi [senza + alzare + si]
Portuguese	aprendê-lo-ei [aprenderei + o]
Spanish	dámela [da + me + la]
Flag incorrect clitics

In these examples, the stem is correct, but the attached clitic is not. The International Proofreader detects these errors:

French	s’ordinateur (an error for l’ordinateur) is flagged as having an inappropriate preclitic
	veut-t-il (an error for veut-il) is flagged as having an inappropriate postclitic
Flag and correct unmodified stems

In these examples, the stems should have been modified when the clitic was attached:

Italian	senz’alzaresi	senz’alzarsi
Portuguese	dás-lo	dá-lo
Spanish	mostrémosselas	mostrémoselas
	aislémosnos	aislémonos
Flag and correct apostrophe errors

In these examples, an apostrophe should have been inserted or omitted:

French	lenfant	l’enfant
	l’ettre	lettre
Italian	lormai	l’ormai
	l’aureato	laureato
Flag and correct accent errors [image] In these examples, an accent should have been inserted or omitted:

Portuguese	faz-lo	fá-lo
Spanish	aíslemonos	aislémonos
Flag and correct stems with clitics [image] These examples contain errors in the stems:

French	n’appèl	n’appelle
	appellez-vous	appelez-vous
Italian	t’arabiare	t’arrabbiare
Portuguese	escreber-nos	escrever-nos
 Related Topics


Compounding errors (English and the other Germanic languages (Spelling mode))
Compounding errors (English and the other Germanic languages) (Spelling mode)

In English, International Proofreader flags and corrects errors that occur when writers mistakenly hyphenate a word, as in the following example:

blue-prints	blueprints

In the other Germanic languages supported by the International Proofreader (Dutch and German), two or more words can be joined to form a single word, or compound. German Lebensfreude 'joy of living', for example, is a compound of Leben and Freude.

Some compounds are well established and commonly used; however, new compounds that follow language-specific rules are constantly formed. Spelling software for Germanic languages must account for this productive and rule-governed process. The International Proofreader lists the most frequently used compounds in its databases. Less frequently used compounds are verified by confirming that they consist of grammatically valid elements. This processenables the International Proofreader to verify most two-part compound words. Also, because the database stores many common two-part compound words as valid compound components, the International Proofreader can also verify many three-part compounds. The International Proofreader can do the following:

Verify newly formed compounds

Dutch	bondsbureau	financieringsondernemingen
German	Textverarbeitung	Computerrevolution
Verify compounds formed with acronyms

Dutch	KLM-piloten
German	ASCII-Format
Flag and correct misspellings of compounds

Dutch	bondsgenootscha	bondgenootschap
German	Mietkasernen	Mietskasernen
 Related Topics


Doubled-word errors (Spelling mode)

Dutch	flags doubled words other than dat dat, die die, je je, and other personal pronouns
English	flags doubled words other than that that and had had
French	flags doubled words other than vous vous, nous nous, and en en
German	flags doubled words other than der der, die die, das das, and sie sie
Italian	flags doubled words other than via via, passo passo, and sotto sotto
Portuguese	flags doubled words other than se se and agora agora
 Related Topics


Hyphenation errors (Spelling mode)

International Proofreader's hyphenation processing enables it to detect the following types of hyphenation errors:

Soft-hyphen errors

A soft hyphen is a hyphen that is not part of the spelling of a word but is used only to divide the word onto two lines. (A hard hyphen, in contrast, is part of the word's spelling and is therefore always used.) The International Proofreader generates hyphenation points by using pattern-matching technology (rather than retrieving stored hyphenation points from a database) to ensure that soft hyphens divide words correctly into syllables, as in the following example:

Entry	The musician who played the last piano concerto is a child pro-
digy.

Compound	The musician who played the last piano concerto is a child prod-
igy.

Hyphenation-dependent spelling errors (Germanic languages)

The use of a soft hyphen to divide a word onto two lines sometimes results in spelling changes in Dutch and German. For example, when a German compound formed by linking two or more words would contain the same consonant three times in succession, the third consonant is omitted if the letter immediately following it is a vowel and the compound appears on one line. However, when such a compound is divided by an end-of-line hyphen at the point where the compound words are joined, German spelling rules mandate a spelling change: the word is then spelled with all three consonants.

In addition, when words containing certain combinations of letters (such as ck in the German word backen) are divided by soft hyphens, their spelling may change (backen becomes bak-ken).

The International Proofreader detects and corrects errors in these two types of hyphenation-dependent spelling changes as shown below:

Language	Word	Incorrect Soft-Hyphen Spelling	Correct Soft-Hyphen Spelling
Dutch	speculatieïnstelling	speculatie-ïnstelling	speculatie-instelling
	autootje	autoo-tje	auto-tje
German	Schiffahrt	Schif-fahrt	Schiff-fahrt
	Glocken	Gloc-ken	Glok-ken
 Related Topics


Spelling errors

International Proofreader corrects the following types of spelling errors:

Abbreviation errors

English	O.C.R.	OCR
German	us.w.	usw.
Spanish	Sr	Sr.
Portuguese	Ltda	Ltda.
Apostrophe errors

English	wo’nt	won’t
Cognitive misspellings

These occur when the writer does not know the standard spelling of a word. Cognitive misspellings may be phonetic, such as seekwell for sequel in English or étudiet for étudié in French, or they may be morphological (wrong ending attached to a stem). The International Proofreader corrects language-specific, cognitive misspellings such as the following:

English	effishent	efficient
French	émisfere	hémisphère
	achetrice	acheteuse
German	Säson	Saison
	Filosofie	Philosophie
	Kinden	Kindern
Portuguese	cabeleirero	cabeleireiro
	atráz	atrás
Spanish	peremne	perenne
	lagrimógeno	lacrimógeno
Open vs. closed spelling errors

Dutch	dank zij	dankzij
English	anyone of	any one of
French	avoir à faire à	avoir affaire à
German	ab zu sein	abzusein
	abist	ab ist
Portuguese	rosa claro	rosa-claro
	alto relevo	alto-relevo
	pré-concebido	preconcebido
Spanish	al pormenor	al por menor
Typographic errors

These are the most common variety of spelling errors. In typed text, most misspellings result from errors such as transposing characters (hte instead of the), pressing the wrong key, inserting an unnecessary character, or omitting a character. The International Proofreader corrects typographic errors in all supported languages. It handles errors of transposition, substitution, insertion, and omission regardless of their position in a word. The International Proofreader’s correction technology enables it to correct words that contain multiple errors and words that start with the wrong letter or letters. For example

English	hsa	has
	unessecery	unnecessary
	dvantage	advantage
French	prnd	prend
	kivre	ivre
German	bneutzt	benutzt
	rurmstichig	wurmstichig
	geraschvlol	geräuschvoll
Portuguese	mieo	meio
	caresentar	acrescentar
Spanish	msi	mis
	ortogáfico	ortográfico
	auotmático	automático
 Related Topics


Confused words (Quick Proof mode)

English	uninterested	vs.	disinterested
	semimonthly	vs.	bimonthly
Portuguese	compreensivo	vs.	compreensível
	comprimento	vs.	cumprimento
Spanish	apóstrofe	vs.	apóstrofo
	bimensual	vs.	bimestral
 Related Topics


Double negatives (Quick Proof mode)

English	can’t help but	can’t help
French	il n’y a pas personne	il n’y a personne
Spanish	tampoco no	tampoco
 Related Topics


Format errors (Quick Proof mode)

International Proofreader checks for consistent and correct use of formatting conventions in all supported languages. Its rules handle formatting for the following types of material:

Closings and salutations in letters

English	dear mr. Doe:	Dear Mr. Doe:
	sincerely yours,	Sincerely yours,
	Yours sincerely	Yours sincerely,
Portuguese	Estimada doutora	Estimada Doutora: or Estimada Doutora,
Spanish	estimada Sra. López:	Estimada Sra. López:
	Atentamente	Atentamente,
Time and date notation

English (US)	May 10 1993	May 10, 1993
French	3 h. 15	3 h 15
Portuguese	4, Julho de 1776	4 de Julho de 1776 (European)  4 de julho de 1776 (Brazilian)
Spanish	10 de mayo 1993	10 de mayo de 1993
Cardinal and ordinal numbers

English	3nd in line	3rd in line
French	soixante-onze	soixante et onze
German	5,000,000.00	5 000 000,00
Portuguese	trezentos e trinta nove	trezentos e trinta e nove
Spanish	treintiuno	treinta y uno
Fractions

English	1 and ¼	1¼
French	3½ l de vin blanc	3,5 l de vin blanc
Portuguese	1e ¼	1¼
Spanish	3 y ½	3½
Currency notation

English	45,000 £	£ 45,000
German	DM 20.50	20,50 DM
Spanish	500ptas.	500 ptas.
Postal addresses

English	Portland, ME, 04321	Portland, ME 04321
French	23 avenue Louise	23, avenue Louise
Portuguese	Rua Santa Helena 31	Rua Santa Helena, 31
Units of measure

English	34 °	34°
Portuguese	34 °	34°
Spanish	34°C	34 °C
 Related Topics


Homonyms (Quick Proof mode)

English	acclimation	vs.	acclamation
	assent	vs.	ascent
Portuguese	assento	vs.	acento
Spanish	basto	vs.	vasto
	brasa	vs.	braza


Inappropriate prepositions (Quick Proof mode)

English	accompanied with	accompanied by
Portuguese	defronte a	defronte de
Spanish	a vapor	de vapor


Misspelled expressions (Quick Proof mode)
Misspelled expressions

English	baited breath	bated breath
	slight of hand	sleight of hand
	spinal chord	spinal cord
French	de plein-pied	de plain-pied
Portuguese	dar a luz a	dar à luz
Spanish	a campo través	a campo traviesa


Misspelled foreign expressions (Quick Proof mode)

English	a dente	al dente
	en mass	en masse
Portuguese	sin qua non	sine qua non
Spanish	curriculum vita	curriculum vitae


Noun-phrase agreement errors (Romance languages (Quick Proof Mode))
Noun-phrase agreement errors (Romance languages) (Quick Proof Mode)

International Proofreader flags errors of number and gender agreement between nouns, adjectives, and articles in the Romance languages:

French	Je déclare la séance ouvert.	Je déclare la séance ouverte.
	Ce sont les voitures les plus grande qu’on n’ait jamais vues.	Ce sont les voitures les plus grandes qu’on n’ait jamais vues.
	Elle s’est toujours méfié de ces gens-là.	Elle s’est toujours méfiée de ces gens-là.
Italian	un grande casa	una grande casa
Portuguese	as estradas sobre os quais	as estradas sobre as quais
Spanish	la agua	el agua
 Related Topics


Punctuation errors (Quick Proof mode)

The correct placement of quotation marks and other punctuation varies from language to language. International Proofreader flags errors in the following uses of punctuation and explains the correct punctuation with examples and tutorials:

Paired punctuation

English	May I borrow the "Wall Street Journal from you?	May I borrow the "Wall Street Journal" from you?
Ellipsis and suspended discourse

English	The brave men .... have consecrated it, far above our poor power to add or detract.	The brave men ... have consecrated it, far above our poor power to add or detract.
Portuguese	E tudo muito belo e bem feito, mas....	E tudo muito belo e bem feito, mas...
Spanish	"Su gestión diplomática (...) se vio recompensada con el tratado de 1679."	"Su gestión diplomática [...] se vio recompensada con el tratado de 1679."
Order of punctuation

English	Marie asked, "Was anyone there that day"?	Marie asked, "Was anyone there that day?"
Portuguese	Maria perguntou: "Tinha alguém em casa"?	Maria perguntou: "Tinha alguém em casa?"
Spanish	La agencia estará cerrada el próximo lunes (25 de diciembre.)	La agencia estará cerrada el próximo lunes (25 de diciembre).
Punctuation combinations

English	Our manager will be at a conference on her birthday (May 1.).	Our manager will be at a conference on her birthday (May 1).
Portuguese	Ela repetiu: "Eu disse a ele: ‘Você está com a rozão!"	Ela repetiu: "Eu disse a ele: ‘Você está com a rozão!’"
Punctuation in combination with certain words

English	i.e.,	, i.e.,
German	daß	, daß
Spanish	etc.	, etc.
Punctuation in abbreviations

English	She completed her B.A. degree last year.	She completed her BA degree last year.
 Related Topics


Stock phrases(Quick Proof mode)

These rules flag stock phrases that can often be deleted without changing the meaning or emphasis of a sentence.  Unlike clichés, these expressions are not worn-out metaphors or conventional descriptive phrases.  Instead they are introductory or parenthetical expressions often used as "filler:"

it goes without saying that

in fact

Use sparingly

Consider omitting or rephrase with

of course

 Related Topics


Ungrammatical expressions (Quick Proof mode)

English	anyways	anyway
	irregardless	regardless
Portuguese	abridas	abertas
Spanish	celebrísimo	celebérrimo
	hubieron conciertos	hubo conciertos
 Related Topics


Archaic expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	oftentimes	often
 Related Topics


Clichés (Full Proof mode)

English	a far cry from	very different from
German	blutjung	sehr jung
Spanish	perder los estribos	enfadarse or encolerizarse
Portuguese	De cabo a rabo	Do princípio ao fim
 Related Topics


Contractions (Full Proof mode)

English	Everyone’s happy.	Everyone is happy.
Portuguese	procê	para você
 Related Topics


Gender-specific expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	manpower	personnel or work force or staff
	anchorman or	anchor or newscaster or
	anchorwoman	commentator
 Related Topics


Informal expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	still and all	still
French	des fois	parfois or quelquefois
German	ein Haufen	viele
Spanish	un montón de	muchos, muchas
 Related Topics


Jargon expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	to eyeball	to look over
 Related Topics


Overused phrases (Full Proof mode)

English	bare essentials	essentials
Portuguese	apoio incondicional	apoio total
Spanish	altamente improbable	muy improbable
 Related Topics


Pretentious words (Full Proof mode)

English	author a report	write a report
 Related Topics


Redundant expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	ask a question about	ask about
Portuguese	acabamento final	acabamento
Spanish	regalo gratis	regalo
 Related Topics


Sexist expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	the little woman	spouse or partner or wife
 Related Topics


Unnecessary prepositions (Full Proof mode)

English	divide up	divide
Portuguese	comentar sobre	comentar
Spanish	opinar de que	opinar que
 Related Topics


Vague quantifiers (Full Proof mode)

English	a lot of	many
 Related Topics


Wordy expressions (Full Proof mode)

English	a sufficient number	enough
French	arriver à une décision	décider
German	angeblich soll	angeblich or soll
Portuguese	fazer uma chamada pelo telefone	telefonar
Spanish	dar comienzo a	comenzar
 Related Topics


Formality levels

Documents and writing styles vary in degree of formality. Because informal documents may not require adherence to such stringent rules as formal documents, International Proofreader’s Rule Manager allows you to choose from three levels of formality. You can set the formality level for the current session only or customize it, save it in a user profile, and load the user profile in future sessions. The Table below summarizes the features and suggested uses of the three formality levels.

Formality Level	On/Off Status of Rules	Types of Documents
Formal	All rules are on.	Contracts
	Job applications
	Doctoral dissertations
	Correspondence to a board of directors
	Correspondence to a head of state
Standard	Some rules are off (in English,
	for example, rules that
	flag contractions).	Most business correspondence
	Press releases
Informal	The following rule types are off:	Personal letters
	Archaic expressions	Informal memos between colleagues
	Clichés
	Contractions
	Gender-specific expressions
	Informal expressions
	Jargon expressions
	Overused phrases
	Pretentious words
	Stock phrases
	Vague terms
	Weak modifiers and quantifiers
	Wordy expressions
The Rule Manager can display the on/off status of each rule type for the chosen formality level at any time.

 Related Topics


Languages supported by the International Proofreader

The International Proofreader, Hyphenator, and Thesaurus support the languages indicated below.

With the exception of Spanish and Portuguese, you can display error messages in the language of the current dictionary or U.S. English.

Languages supported	Database file names
Proofreader
Danish	PDN2S152.DAT
Dutch	PDU1M111.DAT
U.K. and U.S. English	PEN3M111.DAT
Finnish	PFN2S111.DAT
French	PFR1M111.DAT
German	PGR1M111.DAT
Italian	PIT1M140.DAT
Norwegian	PNO2S120.DAT
European and
Brazilian Portuguese	PPO3M140.DAT
Spanish	PSP3M150.DAT
Swedish	PSW2S131.DAT
Hyphenator
Danish	HDANIS10.DAT
Dutch	HDUTCH11.DAT
English	HENGLI16.DAT
Finnish	HFINNI14.DAT
French	HFRENC05.DAT
German	HGERMA06.DAT
Italian	HITALI09.DAT
Norwegian	HNORWE13.DAT
European and
Brazilian Portuguese	HPORTU12.DAT
Spanish	HSPANI08.DAT
Swedish	HSWEDI07.DAT
Thesaurus
Danish	RDNTF300.DAT
Dutch	RDUTF300.DAT
English U.K.	REKTF400.DAT
English U.S.	REUTF410.DAT
Finnish	RFNTF400.DAT
French	RFRTF300.DAT
German	RGRTF400.DAT
Italian	RITTF310.DAT
Norwegian	RNOTF313.DAT
Brazilian Portuguese	RPBTF331.DAT*
Spanish	RSPTF302.DAT
Swedish	RSWTF300.DAT
Note

Thesaurus support for Portuguese is available in Brazilian Portuguese only.


Personal Dictionary

To check the spelling in your document, International Proofreader compares each word in the document with the words in the database and returns an error message when a word is not found there. For users who want to save specialized terms that are not in the database, the International Proofreader provides the Personal Dictionary. If you select a personal database before or during proofreading, the International Proofreader compares each word in your document with the words in that personal database. If the word is found in the personal database or International Proofreader database, the International Proofreader accepts the word as correctly spelled.

The International Proofreader’s Personal Dictionary component also allows you to do the following:

Add words to a personal database.

Specify whether a given personal database should be opened for the current language only or for all languages.

 Related Topics


Language and dialect options

The International Proofreader includes rules, error messages, and descriptions specific to each dialect of English 	U.S. and U.K. and Portuguese [image] European and Brazillian.

 Related Topics


Spelling correction options

For each language that you initialize, you can specify whether you want International Proofreader to retrieve and display all possible corrections for words not found in the spelling database. You can also specify whether you want The International Proofreader to compare each word in your document with the words in any initialized personal databases during proofreading. If the word is found in the personal database, the International Proofreader accepts the word as correctly spelled (unless the word has been assigned a negative flag).

 Related Topics


Error language

For all languages except Portuguese and Spanish, you can display error messages in either the current language or in US English.

 Related Topics


Rule language

For all languages except Portuguese, and Spanish, you can display the descriptions of rule types in either the current language or in US English.

 Related Topics


Maximum sentence elements

You can set the maximum number of sentence elements for each language that you initialize. Sentence elements are words or punctuation that International Proofreader treats as units. The default setting for each language should be acceptable for most text; you should not change the default unless you need to reduce the memory overhead required by the buffer-processing function.

Language-Specific Options

You can choose options that customize the International Proofreader’s processing to reflect your preferences for specific languages.

 Related Topics


COLOR MODEL RADIO BUTTON


Click the color model radio button to use a model for color editing. Color models are listed in the Model list box. Your choice of model is based on whether you are working with a drawing or an image. If you’re working with an image, you choice is further limited by the image mode. When you choose a model, number boxes for the model’s digital components are displayed to the left of the Model drop-down list.


PALETTES RADIO BUTTON


Click the palettes radio button to use a color matching palette. Palettes are listed in the Type list box. You may want to use the palettes if you are working with spot or process color systems by DIC, DuPont®, FOCOLTONE®, PANTONE®, TOYO, or TRUMATCH®. By using these palettes along with a color reference book, you can be reasonably certain of how the colors will look when printed. The Uniform palette is also provided, with colors based on the RGB color model.


MIXERS RADIO BUTTON


Click the mixers radio button to use either the Color Blend or the Mixing area to create a custom color. The mixing modes are listed in the Mode list box.


LIST BOX


Lists the color models, color matching palettes, and mixing modes [image] depending on the radio button that you enable. The label changes to "Model" for color models, "Type" for palettes, and "Mode" for mixers. Click this box to display the models, types, and modes that are available.


REFERENCE COLOR


The Reference Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the dialog box, or the last color placed in the reference area from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. The contents of this swatch remains unchanged, regardless of the color editing you undertake, until you update it by clicking the Update Reference Color Button.


NEW COLOR


The New Color swatch shows the color of the selected object when you open the dialog box, or the last color selected from the color models, color matching palettes, mixers, or the custom palette. If this color is not available in the color gamut of the delivery system (which is usually your printer), the Printable Color swatch appears below it to show the color you’ll print in place of the New Color. You can update the New Color with the Printable Color by clicking Update New Color button.


PRINTABLE COLOR


The Printable Color swatch shows the color that will print if the color in the New Color swatch is not possible in the printer’s color space. The gamut mapping used to do this is determined using the Color Manager. Change the printable color to the new color by clicking the Update New Color button. When the edited color does fall within the printer’s color space, this color does not display.


UPDATE REFERENCE COLOR BUTTON


Click the update reference color button to use the New Color as the Reference Color. This is useful when you are matching colors and wish to update your reference point. To swap the Reference and New Colors, use the Color Options, Swap Color menu selection.


UPDATE NEW COLOR BUTTON


Click the update new color button to use the Printable Color as the New Color, which you can then edit. This button appears only if the New Color is not available in the printer’s color space and a Printable Color swatch is displayed.


COMPONENT FIELDS


The color component fields show the numeric values of the selected color. These fields are accessible when you have edited the New Color through a color model or a mixer. They are inaccessible (grayed out) if the color is selected from a color matching palette. Components change for each color model and palette selected. For colors in the custom palette, the components correspond to the color model or color matching palette through which the color was edited.


NAME FIELD


The color name field shows the name of the selected color, if a name is available. Color names are shown only for the color matching palettes, the custom palette, and the color buttons for the Color Blend (which correspond to swatches in the custom palette). Use this field to name a new color or to rename the selected color in the custom palette. Colors in the color matching palettes cannot be renamed.


CUSTOM PALETTE


Shows the colors in the current user palette. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. You can create new custom palettes and save them to create a library of palettes.


COLOR OPTIONS BUTTON


Click this button to open the Color Options menu. Use this menu to add the selected color to the custom palette, to swap the Reference Color with the Selected Color, and to use the features of the color model, palettes, and mixers.


PALETTE OPTIONS BUTTON


Click this button to open the Palette Options menu. Use this menu to rename or delete the selected color on the custom palette, to open and save the custom palette, and to start a new custom palette.


CMY


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a CMY device, such as a 3-ink printer. C, M, and Y values range between 0 and 255. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the C, M, and Y values; the vertical visual selector scales all current C, M, and Y values geometrically.


CMYK


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black ("K" is used to indicate black). Use this color model to use CMYK values on a percentage scale (0 to 100). Color values correspond to CMYK swatches. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow; the vertical visual selector defines the level of black. This model is based on the printer primary colors.


CMYK 255


Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black ("K" is used to indicate black). Use this color model to use CMYK values on a computer-based scale (0 to 255). The three-dimensional visual selector defines the level of cyan, magenta, and yellow; the vertical visual selector defines the level of black. This model is based on the printer primary colors.


RGB


Red, Green, Blue. Use this color model if the drawing or image will be produced on a radiant device, such as a computer monitor or a television screen, or on a transparent media such as slides. R, G, and B values range between 0 and 255. The three-dimensional visual selector defines the R, G, and B values; the vertical Visual adjusts color brightness by scaling all current R, G, and B values geometrically. This model is based on the light primary colors.


HSB


Hue, Saturation, Brightness. An alternative to RGB. Hue determines color, saturation determines color depth, and brightness determines the percentage of white used to make the color lighter or darker. This model is the closest approximation to how we perceive color. There are three visual selectors. The circular selector is for hue (0 to 360), and the vertical selector is for brightness (0 to 100). The triangular selector is used to simultaneously adjust saturation (0 to 100) and brightness. Also known as HSV (hue, saturation, value). The HLS color model is a variant.


HLS


Hue, Lightness, Saturation. A variation on HSB and an alternative to RGB. Hue determines color (yellow, orange, red, etc.), lightness determines perceived intensity (lighter or darker color), and saturation determines color depth (from dull to intense). The circular visual selector defines the H value (0 to 360) and the S value (0 to 100); the vertical visual selector defines the L value (0 to 100).


LAB


The color model developed by Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIE) based on three parameters: lightness (L*), green to red chromaticity (a*), and blue to yellow chromaticity (b*). The square two-dimensional visual selector defines the a* and b* coordinates from -60 to 60; the vertical visual selector defines the L* value from 0 to 100. This model is device-independent, and encompasses the color gamuts of both the CMYK and the RGB color models.


YIQ


YIQ is the color model used in television broadcast systems (North American video standard - NTSC). Colors are split into a luminance value (Y) and two chromaticity values (I and Q). On a color monitor, all three components are visible; on a monochrome monitor, only the Y component is visible. The square two-dimensional visual selector defines the I and Q values, and the vertical visual selector defines the Y value. All values are scaled from 0 to 255. In Corel PHOTO-PAINT, the Y component of the splitting process produces a grayscale image that is often superior to results obtained with a grayscale conversion using the Convert To command from the Image menu.


GRAYSCALE COLOR MODEL


Use grayscale to choose from 256 shades of gray. Each colors is defined as a single value between 0 and 255, where 0 is darkest (black) and 255 is lightest (white). A single visual selector is used. A grayscale value can also be thought of in terms of the other color models: in RGB, a grayscale value corresponds to equal amounts of all RGB colors; in CMYK, a grayscale value corresponds to zero C, M, and Y values with a positive K value; in HSB, a grayscale value corresponds to zero H and S values with a positive B value.


UNIFORM PALETTE


The uniform palette offers 255 standard RGB colors for quick selection. Colors are expressed as RGB values to the right of the Type box. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name through the Color Options menu (the color names correspond to the R, G, and B values).


DIC PALETTES


Offers colors that are available through the DIC Color Guide, DIC Color Guide Part II, and DIC Traditional Colors of Japan. Colors in these palettes are created by mixing DIC brand inks. Reproduction through Corel applications is achieved through the CMYK color space. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. Swatches are identified by palette and color ID code:

DIC id# for DIC Color Guide

DIC Part II id# for DIC Color Guide Part II

DIC Traditional id# for DIC Traditional Colors of Japan


DUPONT PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the DuPont® Spectramaster® solid color library. This library was developed to provide a paint color selection and matching tool for industrial coatings and colorants. Colors are based on L*a*b* and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


FOCOLTONE PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the FOCOLTONE® color system. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


PANTONE SPOT COLORS PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the PANTONE® Spot Colors (also known as PANTONE® Matching System). You define tint through the Tint Number Box, ranging from 0 (lightest) to 100 (darkest) to control saturation. You can also define PostScript options. Since spot colors correspond to solid inks and are not CMYK-based, each unique color applied to an object results in an additional color separation plate. In Corel DRAW, you can use spot colors freely. In PHOTO-PAINT, you can use spot colors only in CMYK images to affect duotones. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. See also PANTONE® Process Color system.


PANTONE PROCESS COLOR PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the PANTONE® Process Color system, which is based on the CMYK color model. The first 2,000 colors are two-color combinations; the remainder are three- and four-color combinations. Colors are based on CMYK, and therefore do not add additional color separation plates. Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu. See also PANTONE® Spot Colors.


TOYO PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the TOYO 88 Color Finder system. The range of colors offered here includes those created using TOYO process inks and those that are reproduced using TOYO standard inks. These colors are defined using the L*a*b* color space and are converted to RGB for display and CMYK for printing. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


TRUMATCH PALETTE


Offers colors that are available through the TRUMATCH® color system. This system is based on the CMYK color model and therefore colors do not add additional color separation plates. Colors are organized by hue (red to violet), saturation (deep to pastel), and brightness (adding or removing black). Use the scroll bar on the right to display other areas of the palette. Colors can be displayed by name or swatch through the Color Options menu.


COLOR SEARCH FIELD


Click the Search field to find a color in the palette using the color name. You can search on a full or partial name. Color names consist of two parts: the first is the palette name, and the second is the color name or code. A search can be done using only the color name or code.


TINT FIELD


Used the Tint field to control the saturation of the selected PANTONE® Spot Color. This color parameter is available only for the PANTONE® Spot Color palette.


COLOR BLEND


Use the color blend to create a four-way blend of color and choose from the range of color variations. Grids are square, ranging in size from 3x3 to 12x12 (smaller grids produce more distinct colors while larger grids produce more subtle color variations). Colors are selected from the custom palette and can be mapped to the CMYK, RGB, and HSB color models.


COLOR BUTTON


The color button displays the color chosen for this corner of the grid. Click the color button in each corner to display the custom palette from which you can choose a new color.


AUTOBLEND BUTTON


Click this button to enable or disable automatic blending. When enabled, colors are automatically blended in the grid when a new color is selected in the color boxes. When disabled, colors are not automatically blended in the grid.


MIXING AREA


Use the mixing area to mix any number of colors from the color models, palettes, or color blend. The color in the New Color swatch is the active color in the mixing area.


PAINT BRUSH


Use the paint brush to apply color to the mixing area (the cursor changes to a paintbrush). Adjust the blend value through the Blend number box (this is a means of controlling color saturation). Brush size can be adjusted to small, medium, or large through the Color Options button.


EYEDROPPER


Used to pick up color from the mixing area (the cursor changes to an eye dropper).


BLEND FIELD


Click the Blend number box to increase or decrease the amount of color blending when you apply color to the mixing area. A large value increases the blending effect (the color is more transparent); a low value decreases the blending effect (the color is more opaque).


OPEN DIALOG


Lists the folders and files in the selected location. To see what’s inside a folder, double-click it. You can also use the Look In box to see the hierarchy of folders.


Lists the available folders and files.  To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy on your computer, click the down arrow. To see what’s inside a folder, click it. The box below shows the folders and files in the selected location. You can also double-click a folder or file in that box to open it.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the file. You can use * as a wildcard. For example, you can type *.* to see a list of all files.


Lists the type of files to display. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you’re interested in.


Opens the file with the name, file type, and location you have specified.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Displays a thumbnail image of the currently selected graphics file. If a non-graphics file is selected, the Preview window is de-activated and appears crossed through with an X.

Note
You must enable the Preview check box to display graphics files in the Preview window. If this check box is disabled, the Preview window appears crossed through with an X.


Displays the progress of the selected file as it loads into the Preview window.


Use the scroll bar to visually scroll through a file containing more than one graphic item. Executable (EXE) files, for example, often contain icons and cursors which may be viewed in the Preview window.

Only graphics files will appear in the Preview window. Non-graphics files are not displayed.


Click the Preview check box (if it is not already enabled) to see a thumbnail of your image. When Preview is disabled an X appears in the Preview window. Also, vector files that do not have a BMP header associated with them cannot be previewed and appear as an X.


Click the down arrow to display a drop-down box listing several different methods of opening files. You can load files as:

Full Image
Loads the entire file. If the file you are opening is too large for your system resources, "not enough memory" is displayed. The file is loaded as a partial area.

Crop
Loads a cropped area. The Crop Image dialog box opens. Crop an area.

Resample
Loads a resampled version of the file. The Resample dialog box opens. Resample an area.

Partial Load
Loads a partial area. The Partial Area dialog box opens. Select an area.


Click to view file information such as image size, file format, keywords, notes, and suppress filter.


Click to open the About Import Filter dialog box that displays information about the currently selected file/filter type (i.e., Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image, CPT).


Select filter.


Displays the image dimensions (in pixels) and image color mode.


Displays the file format of the currently selected image (e.g., Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image (CPT) Uncompressed).


Displays a list of all notes that are attached to the currently selected file.


Provides a space for you to type file keywords. These keywords are used to find files stored on your system. You can type single words, phrases, or combinations of both. Use commas to separate each keyword.


To use OPI links, you must enable the "Link to high resolution file for output using OPI" option when importing your TIFF (or CT) files. These TIFF (or CT) images become known as OPI images. When your service bureau receives your print file, the OPI server substitutes the high-resolution images for the low-resolution images. If there are no OPI images in your file, the Maintain OPI Links option will not be available at print time.


Enable the radio button to import the file onto a new slide.


Enable the radio button to import the file onto the current slide.


Enable the radio button to import the file onto the current background.


When enabled, suppresses the dialog box that lets you specify options for opening, importing, exporting, or saving a file to or from the specified file format. The program automatically assigns default settings.


Enable this check box when importing vector formats only. If turned on, CorelDRAW eliminates redundant points in the imported graphic. Set the tolerance value in the number box. This value controls how much the curve can vary from the original. A small value forces high accuracy, but will result in more points.


SAVE DIALOG


Lists the folders and files in the selected location. To see what’s inside a folder, double-click it. You can also use the Look In box to see the hierarchy of folders.


Lists the available folders and files. To see how the current folder fits in the hierarchy on your computer, click the down arrow. To see what’s inside a folder, click it. The box below shows the folders and files in the selected location. You can also double-click a folder or file in that box to open it.


Provides a space for you to type the name of the file.


Lists the type of files to display. This is useful for narrowing the list of files displayed to only those files you’re interested in.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Click to displays an overview of this dialog box. For help on an item, click the ? button at the top of the dialog box, and then click the item.


Click to open the About Import Filter dialog box that displays information about the currently selected file/filter type (i.e., Corel PHOTO-PAINT Image, CPT).


Displays a list of all keywords that are attached to the currently selected file.


Displays a list of all notes that are attached to the currently selected file.


Displays a drop-down box listing the available compression types. The compression types vary with the file/filter type selected in the Save as type: drop-down box. Click to select a compression type before saving.


When enabled, suppresses the dialog box that lets you specify options for opening, importing, exporting, or saving a file to or from the specified file format. The program automatically assigns default settings.


Enable to create a backup copy of the file when saved.


Enable to save only selected objects.

Note
Ensure that you have selected the desired objects before choosing Save, otherwise this option will be grayed out.


CROP DIALOG


Overview info


Crop Image dialog box

The Crop Image dialog box allows you to crop an image before loading. The cropping is permanent and creates a new, smaller image.

For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


What’s This?


Displays the path, file name, and file extension of the image to be cropped.


Displays the image with a bounding box. Move the nodes on the bounding box to crop the image. Use the Hand cursor to move the bounding box to a specific area of the image.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the height of the cropped area.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the width of the cropped area.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to position the top of the cropped area.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to position the left side of the cropped area.


Click to select the entire image or to resize the bounding box to cover the entire area and reselect the cropped area.


Displays a drop-down box listing a number of image measurement units. The values displayed in the Width and Height number boxes will reflect the measurement unit selected here.


Displays the size of the new, cropped image in bytes.


RESAMPLE


Overview


Resample dialog box

The Resample dialog box creates a new image, resampled to a smaller size.

For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


What’s This?


Displays the path, file name, and file extension of the image to be resampled.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the width of the resampled image.


Enter a number or use the scroll arrows to select the height of the resampled image.


Displays a drop-down box displaying a number of measurement units by which you can resample an image. The values displayed in the Width and Height boxes reflect the chosen unit of measurement.


Displays the width of the original file according to the measurement unit selected in the Units drop-down box.


Displays the height of the original file according to the measurement unit selected in the Units drop-down box.


Controls the horizontal resolution of the image currently being resampled. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail.


Displays the horizontal resolution of the original image prior to resampling.


Displays the vertical resolution of the original image prior to resampling.


Controls the vertical resolution of the image currently being resampled. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values. Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Enable to maintain the image aspect ratio (the image width and height proportions rated in percentage values). Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Displays the original image size in bytes prior to resampling.


Displays the new image size in bytes based on the current resampling settings.


BITMAP


Bitmap Import/Export dialog box

Use this dialog box to specify how you want to import or export bitmap files.

For more information on the options included in this dialog box, use the What’s This? online Help tool.


Displays a drop-down list box where you choose a color mode. Choose the number of shades of gray or the number of colors you want.

The greater the number of colors, the larger the file.

Black and white = 1 bit

16 shades of gray = 4 bits

256 shades of gray = 8 bits

16 colors = 4 bits

256 colors = 8 bits

16 million colors = 24 bits

CMYK image = 32 bits

Not all levels of color or grayscale are supported by all the bitmap formats. If you have chosen a bitmap format that does not support a gray or color format, the option will not appear in the list box. For example, SCITEX CT is only exportable in CMYK, 32-bit format.


Dithers the colors and gray shades in the file. Dithering may produce better results when you use fewer colors than the original image. If the image contains fountain fills or color blends, dithering can cause obvious banding. Here are some guidelines to help you decide whether to dither the bitmap:

When you are importing 16 or 256 colors or grays, use dithering.

When you intend to scale the bitmap in another application, dithering is not recommended.


Specifies the resolution (in dots per inch) for bitmaps. Choose one of the preset resolutions from the list box or choose Custom and type or choose the resolution in the DPI box.

Note
As the resolution increases, so does the size of the file and the time required to print the image.


Specifies the dimensions of the bitmap. Choose one of the preset sizes from the list box or choose Custom and type the dimensions in the Width and Height boxes. If a size is not selected, the original size of the image is used.


Compresses the imported file so that it takes less disk space. Compressed files take more time to save and load. Compression is optional for some bitmap formats; for others, compression is always performed.


Shows the estimated size of the imported file before compression. Compressed files will be smaller than the value displayed.


Returns to the settings that were in effect when you opened the dialog box.


Enable to maintain equal horizontal and vertical resolution values. Any value entered in one box will cause the other box to change automatically.


Controls the width of the file in pixels. To change the file width, type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new value.


Controls the height of the file in pixels. To change the file height, type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new value.


Type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new vertical resolution (dpi) value. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to select a dpi value.

Note
High resolutions require large amounts of disk space.


Type (or use the scroll arrows to select) a new horizontal resolution (dpi) value. Resolution refers to the fineness of image detail and the amount of information required to record, store, display and print an image. Resolution is measured in dots per inch (dpi), referring to the number of pixels used to construct an image. Choose a resolution in keeping with the resolution of both your monitor and (if you plan to print an image) printer. When you work with an image that you want to print, choose a resolution close to the maximum dpi output value of your printer, otherwise you may not be able to print much of what you see on screen. If you do not plan to print an image, you can freely choose a higher resolution to maximum image detail. Enter a value in the number box or use the scroll arrows to select a dpi value.

Note
High resolutions require large amounts of disk space.


Creates a smoother graphics file by removing the jagged edges from the original.


Displays text just as you entered it. Numbers display without leading or trailing zeroes, and with no thousands separators.

You can use the & placeholder symbol to add a common string to another string. For example, the format string "Hello," & ",you may have already won $5,000,000.00" would format the string "John Doe" as: Hello, John Doe, you may have already won $5,000,000.00.

Note the use of the quotation marks around the strings before and after the &. You must include these when creating your own General format.


Creates date/time formats.

The default date and time formats are based upon the current International settings which you can modify using the Windows Control Panel.


Creates numeric formats to display non-linear values, including currency.


Creates Linear formats to display measurements in the Imperial or Metric system, or in picas and points. Each format can have one or two entries with the first used for the major (or larger unit) and the second the minor (or smaller unit). If the first unit contains digits after the decimal, or a fraction, then you cannot enter a minor unit.

When entering values for formats with major and minor units, enter them in the minor units. A format with miles as the major and feet as the minor unit, for example, would be entered in feet.


Provides a space for you to edit the built-in format or type a new format.


Removes the selected format.


Lists available formats.


Opens the System Info dialog box where you can get information about your system, display, network, printing, Corel EXEs & DLLs and system DLLs.


Displays the disk space and memory available on the drive where the program is installed.


Displays the name of the registered user and the serial number.Displays copyright information.


Displays the version of the product currently installed.


Displays the name of the product.


Double-clicking the CorelDRAW balloon opens the credits window. To view the credits, clickthe balloon in the credits window and hold down the mouse button. To exit the credits and return to your program, click the ESC button.


Provides a list of system information categories. Click one of the following:

System	Displays information about your computer For example, Windows version or processor.
Date/Time	Displays information about your monitor. For example, driver,or driver version.
Network	Displays information about the network. For example, drivers or whether a network is installed.
Printing	Displays information about installed printers.
Corel EXEs and DLLs	Displays information all of the Corel EXEs and DLLs.
System DLLs:	Displays all of the system DLLs.


Displays the system information for the chosen category.


Saves all system information as SYSINFO.TXT. Once it's saved, a message box will appear informing you where the file was saved to.


Determines the number of pixels per unit of measure for the horizontal ruler.


Determines the number of pixels per unit of measure for the vertical ruler.


To view system information

1.	Click Window, About CorelDRAW.

2.	Click the System Info button.

3.	Click a category from the Category list box.

Tip

Use the Save button to store system information for printing. System information is saved as SYSINFO.TXT. A message box lets you know where the file is saved.

 Related Topics


To view program information

Click Window, About CorelDRAW.

Tip

Click the System Info button to get information about your system, display, network, printing, Corel EXEs and DLLs and system DLLs

 Related Topics